RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description V100R003C03 01

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
V100R003C03
IDU Hardware Description

Issue
01
Date
2011-10-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document
About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Version
OptiX RTN 950
V100R003C03
iManager U2000
V100R006C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
Network planning engineer
Hardware installation engineer
Installation and commissioning engineer
Field maintenance engineer
Data configuration engineer
System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l
Basics of digital microwave communication
Basics of the OptiX RTN 950
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,
which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

ii

About This Document
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level
of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points of the main
text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
iii

About This Document
Convention
Description
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03

This document is the first issue for the V100R003C03 product version.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

iv

Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Network Application..........................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Components........................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Radio Link Types...............................................................................................................................................7
2 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................8
2.1 Chassis Structure................................................................................................................................................9
2.2 Installation Mode................................................................................................................................................9
2.3 Air Flow..............................................................................................................................................................9
2.4 IDU Labels.......................................................................................................................................................10
3 Boards............................................................................................................................................13
3.1 Board Appearance............................................................................................................................................15
3.2 Board List.........................................................................................................................................................16
3.3 CST...................................................................................................................................................................19
3.3.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................19
3.3.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................19
3.3.3 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................21
3.3.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................23
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................29
3.3.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................30
3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................31
3.3.8 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................32
3.4 CSH..................................................................................................................................................................33
3.4.2 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................33
3.4.3 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................36
3.4.4 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................42
3.4.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................44
3.5 IF1.....................................................................................................................................................................46
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


Contents

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................48
3.5.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................53
3.5.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................55
3.6 IFU2..................................................................................................................................................................58
3.6.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................64
3.6.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................66
3.7 IFX2..................................................................................................................................................................69
3.7.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................76
3.7.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................78
3.8 ISU2..................................................................................................................................................................82
3.8.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................89
3.8.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................91
3.9 ISX2..................................................................................................................................................................96
3.9.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................103
3.9.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................106
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................107
3.9.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................107
3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA....................................................................................................................112
3.10.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................112
3.10.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................112
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................116
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

vi

Contents
3.10.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................119

3.10.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................125
3.10.6 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................126
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................128
3.10.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................128
3.11 EMS6............................................................................................................................................................134
3.11.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................141
3.11.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................145
3.11.6 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................146
3.12 EFP8.............................................................................................................................................................150
3.12.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................156
3.12.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................159
3.13 SL1D/SL1DA...............................................................................................................................................160
3.13.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................165
3.13.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................167
3.13.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................168
3.14 ML1/MD1.....................................................................................................................................................170
3.14.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................175
3.14.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................178
3.15 SP3S/SP3D...................................................................................................................................................180
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

vii

Contents

3.15.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................184
3.15.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................188
3.16 AUX..............................................................................................................................................................190
3.16.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................191
3.16.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................192
3.16.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................195
3.17 PIU................................................................................................................................................................197
3.17.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................199
3.17.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................200
3.18 FAN..............................................................................................................................................................201
3.18.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................203
3.18.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................205
3.19 TCU6............................................................................................................................................................205
3.19.3 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................206
3.19.4 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................209
4 Accessories..................................................................................................................................210
4.1 E1 Panel..........................................................................................................................................................211
4.2 PDU................................................................................................................................................................213
4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................213
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle..........................................................................................................214
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode......................................................................................................................215
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................217
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................219
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

viii

Contents
5.2 PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................................219

5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable..................................................................................................................................219
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................220
5.3 IF Jumper........................................................................................................................................................221
5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................222
5.5 Fiber Jumper...................................................................................................................................................223
5.6 STM-1 Cable..................................................................................................................................................225
5.7 E1 Cables........................................................................................................................................................226
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment...................................................................................226
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel.....................................................................................................230
5.7.3 E1 Transit Cable Terminated with an Anea 96 Connector and a DB44 Connector..............................232
5.8 Orderwire Cable.............................................................................................................................................234
5.9 Network Cable................................................................................................................................................234
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................238
A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................239
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................239
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching.........................................................................................239
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation...........................................................................................244
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs..................................................................246
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.....................................................................247
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time............................................250
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...........................................................251
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management.............................................................................252
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs.......................................253
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management.....................................................................................254
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting..................................................254
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration.......................................255
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.......257
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC..................................259
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management...................................................................260
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test............................................261
A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management........................263
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.........264
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test.................................265
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.................266
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP.............................................................271
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas.................................................272
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas..............273
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually
Aggregated................................................................................................................................................274
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting................................................................................275
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter......................................275
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

ix

Contents
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table........................................................276

A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel............................................................277
A.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters..............................................281
A.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management......................................282
A.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..........................................................283
A.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control.....................................................283
A.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control.....................................................284
A.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management..........................................................................285
A.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control.....................................................................................286
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management....................................................................................287
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management............................................................................287
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation............................................................287
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control..............................................................................290
A.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation.........................................................291
A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server.............................................292
A.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function...........................................293
A.2 Radio Link Parameters..................................................................................................................................294
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation...........................................294
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC..............................................................................299
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create...................................................................................306
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection................................................................................................307
A.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create................................................................................309
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection............................................................................................312
A.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA Group...................................................316
A.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA................................................................................316
A.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration......................................................................317
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters......................................................................................................327
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation.....................................................................................327
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP.....................................................................................................331
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters......................................................................................................................335
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation............................................................335
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation....................................337
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
........................................................................................................................................................................341
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration............................................................................345
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control....................................................................................347
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion...........................................................................................350
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces....................................................................................................................351
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters............................................................................................................................351
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes..................................................................351
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes...........................................................352
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................356
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.......................................................356
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


Contents
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control...........................................................360

A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...................................................362
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes...........................................................365
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes...............................................366
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters...........................................................................................................................369
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes..................................................................369
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.......................................................370
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters..........................................................................................................371
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes..................................................371
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................372
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes...............................................374
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes...........................................376
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters.............................................................................................................................379
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute........................................................................379
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.................................................................387
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes.................................389
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records...................................................................390
A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................391
A.5.6 ODU Parameters...................................................................................................................................392
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute...........................................392
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes..........................................................393
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information................................................397
A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes....................................................398
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards..................................................................................................399
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................400
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown...................................................................401
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards..................................................................................................402
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports..............................................................................................402
A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................405
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead......................................................................................................................406
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead..............................................................406
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs............................................................................................407
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs..........................................................................................409
A.5.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces............................................................................410
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane...............................................413
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................413
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation........................................................................413
A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service.......................................................................................434
A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line Services_Creation.............445
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation.......................................................................446
A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service......................................................................................452
A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation..............................................................................463
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

xi

Contents
A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation..................................................................463

A.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services..................................................................................471
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................476
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation................................................................476
A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................479
A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation...........................................485
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration..................................487
A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters.............................................487
A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters................................................493
A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST...............495
A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation.....................503
A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................511
A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT................................................512
A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT.................................514
A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.......................................514
A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT........................517
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................521
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................521
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................522
A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation............................523
A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation..............524
A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation.............................525
A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling..............................526
A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling..............................527
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection............529
A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter.............................530
A.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
..................................................................................................................................................................532
A.6.4 QoS Parameters....................................................................................................................................533
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management..............................................................533
A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create.................................................539
A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.......................................546
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management...............................................................................548
A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy.............................................................................................554
A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration..................................561
A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation.....................................................572
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane.....................................574
A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................574
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation.............................................................574
A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services
..................................................................................................................................................................578
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

xii

Contents
A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service.............................................................................582

A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE
802.1d/802.1q Bridge...............................................................................................................................584
A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN
Service......................................................................................................................................................588
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service............................................................................593
A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation............................................................599
A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries.........................................600
A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................601
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation................................................................601
A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................604
A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling.........................................................610
A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters........................................................611
A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters.............................................................612
A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information........................................614
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information............................................615
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute................................................616
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling......................................................617
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries
..................................................................................................................................................................618
A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries
..................................................................................................................................................................619
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs...................................620
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation....................................622
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT................623
A.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.......624
A.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation......................................................................625
A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................626
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs.............................................626
A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs.............................................627
A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs..............................................628
A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB....................................................630
A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT....................................................631
A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter...................................................632
A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring.............................633
A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter......................................634
A.7.4 QoS Parameters....................................................................................................................................635
A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows....................................................635
A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR.....................................................637
A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS......................................................639
A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS.............................................641
A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues................641
A.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping............................................................643
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

xiii

Contents
A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................644

A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port...................................................................644
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port....................................................................651
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames...................................................................657
A.8 RMON Parameters.........................................................................................................................................658
A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group...........................................................658
A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..............................................................659
A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group.................................................660
A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting.............................................................661
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services..........................................................................................................662
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.....................................................................................................................663
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels................................................663
A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel..........................................664
A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.......668
A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels.........672
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters...................................676
A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI.........................................................681
A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping................................................682
A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute......................................685
A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management......................................................688
A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation....................................................693
A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM...............................................................704
A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping.................................................................708
A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.......................................................711
A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management...................................................713
A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation......................................................716
A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation...................................................721
A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation.........732
A.9.2 CES Parameters....................................................................................................................................738
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management.....................................................................738
A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation.....................................................747
A.9.3 ATM Parameters...................................................................................................................................760
A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management.............................760
A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration............................765
A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status........................................767
A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status...........................................768
A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management........................768
A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table...........................770
A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation...........772
A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management.....................................................................774
A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation......................................................778
A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management..................................................................783
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

xiv

Contents
A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation..................................................792

A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes.....................804
A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status................................808
A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status...................811
A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID.........................................................814
A.10 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................815
A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters.................................................................................................................815
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table................................................................815
A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port
..................................................................................................................................................................817
A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet....................................................819
A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality...................................................822
A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control........................................825
A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status.................................826
A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters.........827
A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching..............................829
A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions...........830
A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source.............831
A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status............................................................834
A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters..............................................................................................................835
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source..............................................................................836
A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain......................................................................................836
A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation......................................................................837
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports..............................................................................................838
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...............................................................................838
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General.......................................................................................838
A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced....................................................................................840
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port................................................................................841
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port....................................................................841
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...............................................................842
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................846

C Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................848
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board................................................................865
E Glossary......................................................................................................................................867
E.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................868
E.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................868
E.3 F-J...................................................................................................................................................................877
E.4 K-O.................................................................................................................................................................882
E.5 P-T..................................................................................................................................................................888
E.6 U-Z.................................................................................................................................................................897
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

xv

1 Introduction
Introduction
About This Chapter

The OptiX RTN 950 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series.
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave
transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission
solution for mobile communication network or private networks.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
1.3 Radio Link Types
The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of various types in which different IF boards and
ODUs are configured for diverse microwave application scenarios.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


1 Introduction
1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave
transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission
solution for mobile communication network or private networks.
OptiX RTN 900 Product Family

There are three types of OptiX RTN 900 products: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950, and OptiX
RTN 980. Users can choose the product best suited for their site.
l
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards.
NOTE
All the products in the OptiX RTN 900 series use the same types of IF and service interface boards.
The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easily and
configured flexibly. The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a solution that can integrate TDM
microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave technologies according to the
networking scheme for the sites, achieving smooth upgrade from TDM microwave to Hybrid
microwave, and from Hybrid microwave to Packet microwave. This solution is able to adapt to
changing service scenarios brought about by evolutions in radio mobile networks. Therefore,
this solution meets the transmission requirements of 2G and 3G networks while also allowing
for integration with future LTE and 4G networks.
OptiX RTN 950

The OptiX RTN 950 is deployed at the access and convergence layers. Figure 1-1 shows the
microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950.
Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950
FE
E1/
STM-1
E1
E1
FE
E1/
STM-1
E1
Regional TDM
Network
FE/GE
E1
FE/GE
Regional Packet
Network
FE/GE
E1
FE
FE
OptiX RTN 950
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
E1
MSTP
NodeB

BTS
RNC
BSC

1 Introduction
NOTE
l In this solution, the OptiX RTN 950 is connected to an RNC and BSC directly or through a regional backhaul
network.
l The OptiX RTN 950 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the
regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM)
network or packet switching network (PSN).
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the Ethernet over SDH (EoSDH) function and Ethernet over PDH
(EoPDH) function. Therefore, packet services can be backhauled through a TDM network.
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology. Therefore,
TDM, ATM, and Ethernet services can be backhauled through a PSN.
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the VLAN sub-interface function. Therefore, MPLS packet services can
be backhauled through a Layer 2 network.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 950
The IDU 950 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 950 system. It receives and multiplexes
services, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control and
communications function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 950.
Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 950
Item
Description
Chassis height
2U
Pluggable
Supported
Number of microwave
directions
1 to 6
RF configuration mode
1+0 non-protection configuration

N+0 non-protection configuration (N 5)
1+1 protection configuration
N+1 protection configuration (N 4)
XPIC configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


1 Introduction
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 950
ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifies
signals.
The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering
the entire frequency band from 6 GHz to 38 GHz.
NOTE
Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz
frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs that the OptiX RTN 950 supports
Item
Description
Standard Power
ODU
High-Power ODU
Low Capacity for

PDH ODU
ODU type
SP, SPA
HP, HPA
LP
Frequency band
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/
26/38 GHz (SP
ODU)
6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/
15/18/23/26/28/32/3
8 GHz (HP ODU)
7/8/11/13/15/18/23
GHz (LP ODU)
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2
3 GHz (SPA ODU)
7/8/11/13/15/18/23
GHz (HPA ODU)
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
Microwave
modulation scheme
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

QPSK/16QAM

Item
1 Introduction
Description
Channel spacing
Standard Power
ODU
High-Power ODU
Low Capacity for

PDH ODU
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
7/14/28/40/56 MHz
(6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1
8/23/26/28/32/38
GHz)
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
7/14/28 MHz (10.5

GHz)
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs that the OptiX RTN 950 supports
Item
Description
High-Power ODU
Low Capacity for PDH

ODU
ODU type
XMC-2
XMC-1
Frequency band
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38
GHz
7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz
Microwave modulation
scheme
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/
64QAM/128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM
Channel spacing
7/14/28/40/56 MHz
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l
The direct mounting method is generally adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and
single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna,
the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for
one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hence referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting
method.
The direct mounting method can also be adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and
dual-polarized antenna is used. Two ODUs are mounted onto an antenna using an
orthomode transducer (OMT). The method for installing an OMT is similar to that for
installing a hybrid coupler.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


1 Introduction
Figure 1-3 Direct mounting
The separate mounting method is adopted when a large- or medium-diameter and singleor dual-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate mounting method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted (two ODUs share one feed boom).
Figure 1-4 Separate mounting
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 provides an antenna solution that covers the entire frequency band, and supports
single-polarized antennas and dual-polarized antennas with diameters of 0.3 m to 3.7 m along with the
corresponding feeder system.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


1 Introduction
1.3 Radio Link Types

The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of various types in which different IF boards and
ODUs are configured for diverse microwave application scenarios.
Table 1-4 Radio link types that the OptiX RTN 950 supports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Radio Link Type
System Control,
Switching, and
Timing Board
IF Board
ODU
Low-capacity PDH
microwave
CST
IF1
Low capacity for

PDH ODU
SDH/PDH
microwave
CST
IF1
Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
High-capacity SDH
microwave
CST
ISU2
Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
High-capacity SDH
microwave
supporting XPIC
CST
ISX2
Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
Integrated IP
microwave
CSH
IFU2
Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
Integrated IP
microwave
supporting XPIC
CSH
CSH
CSH
CSH
CSH
ISU2
IFX2
ISX2

Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU

2 Chassis
Chassis
About This Chapter

The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is a 2U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950 chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
950 chassis has a four-layered structure that is air cooled.
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 950 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
2.3 Air Flow
An IDU 950 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
2.4 IDU Labels
Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


2 Chassis
2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950 chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
950 chassis has a four-layered structure that is air cooled.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 950.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 950
H
D
2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 950 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
The IDU 950 can be installed:
l
In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet
In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet
In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet
In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
In a 19-inch open rack
In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment
On a wall
On a table
2.3 Air Flow

An IDU 950 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


2 Chassis
Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 950 chassis.

Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 950 chassis
2.4 IDU Labels

Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels
may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels
Label
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Label Name
Description
ESD protection
label
Indicates that the

equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label
Indicates the
grounding position
of the IDU chassis.

10

2 Chassis
Label
Label Name
Description
Fan warning label
Warns you not to

touch fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
High temperature
warning label
Indicates that the

board surface
temperature may
exceed 70C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55C.
Wear protective
gloves to handle
the board.
Power caution label
Instructs you to
read related
instructions before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
For details, see
Labels in 3.17.4
Front Panel.
/ QUALIFICATION CARD
Qualification card
label
Indicates that the

equipment has
been quality
checked.
RoHS label
Indicates that the

equipment
complies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.
HUAWEI
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA

11

2 Chassis
Label
Label Name
Description
Product nameplate
label
Indicates the
product name and
certification.
Operation guidance
label
Instructs you to
slightly pull the
switch lever
outwards before
setting the switch
to the "I" or "O"
position.
PULL
Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 950.
Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 950 labels
/QUALIFICATION CARD
50
HUAWEI
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
! WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

12

3 Boards
Boards
About This Chapter

The IDU 950 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing
boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan
boards.
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 950 chassis are 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm.
3.2 Board List
The IDU 950 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
3.3 CST
The CST is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.4 CSH
The CSH is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.9 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

13

3 Boards
3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA
The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE
electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/
EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed
electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore
can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the
EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
3.11 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.
3.12 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.
3.13 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide
STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by
the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.
3.14 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
3.15 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.16 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can house
only one AUX.
3.17 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
3.18 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.
3.19 TCU6
The TDM connecting unit (TCU6) is a 6xE1 port conversion board. The TCU6 implements
conversion between DB44 ports and RJ45 ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

14

3 Boards
3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 950 chassis are 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm.
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Board Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 950 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board
H
D
Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help
you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code
(as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.
Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Internal code
Board version
Board name
Board feature code

15

3 Boards
NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example,
the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module
being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the
impedance of E1 ports.
3.2 Board List

The IDU 950 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot
10
(PIU)
Slot
9
(PIU)
Slot
11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CST/CSH)
Slot 8 (CST/CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
NOTE
"EXT" represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.
Table 3-1 List of IDU boards

Board
Acronym
Board Name
CST
TDM control,
switching, and
timing board
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 7 or slot 8
l Provides full time division cross-connections for

VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 32x32
VC-4s.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function and supports
one external clock input/output function.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NE cascading interface.
l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

16

Board
Acronym
Board Name
CSH
Hybrid control,
switching, and
timing board
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 7 or slot 8
l Provides full time division cross-connections for

VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 32x32
VC-4s.
l Provides the 10 Gbit/s packet switching capability.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function and supports
one external clock input/output function.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NE cascading interface.
l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface.
ISU2
Universal IF
board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface.

l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH
microwave. The supported service modes are Native
E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH
(1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1).
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA)
function.
ISX2
Universal XPIC
IF board
Slot 1 to slot 6

l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH
microwave. The supported service modes are Native
E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH
(1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1).
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA)
function.
IF1
SDH IF board
Slot 1 to slot 6

l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave solution
and the STM-1-based SDH microwave solution.
IFU2
Universal IF
board
Slot 1 to slot 6

l Supports integrated IP microwave.
IFX2
Universal XPIC
IF board
Slot 1 to slot 6

l Supports integrated IP microwave.
l Supports the XPIC function.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

17

Board
Acronym
Board Name
SL1D
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
2xSTM-1
interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/

electrical interfaces.
SL1DA
2xSTM-1
interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/

EM6T/EM6TA
6-port RJ45
Ethernet/
Gigabit Ethernet
interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
4-port RJ45 + 2port SFP Fast

Ethernet/
Gigabit Ethernet
interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
8-port RJ45 FE
EoPDH
processing
board with the
switching
function
Slot 1 to slot 6
4-port RJ45 and

2-port SFP FE/
GE EoSDH
processing
board with the
switching
function
Slot 1 to slot 6
16xE1 (Smart)
tributary board
Slot 1 to slot 6
EM6F/EM6FA
EFP8
EMS6
ML1
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are

compatible with the FE electrical interface.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE/FE optical
interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE
l Provides eight FE electrical interfaces.
l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE
interface.
l Supports the processing of EoPDH services.
l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services
and Layer 2 switching services.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE optical or
electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are
compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
l Supports the processing of EoSDH services.
l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services
and Layer 2 switching services.
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1
interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.
MD1
32xE1 (Smart)
tributary board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1

interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.
SP3S
16xE1 tributary
board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1

interfaces.
SP3D
32xE1 tributary
board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or TDM 120-ohm E1

interfaces.
AUX
Auxiliary
interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous

data interface, one synchronous data interface, and fourinput and two-output external alarm interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

18

Board
Acronym
Board Name
TCU6
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
6xE1 connector
conversion
board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Provides one DB44 connector and six RJ45 connectors.

When being used with an E1 tributary board and an
Anea 96 to DB44 transit cable, it converts E1 interfaces
1 to 6 on the Anea 96 connector into RJ45 connectors.
PIU
Power board
Slot 9 or slot 10
Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input.
FAN
Fan board
Slot 11
Cools and ventilates the IDU.
3.3 CST
The CST is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.3.1 Version Description

The functional version of the CST is SL91.
3.3.2 Functions and Features

The CST provides full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and
clock processing functions. The CST provides auxiliary ports and management ports.
Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the CST supports.
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CST supports
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
Cross-connect
capacity
Supports full time division cross-connections

(equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or
VC-4 level.
System control
and
communication
Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of

the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.
Clock source
Provides the system clock and frame headers for

service signals and overhead signals for the other
boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
Clock
The traced clock source can be any of the following:

l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Radio link clock
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

19


Clock
protection
3 Boards
Description
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
External clock
port
DCN
Outband DCN
Supports a maximum of 13 DCCs.
Protection
1+1 hot standby
Supported
Auxiliary ports
and
management
ports
Ethernet NM
port
NM serial port
NE cascading
port
Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
Warm reset and

cold reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Detection of
indicators on the
other boards
Supported
Hot swapping
function
Supported
OM
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
The specifications of port comply with RS-485.

20

3 Boards
Description
Pluggable CF
card
Supported
3.3.3 Working Principle

The CST consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
and power supply unit.
Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CST
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
TDM service
Service board
Control bus
FE signal
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
NE cascading port
System control and

communication unit
of the paired board
System control and

communication unit
Clock signal required by

other boards
Monitoring
signal
Clock unit
Port for monitoring an

outdoor cabinet
/Time port 2
Time port 1
Clock port
External clock signal

Power supplied to the other
units on the board
Power
supply
unit
Clock signal
provided to the
other units on the
board
Clock unit of the

paired board
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to fans
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

21

3 Boards
The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
The system control and communication unit on a CST board communicates with the system
control and communication unit on the paired CST board by carrying FE signals over the
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards
is achieved.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC
SinkTDM
service unit
Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

22

3 Boards
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service
clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means
of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock.
The clock units on the main and standby boards transmit clock signals to each other.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
3.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock ports, and latches on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
CST
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CST
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1
TOD2
Indicators
Table 3-3 Status explanation for indicators on the CST
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.

23

Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at

100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board

during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state

of the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on

or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at

100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during

the power-on or resetting process of the
board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or

loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC
SRV
On (green)
The clock is working properly.
On (red)
The clock source is lost or a clock

switchover occurs.
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.
Off
In an unprotected system, there is no

power supplied to the system.
In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the standby one.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

24

3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
ACT
On (green)

works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off

In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
Clock Ports and Management Ports

Table 3-4 Description of the clock ports and management ports
Port
Description
NMS/COM
Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
EXT
NE cascade port
CLK/TOD1
External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),

or wayside E1 port
TOD2
Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet
Connector Type
RJ45
NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently
transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes.
This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time.
l The TOD2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. On the OptiX RTN 900
V100R003, the physical port can be used as the outdoor cabinet monitoring port only.
l Time ports TOD1 and TOD2 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588
protocol) and are not used in this product version.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

25

3 Boards
Table 3-5 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port

Port
NMS/COM
Pin
Signal
Transmitting data (+)
Transmitting data (-)
Receiving data (+)
Grounding end of the NM serial port
Receive end of the NM serial port
Receiving data (-)
Not defined
Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 3-6 Pin assignments for the EXT port

Port
EXT
Pin
Signal
Receiving data (+)
Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-7 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-7 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is working properly.
Off
The link is interrupted.
On or blinking
The port is transmitting or receiving

data.
Off
The port is not transmitting or

receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

26

3 Boards
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.
CST
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
CST
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
LAN
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
NOTE
When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two CST boards, their Ethernet NM ports and NE cascading
ports are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, use only the Ethernet NM port and
NE cascading port of the working CST board, if possible.
Table 3-8 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.
Table 3-8 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port
Pin
Working Mode
External Clock
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Signal input (-)
Signal input (+)
Not defined
Signal output (-)
signal output (+)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined

27

3 Boards
NOTE
The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that
when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.
Table 3-9 provides details about the pin assignments for the TOD2 port.
Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port
Pin
Working Mode
Port for Monitoring an Outdoor Cabinet
Not defined
Not defined
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-)

(RS-422 level)
Grounding end
Grounding end
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+)

(RS-422 level)
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-)

(RS-422 level)
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+)

(RS-422 level)
Buttons
Table 3-10 Buttons
Button
Name
Description
CF RCV
CF configuration restoration
button
After this button is pressed and held for

eight seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.
RST
Warm reset button
After this button is pressed, a warm

reset is performed on the board.
Latches
There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board,
you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition,
rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/
protection switching.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

28

3 Boards
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
Figure 3-9 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Table 3-11 Setting DIP switches

Meaning
Setting of DIP Switchesa
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Indicates that the board works with the

watchdog enabled.
The value is reserved.

29

3 Boards
Meaning

1
Indicates that a memory self-check is

running.
Indicates that the board is being debugged.

watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.
Indicates the BIOS holdover state.
Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.
The value is reserved. (By default, this value

indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.)

watchdog enabled.)
Restores the data of the CF card.
Erases data in the system parameter area.
Erases databases.
Erases NE software, including patches.
Erases databases and NE software, including

patches.
Erases all data in the file system.
Erases all the data except for the board

manufacturing information.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CST can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 of the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CST on
the NMS is the same as its physical slot.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

30

3 Boards
Figure 3-10 Slot for the CST in the IDU chassis

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CST)
Slot 8 (CST)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Figure 3-11 Logical slot of the CST on the NMS

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CST)
Slot 8 (CST)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Table 3-12 Slot allocation

Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slot 7 > Slot 8
3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CST.
Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

31

3 Boards
3.3.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection capability, clock
performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power
consumption.
Cross-Connection Capability
The CST supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the
VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-13 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item
Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz

(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)
Frequency accuracy
Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in and pull-out ranges

Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-14 Wayside service interface performance
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the

microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Impedance (ohm)
120
Interface characteristics
Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

32

3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-15 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm
Weight
0.72 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 20.7 W
3.4 CSH
The CSH is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.

The functional version of the CSH is SL91.

The CSH consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, crossconnect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

33

3 Boards

Figure 3-12 Functional block diagram of the CSH
Backplane
GE bus
Packet
switching unit
Service board
TDM service
Cross-connect unit
Service board
Control bus
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
FE signal
System control and
communication unit
NE cascading port
Port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
/Time port 2
Time port 1
Clock port
System control and

communication unit
of the paired board
Monitoring
signal
Clock unit
Clock signal required by

other boards
Clock unit of the
paired board
External clock signal

Clock signal
provided to
the other units
on the board
Power supplied to the other

units on the board
Power supply
unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to fans
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.
The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

34

3 Boards
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
The system control and communication unit on a CSH board communicates with the system
control and communication unit on the paired CSH board by carrying FE signals over the
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards
is achieved.
Packet Switching Unit

The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services
(including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet).
l
After receiving Ethernet services from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms
the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are delivered by the system control
and communication unit.
After receiving protocol packets from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit transmits
the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing. After
processing, the system control and communication unit sends the protocol packets back to
the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the
Ethernet board.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-13 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

35

3 Boards
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit

Source TDM
service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC
SinkTDM
service unit
Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service
clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means
of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock.
The clock units on the main and standby boards transmit clock signals to each other.
Power Supply Unit

l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
3.4.3 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock/time ports, and latches on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

36

3 Boards
Front Panel Diagram
CSH
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
Figure 3-14 Front panel of the CSH
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
Indicators
Table 3-16 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

board.
PROG

100 ms intervals

of the board.

300 ms intervals

of the board.
On (green)


100 ms intervals

board.
On (red)

the board.
SYNC
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)

37

Indicator
SRV
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)

switchover occurs.
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)

system.
Off

ACT
On (green)

been activated.
Off

activated.
Clock Ports and Management Ports

Table 3-17 Description of the clock ports and management ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Port
Description
NMS/COM
Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
EXT
NE cascade port
CLK/TOD1
External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),

or wayside E1 port
TOD2
Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet

Connector Type
RJ45
38

3 Boards
NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently
transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes.
This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time.
l The TOD2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. On the OptiX RTN 900
V100R003, the physical port can be used as the outdoor cabinet monitoring port only.
l Time ports TOD1 and TOD2 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588
protocol) and are not used in this product version.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-15 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
87654321
Table 3-18 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port

Port
NMS/COM
Pin
Signal
Receiving data (+)
Grounding end of the NM serial port
Receive end of the NM serial port
Receiving data (-)
Not defined
Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 3-19 Pin assignments for the EXT port

Port
EXT
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Pin
Signal
Receiving data (+)
Receiving data (-)

39

Port
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-20 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
Off
On or blinking

data.
Off

receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-16 shows the two common incorrect connections.
CSH
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
Figure 3-16 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
CSH
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
LAN
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2

40

3 Boards
NOTE
When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two CSH boards, their Ethernet NM ports and NE cascading
ports are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, use only the Ethernet NM port and
NE cascading port of the working CSH board, if possible.
Table 3-21 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.
Table 3-21 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port
Pin
Working Mode
External Clock
Signal input (-)
Signal input (+)
Not defined
Signal output (-)
signal output (+)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
NOTE
The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that
when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.
Table 3-22 provides details about the pin assignments for the TOD2 port.
Table 3-22 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port
Pin
Working Mode
Not defined
Not defined
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-)

(RS-422 level)
Grounding end
Grounding end
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+)

(RS-422 level)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

41

Pin
3 Boards
Working Mode
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-)

(RS-422 level)
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+)

(RS-422 level)
Buttons
Table 3-23 Buttons
Button
Name
Description
CF RCV
CF configuration restoration
button
After this button is pressed and held for

eight seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.
RST
Warm reset button
After this button is pressed, a warm

reset is performed on the board.
Latches
There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board,
you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition,
rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/
3.4.4 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

42

3 Boards
Figure 3-17 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Table 3-24 Setting DIP switches

Meaning
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

watchdog enabled.
The value is reserved.
Indicates that a memory self-check is

running.
Indicates that the board is being debugged.

watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.
Indicates the BIOS holdover state.
Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.

watchdog enabled.)

43

3 Boards
Meaning

1

watchdog enabled.)
Restores the data of the CF card.
Erases data in the system parameter area.
Erases databases.
Erases NE software, including patches.
Erases databases and NE software, including

patches.
Erases all data in the file system.
Erases all the data except for the board

manufacturing information.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.4.5 Valid Slots

The CSH can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CSH on
the NMS is the same as its physical slot.
Figure 3-18 Slot for the CSH in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CSH)
Slot 8 (CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Figure 3-19 Logical slot of the CSH on the NMS

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CSH)
Slot 8 (CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)

44

3 Boards

Item
Description
Slot 7 > Slot 8

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSH.
Related References

This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, clock performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching Capacity

The CSH supports a 10 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.
Cross-Connection Capability
The CSH supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the
VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz

(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)

45

3 Boards
Item
Performance
Frequency accuracy
Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in and pull-out ranges

Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-27 Wayside service interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the

microwave frame.
2048
Impedance (ohm)
120
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm
Weight
0.74 kg
Power Consumption
Power Consumption: < 25.3 W
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

46

3 Boards

The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Table 3-29 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports.
Table 3-29 Functions and features that the IF1 supports
Description
Basic functions
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type
TU/STM-1-based radio
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the IF1.
Protection
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
SNCP
Supported
License
Supports control on the air interface capacity by using

the license file.
K byte pass-through
Supported
Clock
Clock source
Clock at the air interface
Clock
protection

l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported
only in SDH radio mode)
(supported only in SDH radio mode)
DCN
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Inband DCN
Not supported

47


Outband DCN
3 Boards
Description
l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less
than 16xE1.
l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is
equal to or more than 16xE1.
l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops at IF ports
l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite ports
Warm reset and

cold reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the IF1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

48

3 Boards

Figure 3-20 Functional block diagram of the IF1
Backplane
SMODEM
unit
HSM signal bus
Paired board
ODU control signal

Service bus
Overhead bus
Logic processing unit
Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing
unit
Combiner
Interface
unit
IF
Control bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU

+3.3 V power supplied to the other
units on the board
Power
supply
unit
Clock signal provided to the

other units on the board
Clock
unit
-48 V
+3.3 V
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-30 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals

and microwave service signals.
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals.

l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.
IF processing unit
l Controls the level of service signals through the

automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

49

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF

alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/
s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals
to the logic processing unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

50

Step
3 Boards
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode

and generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports
the changes to the system control and communication
unit over the control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames in PDH radio mode and transmits
the overhead signals to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts TU pointers.
l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.

l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and
communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-31 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit

l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/
s overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

51

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals.
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio

mode.
l Performs digital modulation.

4
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the

system control and communication unit.
Combiner interface
unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service

signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
Power Supply Unit

l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

52

3 Boards
3.5.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-21 Front panel of the IF1
PULL
IF1
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IF1
ODU-PWR
IF
Indicators
Table 3-32 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working

properly.
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm

On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working

properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.
53

3 Boards
Indicator
RMT
ACT
State
Meaning
Blinks on (yellow) and off at

300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is

reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free

of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
standby one.
Off
the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-33 Description of the Ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

54

3 Boards
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.5.5 Valid Slots

The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as the
physical slots.
Figure 3-22 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IF1)
Slot 6 (IF1)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 1 (IF1)
Slot 2 (IF1)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-23 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IF1)
Slot 6 (IF1)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 1 (IF1)
Slot 2 (IF1)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Description
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2

55

3 Boards
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and
2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes

Table 3-35 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)
Service Capacity
Modulation Scheme
Channel Spacing (MHz)
4xE1
QPSK
4xE1
16QAM
3.5
8xE1
QPSK
14 (13.75)
8xE1
16QAM
16xE1
QPSK
28 (27.5)
16xE1
16QAM
14 (13.75)
22xE1
32QAM
14 (13.75)
26xE1
64QAM
14 (13.75)
35xE1
16QAM
28 (27.5)
44xE1
32QAM
28 (27.5)
53xE1
64QAM
28 (27.5)
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
NOTE
The channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 950 comply with ETSI standards. Channel spacings
3.5/7/14/28/40/56 MHz apply to most frequency bands; but channel spacings 3.5/7/13.75/27.5/40/55 MHz apply
to the 18 GHz frequency band.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

56

3 Boards
IF Performance
Table 3-36 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation scheme
ASK
5.5
10
Interface impedance (ohm)
50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-37 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item
Performance
Encoding mode
l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals

l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH microwave signals
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for

baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.72 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

57

3 Boards
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.

The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
Table 3-39 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 3-39 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports
Description
Basic functions

Radio type
Integrated IP radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
Service categories
Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
AM
Supported
E1 priority
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native

TDM services being E1 services
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.
Protection
License
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
SNCP for TDM

services
Supported
Air interface
capacity license
Supported

58

Clock at the
physical layer
3 Boards
Description
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock
protection

DCN
Inband DCN
Supported.
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN
Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes.
Ethernet service functions
See Table 3-40.
MPLS functions
See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided

in the section for the system control, switching, and
timing board.
PWE3 functions
OM
Loopback

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Cold reset and

warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test

at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported

59


Board power
detection
3 Boards
Description
Supported
Table 3-40 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports

Description
Ethernet
services
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
E-Line services
l E-Line services based on ports

l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services:

l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM
l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.
LAG
Supported
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the

CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
QoS
See the description of QoS functions provided in the

section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.
RMON
Supported

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

60

3 Boards

Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the IFU2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit
HSM signal bus

Paired board
ODU control signal
MODEM
unit
Overhead bus
Logic
processing
unit
Microwave frame
signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing
unit
Combiner
interface unit
IF
Service bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
GE bus
Control bus
Packet switching unit
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit

+3.3 V power supplied to the other
units on the board
Power
supply
unit
+3.3 V power supplied to the

monitoring circuit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
System clock signal

Table 3-41 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit

SMODEM unit

IF processing unit
l Filters signals.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

61

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MODEM unit

alarms.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP

radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
performance events.
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCC
bytes in microwave frames and transmits the overhead
signals to the logic processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.
Logic processing
unit

l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
NOTE
processing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

62

3 Boards

Table 3-42 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit

l Processes overhead signals.
Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.
l Processes GE signals.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP

radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4
MODEM unit

IF processing unit

l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.
SMODEM unit

Combiner interface
unit


Power Supply Unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

63

3 Boards
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
3.6.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
PULL
IFU2
ODU-PWR
IF
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IFU2
Figure 3-25 Front panel of the IFU2
Indicators
Table 3-43 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
On (red)

services.
On (yellow)

services.
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.

64

Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major

alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow)
and off at 300 ms
intervals
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off

l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
Ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
NOTE
Labels
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

65

3 Boards
3.6.5 Valid Slots

The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-26 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFU2)
Slot 6 (IFU2)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 1 (IFU2)
Slot 2 (IFU2)
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-27 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFU2)
Slot 6 (IFU2)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 1 (IFU2)
Slot 2 (IFU2)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Description

66

3 Boards
NOTE

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Related References
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

Radio Work Modes

Table 3-46 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
QPSK
9 to 12
16QAM
10
20 to 24
32QAM
12
24 to 29
64QAM
15
31 to 37
128QAM
18
37 to 44
256QAM
21
43 to 51
14 (13.75)
QPSK
10
20 to 23
14 (13.75)
16QAM
20
41 to 48
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
50 to 59
14 (13.75)
64QAM
31
65 to 76

67

3 Boards
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
14 (13.75)
128QAM
37
77 to 90
14 (13.75)
256QAM
43
90 to 104
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 48
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 97
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
108 to 125
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
130 to 150
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
160 to 180
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
180 to 210
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 97
56 (55)
16QAM
75
165 to 190
56 (55)
32QAM
75
208 to 240
56 (55)
64QAM
75
260 to 310
56 (55)
128QAM
75
310 to 360
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 420
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
350
140
Modulation scheme
ASK
5.5

68

3 Boards
Item
Performance
10
50

Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding

baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.79 kg
Power Consumption
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

69

3 Boards

The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.
Table 3-50 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports.
Table 3-50 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports
Description
Basic functions

Radio type
Integrated IP radio
NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet
radio.
Service categories
Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet
AM
Supported
E1 priority
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which

native TDM services are E1 services
XPIC
Supported
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.
Protection
License
Clock at the
physical layer
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
SNCP for TDM

services
Supported
Air interface
capacity license
Supported
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock at an air interface
Clock
protection

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

70

3 Boards
Description
DCN
Supported.
Inband DCN
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

Outband DCN
Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes.
Ethernet service features
See Table 3-51.
MPLS functions
See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that

the system control, switching, and timing board
supports.
PWE3 functions
OM
Loopback

l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Cold reset and

warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test

at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported

71

3 Boards
Table 3-51 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports

Description
Ethernet
services
E-Line services

E-LAN services

ERPS

G.8032/Y.1344.
ETH-OAM

function.
function.
1731.
LAG
Supported

QoS
See the description of the QoS functions that the system

control, switching, and timing board supports.
RMON
Supported

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

72

3 Boards

Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IFX2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit
HSM signal bus

Paired board
Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF
processing
unit
Paired XPIC
board
Combiner
interface
unit
IF
Service bus
Overhead
bus
Logic
processing
unit
ODU control signal
Ethernet
processing
unit
GE bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
XPIC signal
Control bus
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit

Power
supply
unit
+3.3 V power supplied to

the monitoring circuit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
System clock signal

Table 3-52 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit

SMODEM unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

73

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
IF processing unit
l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two

channels of signals.
Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF

signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
alarms.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP

performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms.
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM
bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode
and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits to
the Ethernet processing unit.
Ethernet processing
unit

DEMUX unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

74

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit

NOTE
processing.

Table 3-53 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit

Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP

radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4
MODEM unit

IF processing unit

l Filters signals.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
SMODEM unit

Combiner interface
unit


75

3 Boards

Power Supply Unit

l
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after
Clock Unit
3.7.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
PULL
I
X-IN
X-OUT
IFX2
ODU-PWR
IF
XPIC
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IFX2
Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IFX2
Indicators
Table 3-54 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
The XPIC input signal is

normal.
On (red)
The XPIC input signal is lost.

76

Indicator
STAT
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
The XPIC function is

disabled.
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
The ODU is working

properly.
On (red)

l There is no power
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)

alarms.

300 ms intervals
On (yellow)

reporting defects.
Off

of defects.
On (green)

active one.
the board has been
activated.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

77

3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
Off

standby one.
Ports
Table 3-55 Description of the ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
X-IN
XPIC signal input

port
SMA
XPIC cable
X-OUT
XPIC signal output

port
SMA
NOTE
Labels
3.7.5 Valid Slots

The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

78

3 Boards
Figure 3-30 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFX2)
Slot 6 (IFX2)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 1 (IFX2)
Slot 2 (IFX2)
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFX2)
Slot 6 (IFX2)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 1 (IFX2)
Slot 2 (IFX2)

Item
Description
NOTE
NOTE
One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

79

3 Boards
Related References

Radio Work Modes

Table 3-57 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
QPSK
9 to 11
16QAM
19 to 23
32QAM
11
24 to 29
64QAMa
14
31 to 36
14 (13.75)
QPSK
20 to 23
14 (13.75)
16QAM
19
40 to 47
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
50 to 59
14 (13.75)
64QAM
30
63 to 73
14 (13.75)
128QAMa
36
75 to 88
28 (27.5)
QPSK
19
41 to 48
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
84 to 97
28 (27.5)
32QAM
49
103 to 120
28 (27.5)
64QAM
63
130 to 150
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
160 to 180
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
180 to 210

80

3 Boards
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
56 (55)
QPSK
39
83 to 97
56 (55)
16QAM
75
165 to 190
56 (55)
32QAM
75
210 to 245
56 (55)
64QAM
75
260 to 305
56 (55)
128QAM
75
310 to 360
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 410
NOTE
For the IFX2 board, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is
enabled or disabled.
a: When the XPIC function is enabled for the IFX2 board, the 64QAM/7MHz and 128QAM/14MHz
modulation schemes do not apply to ODUs whose frequency band ranges from 26 GHz to 38 GHz.
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
IF Performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
350
140
Modulation scheme
ASK
5.5
10
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

50
81

3 Boards

Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding

baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.80 kg
Power Consumption
3.8 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.

The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
Table 3-61 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

82

3 Boards
Table 3-61 Functions and features

Description
Basic functions

l Integrated IP radio
Radio type
l SDH radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
Service categories in Integrated IP

radio mode
l Native E1 + Ethernet
l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Service categories in SDH radio

mode
l STM-1
AM
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode
Ethernet frame header compression
Supported
E1 priority
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native

Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the ISU2.
Link-level
protection
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
LAG protection
at air interfaces
Supported
TDM service protection
SNCP
K byte pass-through
Supported
PLA
Supported
See Table 3-62.
MPLS functions

timing board.
PWE3 functions
License
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
l 2xSTM-1
Air interface
capacity license
Supported
AM license
Supported

83

3 Boards
Description
Clock at the
physical layer
Clock source
Clock
protection

DCN
Inband DCN
Supported
Outband DCN
l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.
OM
Loopback

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Cold reset and

warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test

at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported

84

3 Boards
Table 3-62 Ethernet service functions

Description
Ethernet
services
E-Line services

E-LAN services

ERPS

G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM

function.
function.
1731.
LAG
Supported

QoS

board.
RMON
Supported

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
NOTE
The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service categories.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

85

3 Boards

Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram of the ISU2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit
HSM signal bus
Microwave
frame signal
Overhead bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
MODEM unit
IF processing
unit
Combiner
interface unit
IF
Service bus
Logic
processing
unit
ODU control signal
GE bus
Control bus
Paired board
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit

the other units on the board
Power
supply
unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V

-48 V1
Clock
unit
System clock signal

Table 3-63 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit

SMODEM unit

IF processing unit
l Filters signals.
MODEM unit

alarms.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

86

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
Ethernet processing
unit

DEMUX unit.
Logic processing
unit

NOTE
processing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

87

3 Boards

Table 3-64 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit

Ethernet processing
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are

from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the

logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4
MODEM unit

IF processing unit

l Filters signals.
SMODEM unit

Combiner interface
unit


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

88

3 Boards
Power Supply Unit

l
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
Clock Unit
3.8.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
PULL
ISU2
ODU-PWR
IF
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
ISU2
Figure 3-33 Front panel of the ISU2
Indicators
Table 3-65 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
SRV
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
On (red)


89

3 Boards
Indicator
LINK
ODU
State
Meaning
On (yellow)

On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
The ODU is working

properly.
On (red)

l There is no power
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)

alarms.

300 ms intervals
On (yellow)

reporting defects.
Off

of defects.
On (green)

active one.
the board has been
activated.
standby one.
Off
Ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch

90

3 Boards
NOTE
Labels
3.8.5 Valid Slots

The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-34 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISU2)
Slot 6 (ISU2)
Slot 3 (ISU2)
Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 1 (ISU2)
Slot 2 (ISU2)
ODU plus 20.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

91

3 Boards
Figure 3-35 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISU2)
Slot 6 (ISU2)
Slot 3 (ISU2)
Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 1 (ISU2)
Slot 2 (ISU2)

Item
Description
NOTE

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.
Related References

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

92

3 Boards
Radio Work Modes

Table 3-68 SDH microwave work modes (ISU2 board)
Service Capacity
Modulation Scheme
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1
128QAM
56 (55)
Table 3-69 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
3.5
QPSK
4 to 5
4 to 6
4 to 6
4 to 10
3.5
16QAM
9 to 11
9 to 13
9 to 13
9 to 20
QPSK
10 to 13
10 to 15
10 to 22
10 to 33
16QAM
10
20 to 26
20 to 30
20 to 44
20 to 66
32QAM
12
25 to 32
25 to 36
25 to 54
25 to 80
64QAM
15
31 to 40
31 to 47
31 to 67
31 to 100
128QAM
18
37 to 47
37 to 56
37 to 80
37 to 119
256QAM
20
41 to 53
41 to 62
41 to 90
42 to 134
14 (13.75)
QPSK
10
20 to 26
20 to 31
20 to 44
20 to 66
14 (13.75)
16QAM
20
41 to 52
41 to 61
41 to 89
41 to 132
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
51 to 65
51 to 77
51 to 110
51 to 164
14 (13.75)
64QAM
31
65 to 83
65 to 96
65 to 140
65 to 209
14 (13.75)
128QAM
37
76 to 97
76 to 113
76 to 165
76 to 245
14 (13.75)
256QAM
42
87 to 111
87 to 131
87 to 189
88 to 281
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 52
41 to 62
41 to 89
41 to 132
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
107 to 136
107 to 161
107 to 230
107 to 343
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
131 to 168
131 to 198
131 to 283
132 to 424
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
156 to 495
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

93

3 Boards
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 577
40
QPSK
27
56 to 72
56 to 84
56 to 122
57 to 182
40
16QAM
55
114 to 145
114 to 172
114 to 247
114 to 366
40
32QAM
71
147 to 187
147 to 221
147 to 318
148 to 474
40
64QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 583
40
128QAM
75
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
216 to 691
40
256QAM
75
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
251 to 800
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
56 (55)
16QAM
75
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
167 to 533
56 (55)
32QAM
75
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
207 to 659
56 (55)
64QAM
75
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
264 to 836
56 (55)
128QAM
75
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
311 to 983
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
362 to 1000
Table 3-70 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave

Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
28 (27.5)
128QAM
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
156 to 495
28 (27.5)
256QAM
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 577
40
64QAM
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 583
40
128QAM
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
216 to 691
40
256QAM
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
251 to 800
56 (55)
16QAM
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
167 to 533
56 (55)
32QAM
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
207 to 659
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

94

3 Boards
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave

Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
56 (55)
64QAM
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
264 to 836
56 (55)
128QAM
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
311 to 983
56 (55)
256QAM
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
362 to 1000
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from
64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92
bytes to 9600 bytes
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
IF Performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
350
140
Modulation scheme
ASK
5.5
10
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

50
95

3 Boards

Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding

baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.60 kg
Power Consumption
3.9 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.

The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.

The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving
XPIC reference signals.
Table 3-74 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

96

3 Boards

Description
Basic functions

l Integrated IP radio
Radio type
l SDH radio
NOTE
The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
Service categories in Integrated IP

radio mode
l Native E1 + Ethernet
l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Service categories in SDH radio

mode
l STM-1
AM
Supported only in integrated IP radio mode
Ethernet frame header compression
Supported
E1 priority
Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native

XPIC
Supported
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the ISX2.
Link-level
protection
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
LAG protection
at air interfaces
Supported
TDM service protection
SNCP
K byte pass-through
Supported
PLA
Supported
See Table 3-75.
MPLS functions

timing board.
PWE3 functions
License
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
l 2xSTM-1
Air interface
capacity license
Supported

97

Clock at the
physical layer
3 Boards
Description
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock
protection

DCN
Inband DCN
Supported
Outband DCN
l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.
OM
Loopback

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Cold reset and

warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test

at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported

98

3 Boards
Table 3-75 Ethernet service functions

Description
Ethernet
services
E-Line services

E-LAN services

ERPS

G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM

function.
function.
1731.
LAG
Supported

QoS

board.
RMON
Supported

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
NOTE
The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service types.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

99

3 Boards

Figure 3-36 Functional block diagram of the ISX2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit
HSM signal bus

Paired board
Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF
processing
unit
Paired XPIC
board
Combiner
interface
unit
IF
Service bus
Overhead
bus
Logic
processing
unit
ODU control signal
Ethernet
processing
unit
GE bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
XPIC signal
Control bus
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit

Power
supply
unit

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
System clock signal

Table 3-76 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit

SMODEM unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

100

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
IF processing unit
l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two

channels of signals.
Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF

signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
alarms.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

101

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Ethernet processing
unit

DEMUX unit.
Logic processing
unit

NOTE
processing.

Table 3-77 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit

Ethernet processing
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are

from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the

logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4
MODEM unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

102

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
IF processing unit

l Filters signals.
SMODEM unit

Combiner interface
unit


Power Supply Unit

l
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
Clock Unit
3.9.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
PULL
I
X-IN
X-OUT

ISX2
ODU-PWR
IF
XPIC
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
ISX2
Figure 3-37 Front panel of the ISX2
103

3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-78 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2
Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)

normal.
On (red)
Off

disabled.
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off
STAT

l There is no power
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
The ODU is working

properly.
On (red)

l There is no power
RMT
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (yellow)

alarms.

300 ms intervals
On (yellow)

reporting defects.

104

3 Boards
Indicator
ACT
State
Meaning
Off

of defects.
On (green)

active one.
the board has been
activated.
standby one.
Off
Ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
X-IN
XPIC signal input

port
SMA
XPIC cable
X-OUT
XPIC signal output

port
SMA
NOTE
Labels
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

105

3 Boards
3.9.5 Valid Slots

The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-38 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISX2)
Slot 6 (ISX2)
Slot 3 (ISX2)
Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 1 (ISX2)
Slot 2 (ISX2)
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISX2)
Slot 6 (ISX2)
Slot 3 (ISX2)
Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 1 (ISX2)
Slot 2 (ISX2)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Description

106

3 Boards
NOTE
NOTE
One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the
same column.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.
Related References

Radio Work Modes

Table 3-81 SDH microwave work modes (ISX2 board)
Service Capacity
Modulation Scheme
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1
128QAM
56 (55)
NOTE
For the ISX2 board in SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether
the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

107

3 Boards
Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC disabled)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
QPSK
10 to 13
10 to 15
10 to 22
10 to 33
16QAM
10
20 to 26
20 to 30
20 to 44
20 to 66
32QAM
12
25 to 32
25 to 36
25 to 54
25 to 80
64QAM
15
31 to 40
31 to 47
31 to 67
31 to 100
128QAM
18
37 to 47
37 to 56
37 to 80
37 to 119
256QAM
20
41 to 53
41 to 62
41 to 90
42 to 134
14 (13.75)
QPSK
10
20 to 26
20 to 31
20 to 44
20 to 66
14 (13.75)
16QAM
20
41 to 52
41 to 61
41 to 89
41 to 132
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
51 to 65
51 to 77
51 to 110
51 to 164
14 (13.75)
64QAM
31
65 to 83
65 to 96
65 to 140
65 to 209
14 (13.75)
128QAM
37
76 to 97
76 to 113
76 to 165
76 to 245
14 (13.75)
256QAM
42
87 to 111
87 to 131
87 to 189
88 to 281
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 52
41 to 62
41 to 89
41 to 132
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
107 to 136
107 to 161
107 to 230
107 to 343
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
131 to 168
131 to 198
131 to 283
132 to 424
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
156 to 495
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 577
40
QPSK
27
56 to 72
56 to 84
56 to 122
57 to 182
40
16QAM
55
114 to 145
114 to 172
114 to 247
114 to 366
40
32QAM
71
147 to 187
147 to 221
147 to 318
148 to 474
40
64QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 583
40
128QAM
75
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
216 to 691
40
256QAM
75
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
251 to 800
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
56 (55)
16QAM
75
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
167 to 533
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

108

3 Boards
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
56 (55)
32QAM
75
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
207 to 659
56 (55)
64QAM
75
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
264 to 836
56 (55)
128QAM
75
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
311 to 983
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
362 to 1000
Table 3-83 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC enabled)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
QPSK
10 to 13
10 to 15
10 to 22
10 to 33
16QAM
20 to 26
20 to 30
20 to 44
20 to 66
32QAM
11
25 to 32
25 to 36
25 to 54
25 to 80
64QAMa
14
31 to 40
31 to 47
31 to 67
31 to 100
14 (13.75)
QPSK
20 to 26
20 to 31
20 to 44
20 to 66
14 (13.75)
16QAM
19
41 to 52
41 to 61
41 to 89
41 to 132
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
51 to 65
51 to 77
51 to 110
51 to 164
14 (13.75)
64QAM
30
65 to 83
65 to 96
65 to 140
65 to 209
14 (13.75)
128QAMa
36
76 to 97
76 to 113
76 to 165
76 to 245
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 52
41 to 62
41 to 89
41 to 132
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
107 to 136
107 to 161
107 to 230
107 to 343
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
131 to 168
131 to 198
131 to 283
132 to 424
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
156 to 495
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 577
40
QPSK
27
56 to 72
56 to 84
56 to 122
57 to 182
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

109

3 Boards
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave

Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
40
16QAM
55
114 to 145
114 to 172
114 to 247
114 to 366
40
32QAM
71
147 to 187
147 to 221
147 to 318
148 to 474
40
64QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 583
40
128QAM
75
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
216 to 691
40
256QAM
75
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
251 to 800
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
56 (55)
16QAM
75
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
167 to 533
56 (55)
32QAM
75
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
207 to 659
56 (55)
64QAM
75
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
264 to 836
56 (55)
128QAM
75
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
311 to 983
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
362 to 1000
NOTE
a: In 7MHz/64QAM or 14MHz/128QAM mode, ISX2 boards do not support cooperation with 26 GHz to 38 GHz ODUs if XPIC
is enabled on the ISX2 boards.
Table 3-84 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave

Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
28 (27.5)
128QAM
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
156 to 495
28 (27.5)
256QAM
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 577
40
64QAM
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 583
40
128QAM
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
216 to 691
40
256QAM
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
251 to 800
56 (55)
16QAM
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
167 to 533
56 (55)
32QAM
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
207 to 659
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

110

3 Boards
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave

Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
56 (55)
64QAM
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
264 to 836
56 (55)
128QAM
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
311 to 983
56 (55)
256QAM
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
362 to 1000
NOTE
For the ISX2 board in STM-1 + Ethernet service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC
function is enabled or disabled.
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from
64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92
bytes to 9600 bytes
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
IF Performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
350
140
Modulation scheme
ASK
5.5
10
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

50
111

3 Boards

Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding

baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.60 kg
Power Consumption
3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA
The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE
electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/
EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed
electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore
can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the
EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
NOTE
EM6TA/EM6FA boards have the same functions as EM6T/EM6F boards. The only difference is that
EM6TA/EM6FA boards reserve hardware resources for the IEEE 1588v2 function.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is SL91.

The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE
signals and two GE signals. The GE port on the EM6F/EM6FA can receive/transmit 2xFE optical
signals using FE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical modules.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

112

3 Boards
Table 3-88 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA supports.
The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system
control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions.
Description
EM6T/EM6TA
Basic functions
Port
specifications
EM6F/EM6FA
Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works

with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.
FE electrical
port
Provides four
10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
Provides four
10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
GE port
Provides two
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
ports (fixed).
Provides two GE ports by

using SFP modules of any
of the following types:
l Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
optical module
l Colored CWDM GE
optical module
l Single-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
module
l 10/100/1000BASE-T
(X) GE electrical
module
Backplane bus bandwidth
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1 Gbit/s

1 Gbit/s
113

3 Boards
Description
EM6T/EM6TA
Port attributes
Working mode
EM6F/EM6FA
l The FE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards

support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and autonegotiation.
l The FE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards
support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards
support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex,
and auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards
support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex,
1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The FE optical ports on EM6F/EM6FA boards
support 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
TAG attributes
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,

or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet
port.
Services
Jumbo frame
Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length

of 9600 bytes.
Traffic control
function
Supports the port-based traffic control function that

complies with IEEE 802.3x.
E-Line services

l E-Line services based on port+QinQ
E-LAN services

LAG
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Inter-board
LAG
Supported
Supported
Intra-board
LAG
Supported
Supported

114

3 Boards
Description
EM6T/EM6TA
EM6F/EM6FA
ERPS

G.8032/Y.1344.

LPT
Supported
QoS
Supported
DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying

PHB service classes for service flows based on their
QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried
by the packets.
Complex traffic
classification
Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based

on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, SVLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values
carried by packets.
CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized

queue, or traffic flow.
Queue
scheduling
policies
Supports the following queue scheduling policies:

l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR
ETH OAM
Ethernet service
OAM

function.
1731.
Ethernet port
OAM
RMON
Clock
Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
Supported
Supported
Clock source
Synchronous Ethernet
(not supported by the SFP
electrical module)
Clock
protection

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

115

3 Boards
Description
EM6T/EM6TA
EM6F/EM6FA
DCN
Inband DCN
Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
OM
Loopback

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm reset and

cold reset
Supported
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Supported
Query of SFP
module
information
Not supported
Supported

This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T/EM6TA, and it serves as an
example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

116

3 Boards

Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram
Backplane
GE signal
GE signal
GE signal
access unit
Control signal
Ethernet
processing
unit
FE signal
FE signal
access unit
Ethernet
signal
Logic
processing
unit
Ethernet
signal
Control signal
FE signal
Control bus of the board
Logic
control unit
Control bus

board
Power
supply unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied to some I/O

circuits on the board
System control and

communication unit
+3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-89 Signal processing in the receive direction
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit
l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals.

l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for GE/FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement
for frame signals.
Ethernet processing
unit
l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data

frames.
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing
unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

117

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby


Table 3-90 Signal processing in the transmit direction
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet

switching unit.
l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.

l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports
based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data
frames.
GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/
FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the
control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands
from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board
through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and
the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit
also through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

118

3 Boards
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and then supplies the +3.3 V power
to some I/O circuits on the board.
Clock Unit
3.10.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
STAT
PROG
SRV
EM6T
Figure 3-41 Front panel of the EM6T
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
STAT
PROG
SRV
EM6TA
Figure 3-42 Front panel of the EM6TA
GE1
GE2
EM6F
STAT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
LINK2
Figure 3-43 Front panel of the EM6F

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
STAT
PROG
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
EM6FA
Figure 3-44 Front panel of the EM6FA

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
GE1

119

3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-91 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

SRV
PROG
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.

100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during

board.

300 ms intervals

during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100

ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the

power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or loading

upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
LINK1a
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
The GE1 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (green)
The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

120

Indicator
LINK2a
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.
On (green)

Blinking (green)

data.
Off

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.
Table 3-92 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

SRV
PROG
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)
Off

100 ms intervals

board.

300 ms intervals

the board.
On (green)

being initialized.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

121

Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning

ms intervals

On (red)
The memory self-check fails or loading

upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
L/A1a
L/A2a
On (green)

Blinking (yellow)

data.
Off

On (green)

Blinking (yellow)

data.
Off

NOTE
a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the
Ports
Table 3-93 Description of the ports on the EM6T/EM6TA
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
GE1
GE service port (fixed

electrical port)
RJ45
Network cable
GE2
FE1
FE service port
FE2
FE3
FE4
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

122

3 Boards
Table 3-94 Description of the ports on the EM6F/EM6FA

Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
GE1
GE service port (using SFP

modules)
RJ45 SFP electrical

module/LC SFP optical
module
5.9 Network Cable/5.5

Fiber Jumper
FE service port
RJ45
5.9 Network Cable
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
NOTE
On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to
PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA complies with

the 10/100BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T/
EM6TA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service
ports on the EM6F/EM6FA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP
electrical modules are used. All service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X
modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-95 and Table 3-96. For the front view
of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-45.
87654321
Table 3-95 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A

(+)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B

(+)

123

Pin
3 Boards
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
Reserved
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
Table 3-96 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-97.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

124

3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
Off
On or blinking

data.
Off

receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
When the SFP ports on the EM6F/EM6FA function as optical ports, optical modules are required.
l
When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide ports, one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-46, in
which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber
is connected to each port.
When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide ports, one optical
module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and
transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.
Figure 3-46 Ports of an SFP optical module
TX
RX
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F/EM6FA.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.10.5 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EM6T/
EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-47 Slots for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 11 Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

(FAN) Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 8

125

3 Boards
Figure 3-48 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA on the NMS

Slot 7
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 8
Slot 11 Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

(FAN) Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Slot 9
(PIU)

Item
Description
3.10.6 Types of SFP Modules

The FE/GE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports on the EM6F/EM6FA support multiple
types of SFP modules.
Table 3-99 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports
Category
Part Number
Type
Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance
Dual-fiber
bidirectional GE
module
34060286
1000Base-SX
850 nm, 0.5 km
34060473
1000Base-LX
1310 nm, 10 km
34060298
1000BASE-VX
1310 nm, 40 km
34060513
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1550 nm, 40 km
34060360
1000BASE-ZX
1550 nm, 80 km
34060416
1000BASE-CWDM
1471 nm, 40 km
34060417
1491 nm, 40 km
34060418
1511 nm, 40 km
34060419
1531 nm, 40 km
34060420
1551 nm, 40 km
34060421
1571 nm, 40 km
34060422
1591 nm, 40 km

126

Category
Part Number
Single-fiber
bidirectional GE
module
3 Boards
Type
Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance
34060423
1611 nm, 40 km
34060483
1471 nm, 80 km
34060481
1491 nm, 80 km
34060479
1511 nm, 80 km
34060482
1531 nm, 80 km
34060478
1551 nm, 80 km
34060476
1571 nm, 80 km
34060477
1591 nm, 80 km
34060480
1611 nm, 80 km
34060475
1000BASE-BX-D
Transmit: 1490 nm;

receive: 1310 nm
10 km
34060470
1000BASE-BX-U
Transmit: 1310 nm;

receive: 1490 nm
10 km
34060540
1000BASE-BX-D
Transmit: 1490 nm;

receive: 1310 nm
40 km
34060539
1000BASE-BX-U
Transmit: 1310 nm;

receive: 1490 nm
40 km
Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE
module
Single-fiber
bidirectional FE
module
34060287
100BASE-FX
1310 nm, 2 km
34060276
100BASE-LX
1310 nm, 15 km
34060281
100BASE-VX
1310 nm, 40 km
34060282
100BASE-ZX
1550 nm, 80 km
34060364
100BASE-BX-D
Transmit: 1550 nm;

receive: 1310 nm
15 km
34060363
100BASE-BX-U
Transmit: 1310 nm;

receive: 1550 nm
15 km
Electrical
module
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
34100052
10/100/1000BASE-T
(X)

127

3 Boards
NOTE
For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-101-Table 3-106 in 3.10.8 Technical
Specifications.
The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EM6F boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code. The bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA does not contain a board feature code.
Table 3-100 Board feature code of the EM6F
Board Feature Code
Module Type
Part Number of the

Module
01
1000BASE-SX
34060286
02
1000BASE-LX
34060473
03
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
34100052
10
100BASE-FX
34060287
11
100BASE-LX
34060276
NOTE
If the board feature code in the bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA is empty, no SFP module is installed on the
EM6T/EM6TA.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA.
Related References
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of FE/GE Optical Ports

The FE/GE optical ports on the EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the FE/GE optical ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

128

3 Boards
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Table 3-101 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance

transmission)
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm)
850
1310
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
1000
Fiber type
Multi-mode
Single-mode
Transmission distance (km)
0.5
10
Operating wavelength (nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm)
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-20
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3
Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)
9.5
9.5
Table 3-102 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)
1310
1550
1550
1000
1000
1000
Fiber type
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
40
40
80
1270 to 1350
1480 to 1580
1500 to 1580
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-22
-22
-3
-3
-3

129

3 Boards
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)

(dB)
Table 3-103 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, CWDM)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-CWDM (40
km)
1000BASE-CWDM (80
km)
l Channel 1: 1471
l Channel 1: 1471
l Channel 2: 1491
l Channel 2: 1491
l Channel 3: 1511
l Channel 3: 1511
l Channel 4: 1531
l Channel 4: 1531
l Channel 5: 1551
l Channel 5: 1551
l Channel 6: 1571
l Channel 6: 1571
l Channel 7: 1591
l Channel 7: 1591
l Channel 8: 1611
l Channel 8: 1611
1000
1000
Fiber type
Single-mode
Single-mode
40
80
Nominal wavelength 6.5
Nominal wavelength 6.5
0 to +5
0 to +5
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-19
-28
-9

(dB)
8.2
8.2

130

3 Boards
Table 3-104 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)

Item
Performance
1000BASEBX-D (10
km)
1000BASEBX-U
(10km)
1000BASEBX-D (40
km)
1000BASEBX-U
(40km)
Tx: 1490
Tx: 1310
Tx: 1490
Tx: 1310
Rx: 1310
Rx: 1490
Rx: 1310
Rx: 1490
1000
1000
1000
1000
Fiber type
Multi-mode
Multi-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
10
10
40
40
Tx: 1480 to
1500
Tx: 1260 to
1360
Tx: 1260 to
1360
Tx: 1480 to
1500
Rx: 1260 to
1360
Rx: 1480 to
1500
Rx: 1480 to
1500
Rx: 1260 to
1360
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
-3 to +3
-3 to +3
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-19.5
-19.5
-23
-23
-3
-3
-3
-3

(dB)
Table 3-105 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)

Item
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Performance
100BASEFX (2 km)
100BASELX (15 km)
100BASEVX (40 km)
100BASEZX (80 km)
1310
1310
1310
1550
100
100
100
100
Fiber type
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
15
40
80
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
-14
-8
-10
-10

131

Item
3 Boards
Performance

(dB)
100BASEFX (2 km)
100BASELX (15 km)
100BASEVX (40 km)
100BASEZX (80 km)
10
8.2
10
10.5
Table 3-106 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)

Item
Performance
Classification code
100BASE-BX-D (15 km)
100BASE-BX-U (15 km)
Tx: 1550
Tx: 1310
Rx: 1310
Rx: 1550
100
100
Fiber type
Single-mode
Single-mode
15
15
Tx: 1480 to 1580
Tx: 1260 to 1360
Rx: 1260 to 1360
Rx: 1480 to 1580
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-32
-32
-8
-8

(dB)
8.5
8.5
Performance of GE Electrical Ports

The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the GE electrical ports.
Table 3-107 GE electrical interface performance
Item
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

132

3 Boards
Item
Performance
Code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type
RJ45
Performance of FE Electrical Ports

The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 3-108 FE electrical interface performance
Item
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern

Interface type
RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
EM6T
EM6TA
EM6F
Dimensions (H
x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.37 kg
0.40 kg
0.40 kg
EM6FA
0.40 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of the EM6TA: < 16.2 W
Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W
Power consumption of the EM6FA: < 15.4 W
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

133

3 Boards
3.11 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.

The functional version of the EMS6 is SL91.

The EMS6 receives/transmits 4xFE signals and 2xGE signals from the front panel and 1xGE
packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates these Ethernet signals into
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) signals to transmit the Ethernet signals on the SDH
network. The EMS6 supports transparent service transmission and Layer 2 switching.
Table 3-110 lists the functions and features that the EMS6 supports.
Description
Basic functions
Receives/transmits 4xFE signals, 2xGE signals, and

1xGE packet plane signals, and performs EoSDH
processing.
Port specifications
FE
electrical
port
Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
GE port
Provides two GE ports by using small form-factor

pluggable (SFP) modules of any of the following types:
l 1000Base-SX
l 1000Base-LX
l 1000Base-VX
l 1000Base-ZX
l 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
Port attributes
Working
mode
l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation.

l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex,
10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

134

3 Boards

TAG
attributes
Description
port.
or hybrid.
Services
Encapsulation and
mapping
Jumbo
frame
Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length

of 9600 bytes.
Traffic
control
function

Ethernet
private line
(EPL)
services
Supports the EPL services based on ports.
Ethernet
virtual
private line
(EVPL)
services
Supports the following types of EVPL services:
Ethernet
private
LAN
(EPLAN)
services
Supports the EPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1d

bridges.
Ethernet
virtual
private
LAN
(EVPLAN)
services
Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:
Encapsulati
on format
Supports the following encapsulation formats:
l EVPL services based on port+VLAN

l EVPL services based on QinQ
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges

l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
l Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)

l High Level Data Link Control (HDLC)
l Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS)
Maximum
TDM
service
capacity
supported
by the
backplane
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
4xVC-4

135

3 Boards
Link aggregation
group (LAG)
Description
Maximum
number of
VCTRUN
Ks
supported
by the board
Maximum
bandwidth
supported
by each
VCTRUN
K
l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK7: 100 Mbit/s
Link
capacity
adjustment
scheme
(LCAS)
Supported
Inter-board
LAG
Not supported
Intra-board
LAG
Supported
l VCTRUNK8: 622 Mbit/s
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support intraboard LAG.
Ethernet ring protection switching

(ERPS)

G.8032/Y.1344.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
Supports the STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

(RSTP), which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP Snooping
Supported
Link state pass through (LPT)a
Supported
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support LPT.
QoS
Traffic
classificatio
n
Supports the following traffic classification modes:

l Traffic classification based on ports
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

136

3 Boards

CoS
Description
Schedules packets in traffic flows to eight egress
queues of different CoSs by:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value
Committed
access rate
(CAR)
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.
Shaping
Supports traffic shaping for a specific port or egress

queue.
Queue
scheduling
policy
Supports the following scheduling policies:

l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR
function.
ETH OAM

function.
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support IEEE
802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function.
Remote monitoring (RMON)
Supported
Port mirroring
Supported
Clock
Clock
source
Clock
protection
NOTE
Ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports) on the EMS6 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.

l Protection by running the Synchronization Status
Message (SSM) protocol
OM
Loopback

l Supports inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
excluding ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports).
l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
excluding port 8 (bridging port).
l Supports inloops on VC-3 paths.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

137

3 Boards
Description
Traffic
monitoring
Supported
Warm reset
and cold
reset
Supported
Board
manufactur
ing
information
query
Supported
Board
power
consumptio
n
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur on a service access node or an intermediate
transmission network, and instruct the service access node to immediately start the backup network for
communication. The LPT function ensures the normal transmission of important data.

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EMS6, using FE/GE signal
processing as an example.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

138

3 Boards

Figure 3-49 Functional block diagram of the EMS6
Backplane
Ethernet signal
FE signal
GE signal
FE signal
access
unit
GE signal
access
unit
Ethernet
processing
unit
Encapsulation
unit
SDH signal
Logic
processing
unit
Mapping
unit
GE signal
Management
control signal
Cross-connect
unit
Packet
switching unit
Control signal of the board

Control bus
Logic
control
unit
to the board
Power
supply unit
+3.3 V backup power

supplied to certain auxiliary
circuits on the board
System control and

communication unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-111 Signal processing in the receive direction
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
FE/GE signal access

unit
l Receives FE/GE signals. If GE signals are received

through a GE optical port, O/E conversion is required.
conversion for FE/GE signals.
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code processing, and
Ethernet performance measurement for frames.
Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives Ethernet signals from the FE/GE signal

access unit and GE signals from the packet switching
unit.
l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic
classification and committed access rate (CAR)
control, for Ethernet data frames based on service
types.
l Processes tags based on service types.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames based on service types.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Encapsulation unit
Performs the High Level Data Link Control (HDLC),

Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS), or Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP) encapsulation for Ethernet frames.

139

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Mapping unit
Maps encapsulated Ethernet data frames into VC-12s,

VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.
Logic processing
unit
Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to

the cross-connect unit.

Table 3-112 Signal processing in the transmit direction
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals

Mapping unit
Demaps encapsulated Ethernet data frames from VC-12s,

VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.
Encapsulation unit
Decapsulates Ethernet data frames after they are

demapped.
Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes tags based on service types.

l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling, for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs Ethernet data frame delimitation, preamble
addition, CRC code computation, and Ethernet
performance measurement.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE/GE signal
access unit or the GE port connected to the packet
switching unit based on egress tags contained in the
Ethernet data frames.
FE signal access unit
Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for

Ethernet data frames, and transmits generated FE/GE
signals through Ethernet ports. For a GE optical port, the
FE signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion
before transmitting signals through the GE optical port.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit using the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit using the
system control bus. The logic control unit issues configuration and query commands from the
system control and communication unit to various units on the board, and reports command
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

140

3 Boards
responses, alarms, and performance events reported by various units on the board to the system
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48
V power into +3.3 V power using the DC-DC module, and supplies the +3.3 V power to the
other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to certain auxiliary circuits on the board.
Clock Unit
3.11.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, four FE ports, and two small form-factor pluggable (SFP) GE ports on the
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
EMS6
STAT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
Figure 3-50 Front panel of the EMS6
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Indicators
Table 3-113 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

PROG
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

100 ms intervals

board.

141

Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning

300 ms intervals

the board.
On (green)
l The upper layer software is being

initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.

ms intervals

On (red)

board.
board.
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
The system is working normally.
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
The GE1 port is connected correctly.

ms intervals
The receive optical power at the GE1 optical

port is higher than the upper threshold.
Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700

ms off

port is lower than the lower threshold.
Off

Blinking (yellow)

data.
Off
The GE1 port is not receiving or

transmitting data.
On (green)

ms intervals


142

Indicator
ACT2
3 Boards
State
Meaning

ms off

Off

Blinking (yellow)

data.
Off

transmitting data.
Ports
Table 3-114 Description of the ports on the EMS6
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
GE1
GE2
GE service port
(using SFP
modules)
RJ45 SFP electrical module/LC

SFP optical module
5.9 Network Cable/5.5 Fiber

Jumper
FE1
FE service port
RJ45
5.9 Network Cable
FE2
FE3
FE4
NOTE
On the network management system (NMS), GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively,
and FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X)
standard, and the performance of the GE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. The two types of ports
support the MDI, MDI-X, auto-MDI, and auto-MDI-X modes. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-51. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-115 and Table
3-116.
87654321
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

143

3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
Pin
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)

144

Pin
3 Boards
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-117.
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
Off
On or blinking

data.
Off

receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE ports on the EMS6. One SFP optical module
provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-52, in which TX represents the
transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-52 Ports of an SFP optical module
RX
TX
3.11.5 Valid Slots

The EMS6 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EMS6 on the network management
system (NMS) are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-53 Slots for the EMS6 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EMS6)
Slot 6 (EMS6)
Slot 3 (EMS6)
Slot 4 (EMS6)
Slot 1 (EMS6)
Slot 2 (EMS6)

145

3 Boards
Figure 3-54 Logical slots for the EMS6 on the NMS

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EMS6)
Slot 6 (EMS6)
Slot 3 (EMS6)
Slot 4 (EMS6)
Slot 1 (EMS6)
Slot 2 (EMS6)
Table 3-118 Slot configuration for the EMS6

Item
Description
3.11.6 Types of SFP Modules

The GE port on the EMS6 board supports multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules.
Table 3-119 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports
Part Number
Type
34060286
1000Base-SX
34060473
1000Base-LX
34060298
1000Base-VX (40 km, 1310 nm)
34060513
1000Base-VX (40 km, 1550 nm)
34060360
1000Base-ZX
34100052
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EMS6 boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code.
Table 3-120 Board feature codes of the EMS6
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Board Feature Code
Module Type
01
1000Base-SX
146

3 Boards
Board Feature Code
Module Type
02
1000Base-LX
03
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
NOTE
If the board feature code in the bar code of the EMS6 is empty, no SFP module is installed on the EMS6.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EMS6.
Related References
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames

This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
Performance of GE Optical Ports

The GE optical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the GE optical ports.
Table 3-121 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance
transmission)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
850
1310
1000
Fiber type
Multi-mode
Single-mode
0.5
10
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-20

147

3 Boards
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
-3

(dB)
9.5
9.5
Table 3-122 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)

Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)
1310
1550
1550
1000
1000
1000
Fiber type
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
40
40
80
1270 to 1350
1480 to 1580
1500 to 1580
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-22
-22
-3
-3
-3

(dB)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Ports

The GE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the GE electrical ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

148

3 Boards
Table 3-123 GE electrical interface performance

Item
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern

4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type
RJ45

The FE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Item
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern

Interface type
RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.50 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EMS6: < 16.5 W
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

149

3 Boards
3.12 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.

The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.

The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals
from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the
Ethernet signals on the PDH network.
Table 3-126 lists the functions and features that the EFP8 supports.
Description
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and 1xGE packet

plane signals and performs EoPDH processing.
Port
specifications
FE electrical port:
10/100BASE-T
(X)
Port attributes
Working mode
The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes

port.
or hybrid.
Services
Jumbo frame
Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame

length of 2000 bytes.
Traffic control
function

EPL services
Supports the EPL services that are based on port.
EVPL services
Supports the following types of EVPL services:

l EVPL services based on port+VLAN
l EVPL services based on QinQ
EPLAN services
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Supports the EPLAN services that are based on IEEE

802.1d bridges.

150


EVPLAN services
3 Boards
Description
Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad
bridges
Encapsulation
and mapping
LAG
Encapsulation
format
Generic framing procedure (GFP)
Maximum number
of VCTRUNKs
supported by the
board
16
Maximum TDM
service capacity
supported by the
backplane
1xVC-4 (63xE1)
Maximum number
of E1s that can be
bound with a
single VCTRUNK
16xE1
Link capacity
adjustment
scheme (LCAS)
Supported
Inter-board LAG
Not supported
Intra-board LAG
Supported
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support intraboard LAG.

IGMP snooping function
Supported
LPTa
Supported
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support LPT.
QoS
Traffic
classification
l Traffic classification based on ports

l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
+VLAN PRI
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

151


CoS
3 Boards
Description
Grooms packets in traffic flows to eight egress
queues that belong to different service classes based
on the following conditions:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value
CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.
Shaping
Supports traffic shaping for queues at ports.
Queue scheduling
policies
Supports SP+WRR.
function.
ETH OAM

function.
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) of the EFP8 does not support the
OAM function that complies with IEEE 802.3ah.
RMON
Supported
Port mirroring
Supported
Clock
Clock source
NOTE
Ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports) on the EFP8 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.
Clock protection

OM
Loopback

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
excluding ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports)
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
excluding port 10 (bridging port)
l Inloops on VC-12 paths
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Warm reset and

cold reset
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information query
Supported

152

3 Boards
Description
Board power
consumption
information query
Supported
Board temperature
detection
Supported
NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate
transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of
starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of
important data.

This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.

Figure 3-55 Functional block diagram of the EFP8
Backplane
Ethernet signal
FE signal
FE
signal
access
unit
Ethernet
processing
unit
Encapsulation
unit
PDH signal
Logic
processing
unit
Mapping
unit
Management
control signal
GE signal
Cross-connect
unit
Packet
switching unit
Control signal of the board

Control bus
Logic
control
unit
to the board
Power
supply unit
+3.3 V backup power

supplied to the board
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

System control and

communication unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal
153

3 Boards

Table 3-127 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
l Receives/Transmits FE signals.
conversion for FE signals.
CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.
Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives/Transmits GE signals from the packet

switching unit.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR for Ethernet data frames based on service
categories.
l Processes tags based on service categories.
l Forwards data frames based on service categories.
Encapsulation unit
Performs GFP encapsulation for Ethernet frames.
Mapping unit
l Maps encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual

concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames
to proper VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.
Logic processing
unit
Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to

the main and standby cross-connect units.

Table 3-128 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals

from the main cross-connect unit.

154

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Mapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Extracts E1 payload from VC-12s and demaps the E1
payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.
Encapsulation unit
Decapsulates signals after demapping.
Ethernet signal
processing unit
l Processes tags based on service categories.

l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE signal access
unit or the GE port that is connected to the packet
switching unit according to the egress flag.
Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for

Ethernet data frames, and sends the generated FE signals
to an Ethernet port.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands
from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board
through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and
alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit also
through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit

l
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

155

3 Boards
Clock Unit
3.12.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
PROG
SRV
STAT
EFP8
Figure 3-56 Front panel of the EFP8
Indicators
Table 3-129 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

PROG

100 ms intervals

board.

300 ms intervals

the board.
On (green)

being initialized.

ms intervals
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


156

Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)

board.
board.
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)
Off
Ports
Table 3-130 Description of the ports on the EFP8
Port
Description
FE1 to
FE8
FE port
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
RJ45
5.9 Network Cable
The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin
assignments for the ports, see Table 3-131 and Table 3-132. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-57.
87654321
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

157

3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal
Function
TX+
TX-
RX+
Receiving data (+)
Reserved
Reserved
RX-
Receiving data (-)
Reserved
Reserved
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
TX+
Reserved
Reserved
TX-
Reserved
Reserved
The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-133.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
Off

158

3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
ACT (yellow)
On or blinking

data.
Off

receiving data.
3.12.5 Valid Slots

The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-58 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EFP8)
Slot 6 (EFP8)
Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 1 (EFP8)
Slot 2 (EFP8)
Figure 3-59 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EFP8)
Slot 6 (EFP8)
Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 1 (EFP8)
Slot 2 (EFP8)

Item
Description

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

159

3 Boards
Related References

This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The FE electrical ports on the EFP8 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Item
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern

Interface type
RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.6 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W
3.13 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide
STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by
the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

160

3 Boards

The functional version of the SL1D/SL1DA is SL91.

The SL1D/SL1DA receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Table 3-137 lists the functions and features that the SL1D/SL1DA supports.
Description
Basic functions
Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical

signals.
Port
specifications
Optical ports
l Adopts SFP optical modules and supports the

optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply
with ITU-T G.957.
Electrical ports
l Adopts SFP electrical modules.

l The performance of the electrical ports complies
with ITU-T G.703.
Protection
Clock
Linear MSP
Supported
SNCP
Supported
Clock source
Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.
Clock
protection

DCN
Outband DCN
Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is

composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.
K byte pass-through
Supported only by the SL1DA
OM
Loopback
l Outloops at optical/electrical ports

l Inloops at optical/electrical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
Warm reset and
cold reset
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Supported

161

3 Boards
Description
Setting of the
on/off state of a
laser
Supported
ALS functiona
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Detection and
query of SFP
module
information
Supported
NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

This section describes how to process one STM-1 optical signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D/SL1DA.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

162

3 Boards

Figure 3-60 Functional block diagram of the SL1D/SL1DA
Backplane
Service bus
Overhead bus
Logic processing
unit
Overhead
processing unit
STM-1
O/E conversion
unit
STM-1
Crossconnect unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and

communication unit
Control bus
Logic control
unit
Power supplied to the
+3.3 V

Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 3-138 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D/SL1DA
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
O/E conversion unit
l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.

l Detects R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

163

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Overhead processing
unit
l Restores clock signals.

l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
to the logic processing unit.
Logic processing
unit

l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control

Table 3-139 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D/SL1DA
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit

Overhead processing
unit
l Sets higher order path overheads.

l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

164

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
O/E conversion unit
Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
3.13.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
SL1D
SL1D
STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Figure 3-61 Front panel of the SL1D (with optical ports)
STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
SL1DA
Figure 3-62 Front panel of the SL1DA (with optical ports)

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2

SL1D
SL1D
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Figure 3-63 Front panel of the SL1D (with electrical ports)
165

3 Boards
SL1DA
STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Figure 3-64 Front panel of the SL1DA (with electrical ports)
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
Indicators
Table 3-140 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

Off
The services are not

configured.
On (red)
The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.
Off

SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.
On (red)
The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.
Off

SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.

166

3 Boards
Ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
TX1
Transmit port of the

first STM-1 port
RX1
Receive port of the

first STM-1 port
l SFP optical
module: LC
l SFP electrical
module: SAA
straight/female
TX2
Transmit port of the

second STM-1 port
l SFP optical
module: 5.5
Fiber Jumper
l SFP electrical
module: 5.6
STM-1 Cable
RX2
Receive port of the

second STM-1 port
l SFP optical
module: LC
l SFP electrical
module: SAA
straight/female
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.13.5 Valid Slots

The SL1D/SL1DA can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on the
NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-65 Slots for the SL1D/SL1DA in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 6 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 1 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 2 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Figure 3-66 Logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on the NMS

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 6 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 1 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 2 (SL1D/SL1DA)

167

3 Boards

Item
Description
3.13.6 Board Feature Code

The board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-143 Board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA
Feature Code
Type of Optical Module
Part Number of the

Optical Module
01
Ie-1
34060287
02
S-1.1
34060276
03
L-1.1
34060281
04
L-1.2
34060282
05
STM-1e
34100104

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D/SL1DA.
Related References
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead

This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

168

3 Boards
Table 3-144 STM-1 optical interface performance

Item
Performance
155520
Classification code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Fiber type
Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Transmission distance
(km)
15
40
80
Operating wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean launched power

(dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
-14
-8
-10
-10

(dB)
10
8.2
10
10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of
SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 3-145 STM-1 electrical interface performance
Item
Performance
155520
Code type
CMI
Wire pair in each

transmission direction
One coaxial wire pair
Impedance (ohm)
75
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

169

3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
SL1D
SL1DA
Dimensions (H x W x
D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.30 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SL1D: < 3.4 W
Power consumption of the SL1DA: < 3.3 W
3.14 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.

The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.

The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-147 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports.
Description
ML1
MD1
Basic functions
Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports

flexible configuration of E1 service categories.
E1 service categories
Supports the following E1 service categories:

l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1
Port
specifications
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
16

32
170

3 Boards
Description
ML1
Fractional E1
ATM/IMA
MD1
Supports transparent service transmission at the 64

kbit/s level.
Maximum
number of ATM
services
64
Maximum
number of ATM
connections
256
ATM traffic
management
Supported
ATM
encapsulation
mode
Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:

l N-to-one VPC
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC
Maximum
number of
concatenated
ATM cells
31
ATM OAM
Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level),

including the following functions:
l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect
indication (RDI)
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test
CES
Maximum
number of IMA
groups
16
32
Maximum
number of
members in an
IMA group
16
Maximum
number of
services
16
Encapsulation
mode
Supports the following encapsulation modes:
32
l CESoPSN
l SAToP
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

171

3 Boards
Description
ML1
Service
category
Point-to-point services
Compression of
vacant slots
Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)
Jitter buffering
time (us)
375-16000
Packet loading
time (us)
125-5000
CES ACR
Supported
Retiming
Supported
Clock protection
OM
MD1
Supports clock protection based on clock source

priorities.
Loopback
Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.
Cold reset and

warm reset
Supported
PRBS tests at E1
ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported

This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

172

3 Boards

Figure 3-67 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1
Backplane
Service
bus
Logic processing
unit
Service
processing unit
E1
Signal interface
unit
E1
GE bus
Control bus
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power
+3.3 V backup power
Power
supply unit

other units of the board
Clock unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
System clock signal

Table 3-148 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Signal interface unit
l Receives external E1 signals.

l Matches the resistance.
l Equalizes signals.
l Converts the level.
l Recovers clock signals.
l Buffers the received data.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.
Service processing
unit
l Frames E1 signals.
l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

173

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
l Implements the conversion from the internal service

bus into the GE bus in the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Table 3-149 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
l Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit.
l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the
backplane into the internal service bus.
Service processing
unit
l Decapsulates service signals.

l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the signal interface unit.
Signal interface unit
l Performs HDB3 coding.

l Performs clock re-timing.
l Performs pulse shaping.
l Drives the line.
l Sends E1 signals to a port.

Power Supply Unit

l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

174

3 Boards
Clock Unit
3.14.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
ML1
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-68 Front panel of the ML1

16
E1
MD1
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-69 Front panel of the MD1

16
1
32
17
Indicators
Table 3-150 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
SRV
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)


175

Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off

configured.
Ports
Table 3-151 Description of the ports on the ML1
Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1 to 16
The first to sixteenth

E1 ports
Anea 96
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the External Equipment or
the E1 Panel
Table 3-152 Description of the ports on the MD1

Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1 to 16

E1 ports
Anea 96

the E1 Panel
17 to 32
The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports
Anea 96

the E1 Panel
The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-70 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-153 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-70 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1
POS.96
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

176

3 Boards
Table 3-153 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
The first received E1

differential signal (+)
25
The first transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

differential signal (-)
26

signal (-)
The second received E1

27
The second transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

28

signal (-)
The third received E1

29
The third transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

30

signal (-)
The fourth received E1

31
The fourth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

32

signal (-)
The fifth received E1

33
The fifth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
10

34

signal (-)
11
The sixth received E1

35
The sixth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
12

36

signal (-)
13
The seventh received E1

37
The seventh transmitted E1

14

38

15
The eighth received E1

39
The eighth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
16

40

signal (-)
17
The ninth received E1

41
The ninth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
18

42

signal (-)

177

3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
19
The tenth received E1

43
The tenth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
20

44

signal (-)
21
The eleventh received E1

45
The eleventh transmitted E1

22

46

23
The twelfth received E1

47
The twelfth transmitted E1

24

48

49
The thirteenth received E1

73
The thirteenth transmitted E1

50

74

51
The fourteenth received E1

75
The fourteenth transmitted E1

52

76

53
The fifteenth received E1

77
The fifteenth transmitted E1

54

78

55
The sixteenth received E1

79
The sixteenth transmitted E1

56

80

3.14.5 Valid Slots

The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS are
the same as the physical slots.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

178

3 Boards
Figure 3-71 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)
Figure 3-72 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)

Item
Description

The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-155 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1
Board Feature Code
Port Impedance (Ohm)
75
120

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.
Related References
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

179

3 Boards
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-156 E1 interface performance
Item
Performance
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Wire pair in each

One symmetrical wire pair
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
ML1
MD1
Dimensions (H x W x
D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.45 kg
0.50 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W
Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W
3.15 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.

The SP3S has two functional versions: SL91SP3SVER.B and SL91SP3SVER.C. The SP3D also
has two functional versions: TNH1SP3DVER.B and TNH1SP3DVER.C. The difference
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

180

3 Boards
between VER.B and VER.C is that path indication on the front panel is optimized and the board
power consumption is reduced.

The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-158 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports.
Description
SP3S
Basic functions
SP3D
Receives and transmits E1 signals.
Port
specifications
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
16
Clock
Clock source
Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the

first or fifth E1 signal.
Clock
protection
Supports clock protection based on clock source

priorities.
E1 retiming
function
Supported
Loopback
Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.
Cold reset and

warm reset
Supported
PRBS tests at E1
ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
OM
32

This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

181

3 Boards

Figure 3-73 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D
Backplane
Codec unit
Interface unit
E1
Service bus
Logic processing
unit
Mapping/Demapping
unit
E1 signal
E1
Control bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
to the board
Power
supply unit
+3.3 V backup power

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
System clock signal
NOTE
The power supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from -48
V power into +3.3 V power.

Table 3-159 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Interface unit
External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and

then transmitted to the board.
Codec unit
l Equalizes the received signals.

l Recovers clock signals.
l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

182

3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.

l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.
Logic processing
unit


Table 3-160 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.

l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
l Extracts E1 signals.
Codec unit
Performs HDB3 coding.
Interface unit
E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then

transmitted to an external cable.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

183

3 Boards
Power Supply Unit

l
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into +3.3
V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power
supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from
-48 V power into +3.3 V power.
Clock Unit
3.15.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
SP3S
SP3S
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-74 Front panel of the SP3SVER.B

E1
1-16
SP3S
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-75 Front panel of the SP3SVER.C

16
E1
1
21
1
42
22
SP3D
SP3D
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-76 Front panel of the SP3DVER.B
SP3D
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-77 Front panel of the SP3DVER.C

16
1
32
17

184

3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-161 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

Off

configured.
Ports
Table 3-162 Description of the ports on the SP3S(VER.B and VER.C)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-16

E1 ports
Anea 96

the External Equipment,
the E1 Panel or 5.7.3 E1
Transit Cable Terminated
with an Anea 96 Connector
and a DB44 Connector

185

3 Boards
Table 3-163 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.B

Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-21

E1 ports
Anea 96

the E1 Panel
22-42
The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports
Anea 96

the E1 Panel
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 950, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1
signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
Table 3-164 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.C

Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-16

E1 ports
Anea 96

the E1 Panel
17-32
The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports
Anea 96

the E1 Panel
The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-78 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-165 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-78 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1
POS.96
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

186

3 Boards
Table 3-165 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal

25

signal (+)

26

signal (-)

27

signal (+)

28

signal (-)

29

signal (+)

30

signal (-)

31

signal (+)

32

signal (-)

33

signal (+)
10

34

signal (-)
11

35

signal (+)
12

36

signal (-)
13

37

14

38

15

39

signal (+)
16

40

signal (-)
17

41

signal (+)
18

42

signal (-)

187

3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
19

43

signal (+)
20

44

signal (-)
21

45

22

46

23

47

24

48

49

73

50

74

51

75

52

76

53

77

54

78

55

79

56

80

3.15.5 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

188

3 Boards
Figure 3-79 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)
Figure 3-80 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)

Item
Description

The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-167 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D
Board Feature Code
Port Impedance (Ohm)
120
75

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related References
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

189

3 Boards

This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-168 E1 interface performance
Item
Performance
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Wire pair in each

Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
SP3SVER.B
SP3SVER.C
Dimensio
ns (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.50 kg
0.40 kg
SP3DVER.B
SP3SVER.C
0.64 kg
0.54 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.B: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.C: < 4.8 W
Power consumption of the SP3DVER.B: < 9.6 W
Power consumption of the SP3DVER.C: < 8.3 W
3.16 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can house
only one AUX.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

190

3 Boards

The functional version of the AUX is SL91.

The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one
asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.
Table 3-170 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.
Description
Orderwire phone port
Synchronous data port
1
The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its
specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.
Asynchronous data port
1
The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2
kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.
External alarm port
Four inputs and two outputs
Hot swapping function
Supported
Board power consumption

information query
Supported
Power detection
Supported

The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.

Figure 3-81 Functional block diagram of the AUX
Backplane
Power
supply unit
4-input/2-output alarm port
One orderwire phone port
64 kbit/s
synchronous data port
Orderwire
unit
Logic control
unit
+3.3 V
Power dip
detection signal
System bus
System control and

communication unit
19.2 kbit/s
asynchronous data port
Clock unit
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Clock
signal
Board status
detection unit

System control and

communication unit
191

3 Boards
Power Supply Unit

l
Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on
the AUX.
Receives and shuts down control signals.
Orderwire Unit
l
Supports the input of four channels of alarms.
Supports the output of two channels of alarms.
Provides one orderwire port.
Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port.
Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port.

NOTE
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implement
only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.
Logic Control Unit

l
Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the
board control function.
Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
Processes clock signals.
Provides board status information.
Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.
Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by running
specific commands.
Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.
Board Status Detection Unit

l
Detects board performance data such as board voltage.
Stores board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
3.16.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-82 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

192

3 Boards
AUX
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-82 Front panel of the AUX
F1/S1
PHONE
ALMO
ALMI
Indicators
Table 3-171 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

board.
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)

system.
Off
Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports

Table 3-172 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports
Port
Description
F1/S1
Synchronous/Asynchronous data port
ALMI
Alarm input port
ALMO
Alarm output port
PHONE
Orderwire phone port
Connector Type
RJ45
The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the
ports, however, are different. Figure 3-83 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

193

3 Boards
87654321
Table 3-173 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 3-173 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Port
Pin
Signal
F1/S1
Transmitting asynchronous data signals
Grounding end
Receiving asynchronous data signals
Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
Grounding end
Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 3-174 and see Table
3-175.
Table 3-174 Pin assignments for the ALMI port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Port
Pin
Signal
ALMI
The first external alarm input signal
Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal
The second external alarm input signal
The third external alarm input signal
Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal
Grounding end for the second external alarm input

signal
The forth external alarm input signal
Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal

194

3 Boards
Table 3-175 Pin assignments for the ALMO port

Port
Pin
Signal
ALMO
The first external alarm output signal (+)
The first external alarm output signal (-)
The second external alarm output signal (+)
Connected in parallel with pin 1
The second external alarm output signal (-)
3.16.5 Valid Slots

The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-84 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (AUX)
Slot 6 (AUX)
Slot 3 (AUX)
Slot 4 (AUX)
Slot 1 (AUX)
Slot 2 (AUX)
Figure 3-85 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (AUX)
Slot 6 (AUX)
Slot 3 (AUX)
Slot 4 (AUX)
Slot 1 (AUX)
Slot 2 (AUX)

195

3 Boards

Item
Description

This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board
Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-177 Orderwire interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Wire pair in each

Impedance (ohm)
600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN
equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the
orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-178 Synchronous data interface performance
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined

byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
64
Interface type
Codirectional

196

3 Boards
Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-179 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the

Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
19.2
Meets the RS-232 standard.
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.27 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 1.3 W
3.17 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

The functional version of the PIU is TND1.

The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and
information reporting.
Table 3-181 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

197

3 Boards

Description
Basic functions
Power access
Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 V

DC or -60 V DC power input.
Power output
The PIU provides other boards with -48 V power.
Protection
Supports 1+1 HSB protection.
Power
protection
l Protection against overcurrent
Surge
protection
Supported
Protection
l Protection against short circuits
Board power consumption

information query
Supported
Surge protection status monitoring
Supported

The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication
control unit.

Figure 3-86 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.
Figure 3-86 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Backplane
-48 V/-60 V
Protection and
detection unit
EMI filtering
unit
Detection
signal
-48 V
Detection signal
Communicatio
n control unit
Board operating in distributed

power supply mode
System control and

communication unit
+3.3 V
Protection and Detection Unit

The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the
following functions:
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.

198

3 Boards
Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm.
Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit

The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.
Communication Control Unit

The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and
communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:
l
PIU manufacturing information
PCB version information
Surge-protection failure information
PIU temperature
3.17.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-87 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
-48V
PWR
NEG(-) RTN(+)
-60V
Figure 3-87 Front panel of the PIU
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

199

3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-182 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
Indicator
Status
Description
PWR
On (green)
The power supply is connected.
Off
There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power

supply is connected incorrectly.
Ports
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-183 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their
respective usage.
Table 3-183 Description of the ports on the PIU
Port
Port Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
NEG1(-)
-48 V power input

port
2 mm HM power
connector
5.1 Power Cable
RTN1(+)
BGND power input

port
Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power
operations.
CAUTION
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power
supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.
3.17.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in slots 9 and 10. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-88 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 11
Slot 9
(PIU)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2

200

3 Boards
Figure 3-89 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS

Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 11
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2

This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
Table 3-184 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.
Table 3-184 Technical specifications for the PIU
Item
Performance
Dimensions
21.0 mm x 41.4 mm x 229.9 mm
Weight
0.12 kg
Power consumption
< 0.5 W
Input voltage
-38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.18 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

The functional version of the FAN is TND1.

The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
Table 3-185 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

201

3 Boards

Description
Power input
Accesses one +12 V power input from the active system

control, switching, and timing board and one +12 V power
input from the standby system control, switching, and timing
board to provide 1+1 protection.
Number of fans
Intelligent fan speed

adjustment
Supported
Protection
Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans, protects

fans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequency
signals.
OM
l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,

alarms, version number, and board in-position status.
l Provides alarm indicators.
l Supports board power consumption information query
NOTE
l When one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace it within 96 hours if the ambient temperature
reaches 40C; it is recommended that you replace it within 24 hours if the ambient temperature exceeds
40C.
l When more than one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace the failed fans immediately.

The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.
Figure 3-90 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.
Figure 3-90 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Backplane
Fan unit
+12 V
+12 V
Power unit
+12 V
Communication
detection signal
Communication
monitoring unit
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Communication
detection signal
System control and

communication unit

202

3 Boards
Power Unit
l
Receives +12 V power from the backplane.
Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, supply
combining, and overcurrent protection.
Fan Unit
Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
Communication Monitoring Unit

l
Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental

temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and
communication unit.
Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width
modulation signal from the system control and communication unit.
The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in
Table 3-186.
Table 3-186 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed
Working Temperature
Rotating Speed
25C
4800 rounds/minute
25C to 60C
Linear increase in accordance with the

temperature
60C
16000 rounds/minute
3.18.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-91 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

203

3 Boards
Figure 3-91 Front panel of the FAN
FAN
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
Indicators
Table 3-187 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN
Indicator
State
Meaning
FAN
On (green)
The fan is working properly.
On (red)
The fan is faulty.
Off
The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the
subrack.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack

An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.

204

3 Boards
Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.
3.18.5 Valid Slots

The FAN can be inserted in slot 11 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-92 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 9
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2
Figure 3-93 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS

Slot 10
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 9
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2

This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.
Table 3-188 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
Table 3-188 Technical specifications for the FAN
Item
Performance
28.5 mm x 86.2 mm x 217.6 mm
Weight
0.302 kg
Power consumption
< 4.1 W (room temperature)

< 29.6 W (high temperature)
3.19 TCU6
The TDM connecting unit (TCU6) is a 6xE1 port conversion board. The TCU6 implements
conversion between DB44 ports and RJ45 ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

205

3 Boards

The functional version of the TCU6 is SL91.

The TCU6 implements conversion between DB44 ports and RJ45 ports for 6xE1 services. In
application, the TCU6 usually works with the SP3S (120 ohms) by connecting them using an
E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB44 connector, therefore enabling
conversion between Anea 96 ports and RJ45 ports.
Table 3-189 lists the functions and features that the TCU6 supports.
Description
Basic functions
Enables conversion between Anea 96 ports and

RJ45 ports for E1 services when this board is
connected to the DB44 connector of an E1 transit
cable, the other end of which is terminated with an
Anea 96 connector.
Port
specifications
RJ45 port
DB44 port
1 (for receiving/transmitting 6xE1 signals)
Board information query and display on

the NMS
Not supported
NOTE
The TCU6 is a passive port conversion board, which does not provide software interfaces and ports for
connecting to the backplane.
3.19.3 Front Panel

There are six RJ45 ports and one DB44 port on the front panel.
TCU6
Front Panel Diagram

1
1
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

206

3 Boards
Ports
Table 3-190 Description of the ports on the TCU6
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
1-6 (RJ45)
The first to sixth E1

RJ45 ports
RJ45
1-6 (DB44)
The first to sixth E1

DB44 ports
DB44
5.7.3 E1 Transit
Cable Terminated
with an Anea 96
Connector and a
DB44 Connector
Figure 3-94 shows the front view of an RJ45 connector.

Figure 3-94 Front view of an RJ45 connector
87654321
NOTE
The two indicators on an RJ45 connector do not indicate port status and are steady off.
Each RJ45 port transmits 1xE1 signals. Table 3-191 provides the pin assignments for an RJ45
port.
Table 3-191 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Port
Pin
Signal
n (n = 1-6)
The nth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
The nth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
Reserved
The nth received E1 differential signal (+)
The nth received E1 differential signal (-)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

207

3 Boards
Figure 3-95 shows the front view of a DB44 connector.

Figure 3-95 Pin assignments for a DB44 port
Pos. 15
Pos. 1
Pos. 30
Pos. 16
Pos. 31
Pos. 44
Table 3-192 Pin assignments for a DB44 port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
15
The first received E1 differential

signal (-)
38

signal (-)
30
The first received E1 differential

signal (+)
23

signal (+)
14
The second received E1 differential

signal (-)
37
The second transmitted E1

29
The second received E1 differential

signal (+)
22
The second transmitted E1

13
The third received E1 differential

signal (-)
36

signal (-)
28
The third received E1 differential

signal (+)
21

signal (+)
12
The fourth received E1 differential

signal (-)
35

signal (-)
27
The fourth received E1 differential

signal (+)
20
The four transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
11
The fifth received E1 differential

signal (-)
34

signal (-)
26
The fifth received E1 differential

signal (+)
19

signal (+)
10
The sixth received E1 differential

signal (-)
33

signal (-)
25
The sixth received E1 differential

signal (+)
18

signal (+)

32
The seventh received E1 differential

signal (+)

208

3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
24

17
The seventh received E1 differential

signal (-)

signal (+)
31
The eighth received E1 differential

signal (+)

signal (-)
16
The eighth received E1 differential

signal (-)
1-6
and
39-4
4
Grounding
Othe
rs
Not defined
3.19.4 Valid Slots

The TCU6 can be inserted in slot 4 or 6 of the IDU chassis. The TCU6 has no logical slots and
is not displayed on the NMS.
The TCU6 usually works with the SP3S. The TCU6 is inserted in slot 6 and the SP3S is inserted
in slot 4.
Figure 3-96 Slots for the TCU6 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6 (TCU6)
Slot 3
Slot 4 (SP3S)
Slot 1
Slot 2
You can also insert the TCU6 in slot 4 and the SP3S in slot 6.

This section describes the board specifications, including only the mechanical behavior.
Mechanical Behavior
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.27 kg
209

4 Accessories
Accessories
About This Chapter

The accessories of the OptiX RTN 950 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements.
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

210

4 Accessories
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel
provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
T16
1-8
9-16
Ports
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel
Port
Description
Connector Type
T1-T16
Transmit ports for the first to

sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
BNC
R1-R16
Receive ports for the first to

sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
1-8
The first to eighth E1 ports

(connected to an IDU)
9-16
The ninth to sixteenth E1

ports (connected to an IDU)
Grounding bolt
Connecting a PGND cable
DB37
NOTE
The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides
the pin assignments for the E1 port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

211

4 Accessories
Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
20
The first E1 received differential

signal (+)
21
The first E1 transmitted

The first E1 received differential

signal (-)
The first E1 transmitted

22
The second E1 received

23
The second E1 transmitted

The second E1 received

The second E1 transmitted

24
The third E1 received differential

signal (+)
25
The third E1 transmitted

The third E1 received differential

signal (-)
The third E1 transmitted

26
The fourth E1 received

27
The fourth E1 transmitted

The fourth E1 received

The fourth E1 transmitted

36
The fifth E1 received differential

signal (+)
35
The fifth E1 transmitted

17
The fifth E1 received differential

signal (-)
16
The fifth E1 transmitted

34
The sixth E1 received differential

signal (+)
33
The sixth E1 transmitted

15
The sixth E1 received differential

signal (-)
14
The sixth E1 transmitted

32
The seventh E1 received

31
The seventh E1 transmitted

13
The seventh E1 received

12
The seventh E1 transmitted


212

4 Accessories
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
30
The eighth E1 received

29
The eighth E1 transmitted

11
The eighth E1 received

10
The eighth E1 transmitted

Others
Reserved
4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of a PDU.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU
1
OUTPUT
ON
OUTPUT
ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OFF
20A
20A 20A 20A
OFF
INPUT
20A
20A 20A 20A
1. Output power terminals (A)
2. PGND terminals
3. Input power terminals
4. Output power terminals (B)
5. Power switches (A)
6. Power switches (B)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

213

4 Accessories
Ports
Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU
Position
Port
Description
Output power
terminals (A)
Power output (+)
Power output (-)
PGND
terminals
Wiring terminal
for a two-hole
OT terminal
For connecting PGND cables
Input power
terminals
RTN1(+)
The first power input (+)
RTN2(+)
The second power input (+)
NEG1(-)
The first power input (-)
NEG2(-)
The second power input (-)
Output power
terminals (B)
Power output (+)
Power output (-)
Power
switches (A)
20 A
Switches for power outputs
Power
switches (B)
20 A
The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to

the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on
side A.
Switches for power outputs
The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to
the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on
side B.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle

After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.
Functions
l
The PDU supports two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.
Each input power supply provides four outputs.
The fuse capacity of the switch for each power output is 20 A.
The PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution.
Working Principle
A PDU consists of input terminals, output terminals, and circuit breakers and it performs simple
distribution operations for the input power.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

214

4 Accessories
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
OUTPUT A
+
SW1
SW2
INPUT
+
+
SW3
RTN1(+)
BGND
SW4
RTN2(+)
1
2
3
4
OUTPUT B
+
NEG1(-)
BGND
SW1
NEG2(-)
SW2
+
+
SW4
PGND
SW4
1
2
3
4
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode

A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default
mode.
A short-circuit copper bar inside a PDU controls the power distribution mode of the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution Mode

To use DC-C power distribution, use the short-circuit copper bar to short-circuit terminal RTN1
(+), terminal RTN2(+), and PGND terminals.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

215

4 Accessories
Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode
DC-I Power Distribution Mode

To use DC-I power distribution, remove the short-circuit copper bar.
Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

216

5 Cables
Cables
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on
the IDU 950.
5.1 Power Cable
A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
5.2 PGND Cable
PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
5.4 XPIC Cable
An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 950. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
5.6 STM-1 Cable
An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.8 Orderwire Cable
An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

217

5 Cables
PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.
5.9 Network Cable
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

218

5 Cables
5.1 Power Cable

A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
Table 5-1 Power cable specifications

Model
Cable
Terminal
6 mm2 power
cable and
terminal
Power cable, 450 V/

750 V, H07Z-K-6
mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero halogen
cable
Common terminal, single cord end terminal,

conductor cross section 6 mm2, 30 A, insertion
depth 12 mm, blue
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 950, power cables with a 6 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance
of 43 m.
5.2 PGND Cable

PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external
equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment
share the same ground.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

219

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
Main label
1
Cable tie
H.S.tube
L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT
2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
external equipment share the same ground.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

220

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
Main label
1
L
Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is
connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected
to the IF board.
NOTE
l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch
IF cable to the IF board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

221

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1
H.S.tube 2 PCS
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male
2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female
Pin Assignments
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable

An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same
XPIC work group.
When the XPIC function is disabled for XPIC boards, an XPIC cable is used to connect the XIN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.
XPIC cables are available in the following types:
l
XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two
XPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4.
XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect
two XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. These
XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC
board to loop back signals.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

222

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable
1
L1
2
L2
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male
2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male
Pin Assignments
None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper

A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 950. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1
Connector 2
Cable
LC/PC
FC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
SC/PC
223

Connector 1
5 Cables
Connector 2
Cable
LC/PC
LC/PC
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 950, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

224

5 Cables
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector
5.6 STM-1 Cable

An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

225

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 STM-1 cable
1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male
2. Main label
3. Coaxial cable
Pin Assignments
None.
Cable Specifications
Item
Description
Connector
Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/male
Cable model
Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Number of cores
One
Core diameter
Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal

insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34
mm)
Length
10 m
Fireproof class
CM
5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment

An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.
Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1
signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm
coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

226

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the external equipment
Main label
1
W
X1
ViewA
Pos.96
Cable connector, Anea,
96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

NOTE
l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.

l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of
2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial
connector.
Pin Assignments
Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
W
Core
Serial
No.
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Remark
s
Pin
R0
R1
R2
R3
Remark
s
Core
Serial
No.
25
Tip
T0
26
Ring
27
Tip
T1
28
Ring
29
Tip
T2
30
Ring
31
Tip
T3

227

Pin
W
Core
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
5 Cables
Ring
Tip
10
Ring
11
Tip
12
Ring
13
Tip
14
Ring
15
Tip
16
Ring
18
Ring
17
Tip
20
Ring
19
Tip
22
Ring
21
Tip
24
Ring
23
Tip
50
Ring
49
Tip
52
Ring
51
Tip
54
Ring
53
Tip
56
Ring
55
Shell
Serial
No.
Remark
s
Pin
W
Core
32
Ring
33
Tip
34
Ring
35
Tip
36
Ring
37
Tip
38
Ring
39
Tip
40
Ring
42
Ring
41
Tip
44
Ring
43
Tip
46
Ring
45
Tip
48
Ring
47
Tip
74
Ring
73
Tip
76
Ring
75
Tip
78
Ring
75
Tip
80
Ring
Tip
79
Tip
Braid
Shell
Braid
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15

Serial
No.
Remark
s
10
T4
12
T5
14
T6
16
T7
18
T8
20
T9
22
T10
24
T11
26
T12
28
T13
30
T14
32
T15
228

5 Cables
Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable

Pin
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Pin
Blue
Color
of the
Core
Relati
onshi
p
White
R0
Blue
Twiste
d pair
White
R1
Green
Twiste
d pair
White
R2
Grey
Twiste
d pair
Red
R3
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
Red
R4
10
Brown
Twiste
d pair
11
Black
R5
12
Blue
Twiste
d pair
13
Black
R6
14
Green
Twiste
d pair
15
Black
Twiste
d pair
R7
16
Grey
17
White
18
Blue
19
White
20
Green
21
White
22
Grey
23
Red
Twiste
d pair
R8
Twiste
d pair
R9
Twiste
d pair
R10
Twiste
d pair
R11
Orang
e
Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Blue
Color
of the
Core
Relati
onshi
p
25
White
T0
26
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
27
White
T1
28
Brown
Twiste
d pair
29
Red
T2
30
Blue
Twiste
d pair
31
Red
T3
32
Green
Twiste
d pair
33
Red
T4
34
Grey
Twiste
d pair
35
Black
T5
36
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
37
Black
T6
38
Brown
Twiste
d pair
39
Yello
w
Twiste
d pair
T7
40
Blue
41
White
T8
42
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
43
White
T9
44
Brown
Twiste
d pair
45
Red
T10
46
Blue
Twiste
d pair
47
Red
Twiste
d pair
T11

Orang
e
229

Pin
W
Color
of the
Core
24
Orang
e
49
Red
50
Brown
51
Black
52
Blue
53
Black
54
Green
55
Black
56
Shell
Relati
onshi
p
5 Cables
Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Pin
W
Color
of the
Core
48
Green
73
Red
74
Grey
75
Black
76
Orang
e
77
Black
78
Brown
79
Yello
w
Grey
80
Blue
Braid
Shell
Braid
Twiste
d pair
R12
Twiste
d pair
R13
Twiste
d pair
R14
Twiste
d pair
R15
Relati
onshi
p
Rema
rks
Twiste
d pair
T12
Twiste
d pair
T13
Twiste
d pair
T14
Twiste
d pair
T15
Tape
Color
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

230

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel
X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female
X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"
Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"
Pin Assignments
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37
connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Wire
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
W1
X1.2
X2.20
R0
X1.10
X2.36
R4
X1.1
X2.2
X1.9
X2.17
X1.26
X2.21
X1.34
X2.35
X1.25
X2.3
X1.33
X2.16
X1.4
X2.22
X1.12
X2.34
X1.3
X2.4
X1.11
X2.15
X1.28
X2.23
X1.36
X2.33
X1.27
X2.5
X1.35
X2.14
X1.6
X2.24
X1.14
X2.32
T0
R1
T1
R2

T4
R5
T5
R6
231

Wire
W2
5 Cables
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
X1.5
X2.6
X1.30
X2.25
X1.29
X2.7
X1.8
X2.26
X1.7
X2.8
X1.32
X2.27
X1.31
X2.9
X1.18
X3.20
X1.17
X3.2
X1.42
X3.21
X1.41
X3.3
X1.20
X3.22
X1.19
X3.4
X1.44
X3.23
X1.43
X3.5
X1.22
X3.24
X1.21
X3.6
X1.46
X3.25
X1.45
X3.7
X1.24
X3.26
X1.23
X3.8
X1.48
X3.27
X1.47
Shell
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
X1.13
X2.13
X1.38
X2.31
X1.37
X2.12
X1.16
X2.30
X1.15
X2.11
X1.40
X2.29
X1.39
X2.10
X1.50
X3.36
X1.49
X3.17
X1.74
X3.35
X1.73
X3.16
X1.52
X3.34
X1.51
X3.15
X1.76
X3.33
X1.75
X3.14
X1.54
X3.32
X1.53
X3.13
X1.78
X3.31
X1.77
X3.12
X1.56
X3.30
X1.55
X3.11
X1.80
X3.29
X3.9
X1.79
X3.10
Braid
Shell
Braid
T2
R3
T3
R8
T8
R9
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
Remarks
T6
R7
T7
R12
T12
R13
T13
R14
T14
R15
T15
5.7.3 E1 Transit Cable Terminated with an Anea 96 Connector and

a DB44 Connector
When the TCU6 works with the SP3S, an E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector
and a DB44 connector is required for connecting the two boards. For the E1 transit cable, the
Anea 96 connector is connected to the E1 port on the SP3S, and the DB44 connector is connected
to the DB44 E1 port on the TCU6.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

232

5 Cables
This E1 transit cable can transmit 6xE1 signals. The port impedance of the cable is 120 ohms,
and therefore this cable can work only with the 120-ohm SP3S. The cable is 0.6 m long.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB44 connector
Main Label
X2
Pos.15
Pos.16
Pos.30
Pos.31
X1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
X2. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male
Pin Assignments
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a
DB44 connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Wire
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2
Remarks
W1
X1.2
X2.15
R0
X1.8
X2.12
R3
X1.1
X2.30
X1.7
X2.27
X1.26
X2.38
X1.32
X2.35
X1.25
X2.23
X1.31
X2.20
X1.4
X2.14
X1.10
X2.11
X1.3
X2.29
X1.9
X2.26
X1.28
X2.37
X1.34
X2.34
X1.27
X2.22
X1.33
X2.19
X1.6
X2.13
X1.12
X2.10
T0
R1
T1
R2

T3
R4
T4
R5
233

Wire
5 Cables
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2
X1.5
X2.28
X1.30
X2.36
X1.29
Shell
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2
X1.11
X2.25
X1.36
X2.33
X2.21
X1.35
X2.18
Braid
Shell
Braid
T2
Remarks
T5
5.8 Orderwire Cable

An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Orderwire cable
1
Main label
6
X1
X2
1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector
Pin Assignments
Table 5-7 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Function
X1.3
X2.3
Tip
X1.4
X2.4
Ring
5.9 Network Cable

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

234

5 Cables
Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs)
and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin
assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-8. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The
pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-9.
Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDIs
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs

Pin
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)

235

Pin
5 Cables
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used
between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and
crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN
950 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and
crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical
service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-14 Network cable
1
Label 1 Main label
Label 2
1. Network port connector, RJ45
Pin Assignments
Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.1
X2.1
White/Orange
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White/Green
X1.6
X2.6
Green

Twisted pair
236

5 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
Twisted pair
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Table 5-11 Pin assignments for the crossover cable
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.6
X2.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X1.3
X2.1
White/Orange
X1.1
X2.3
White/Green
X1.2
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown

Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
237

A Parameters Description
Parameters Description
This chapter describes the parameters used in this document.

A.1 Parameters for Network Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the
packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoS/
EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet
port parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.8 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
A.10 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

238

A.1 Parameters for Network Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

239

Parameters for the Search Field

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Address Type
IP Address of GNE
IP Address Range of GNE
l If the OSI protocol is

used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on NSAP
Address only.
NSAP Address
IP Address Range of GNE
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address
of GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

240

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Search Address
l If Address Type is set

to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.
to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.
to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP
address of the gateway
NE.
User Name
This parameter specifies

the user name of the
gateway NE.
Password

the password of the
gateway NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

241

Parameter for Searching for NEs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Create NE after search
Selected
Deselected
l To create NEs in
batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE
after search. The NEs
are automatically
created after they are
found.
Deselected
l After Create NE after

search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are
used for creating an
NE.
NOTE
If only Create NE after
search is selected, Search
for NE is selected
automatically.
NE User
l This parameter
specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Password
l This parameter
specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

242

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Upload after create
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter
specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
Deselected
l If only Upload after

create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.
Parameter for the Found NEs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE ID
This parameter indicates

the ID of the found NE,
which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.
GNE Address

the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.
GNE ID

the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.
Created As GNE
Yes
Yes
l This parameter
specifies the password
NE is created.
No

only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Connection Mode
Common
Common
The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
1400

the communication port.
Security SSL
Port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

243

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Status
Created

whether the found NE is
created.
Uncreated
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose File > Creat > NE from the Main Menu.
2.
Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 950 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Type

the type of the NE to be
created.
ID
1 to 49135
l The ID refers to the

basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
l The NE ID consisting
of the basic ID and
extended ID identifies
an NE on the NMS.
Extended ID
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1 to 254

If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
Extended ID.
244

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Name
l This parameter
specifies the name of
the NE.
l After you have
specified the name of
the NE, the name is
displayed under the
icon of the NE.
Remarks

the remarks of the NE.
Gateway Type
Non-Gateway
Non-Gateway
l This parameter is set to

Gateway if the new
NE is a gateway NE.
Gateway
l This parameter is set to

Non-Gateway if the
new NE is a nongateway NE.
according to the DCN
planning if the new NE
can function as a
gateway NE or a nongateway NE.
Gateway

the gateway NE of the new
NE when Gateway Type
is set to Non-Gateway.
Protocol
IP
IP
l This parameter needs

to be set when
Gateway Type is set
to Gateway.
OSI
l When the OSI over

DCC solution is used,
this parameter is set to
OSI.
l In other cases, this
parameter is set to IP.
IP Address
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


the IP address of the new
NE. This parameter needs
to be set when Affiliated
Gateway Protocol is set
to IP.
245

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Mode
Common
Common
The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Security SSL
Port
1400

the communication port.
NE User

the user name to be
entered when an NE is
created.
Password

the password to be entered
when an NE is created.
NSAP Address

the NSAP address of the
new NE. This parameter
needs to be set when
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol is set to OSI.
You need to set the area ID
only, and the other parts
are automatically
generated by the NE.
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1.
In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed.
2.
Choose Object Attributes.
3.
Click Modify NE ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

246

Parameters for Changing NE IDs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
New ID
l The new ID refers to

the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
according to the
network plan.
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
1 to 254
New Extended ID
If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the Main Menu.
2.
Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

the name of the NE.
NE ID

the ID of the NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

247

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronous Mode
Standard NTP
Null
l If this parameter is set

to NM, the NE
synchronizes the time
of the NMS server.
NM
Null

to Standard NTP, the
NE synchronizes the
Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
through the standard
NTP.
Standard NTP
Authentication
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter is valid

only when Synchronous
Mode is set to Standard
NTP.
Disabled
Parameters for the Standard NTP Server

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Standard NTP Server

Identifier
NE ID
NE ID
l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
IP
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the HWECC
protocol, this
parameter is set to NE
ID.
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the IP
protocol, this
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

248

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Standard NTP Server
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
a non-gateway NE,
the ID or IP address of
the gateway NE.
Standard NTP Server

Key
0 to 1024
l If the NTP server does

not need to
authenticated, this
parameter is set to the
value "0".
l If the NTP server
needs to be
authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according
to the allocated key of
the NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).
Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronization
Starting Time
l This parameter
specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

249

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
DST
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter
indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.
Deselected

according to the actual
situation.
Synchronization Period
(days)
1 to 300
l This parameter
indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
you use the default
value.
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization

Management from the Main Menu.
2.
Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
.
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
This parameter indicates the name of the

NE.
TimeZone
This parameter indicates the time zone.
DST
This parameter indicates whether DST is

enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

250

Parameters for Time Zone

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Time Zone
l After the time zone is changed, the

current time of the NE is changed
accordingly.
l This parameter is set according to the
place where the NE is located.
DST
Selected
Deselected
Deselected
l The parameters related to daylight

saving time can be valid only when this
parameter is selected.
situation whether daylight saving time is
used in the place where the NE is located.
1 to 120
Offset
This parameter specifies the offset value of

the daylight saving time.
WEEK
This parameter specifies the method of

adjusting the daylight saving time.
Unit: minute(s)
Start Rule
WEEK
DATE
Start Time
This parameter specifies the start daylight

saving time.
End Rule
WEEK
WEEK
This parameter specifies the method of

adjusting the daylight saving time.
This parameter specifies the end daylight

saving time.
DATE
End Time
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the Main Menu.
2.
Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

251


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Key
1 to 1024
l This parameter
indicates the key for
NTP authentication.
according to the
requirements of the
Password
l This parameter
indicates the password
that corresponds to
Key.
according to the
requirements of the
Yes
Trusted
Yes
No
l When this parameter is

set to No, the key
verification is not
trusted. After
receiving the key, the
NE rejects the clock
synchronization
service.
set to Yes, the key
verification is trusted.
After receiving the
key, the NE provides
the clock
synchronization
service.
l After receiving an
unknown or incorrect
key, the NE rejects the
clock synchronization
service. Hence, it is
set a trusted key only.
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

252

Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the License Management tab.
Parameters for Managing Licenses

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
This parameter displays the boards that need

to be supported by licenses.
License File Type
This parameter displays the license type

corresponding to each board.
Capacity
This parameter displays the capacity of each

board.
Loaded
This parameter displays whether the

corresponding license file is loaded to each
board.
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
Navigation Path
1.
On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2.
Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
.
then click
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

NE.
NE Type
OptiX RTN 950
This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
Operation Type
This parameter indicates the type of the

operation, such as loopback, and shutdown
of the laser.
Auto Disabling
Disabled
Enabled
This parameter specifies whether to

automatically disable the operations such as
loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

253

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Disabling
Time(min)
1 to 2880
This parameter specifies the time of

automatically disabling the operations such
as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
Before delivery, the

IP address of the NE
is set to 129.9.0.x.
The letter x indicates
the basic ID.
Gateway IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
255.255.0.0
In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set

according to the following rules:
l The IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway of the gateway NE should meet
the planning requirements of the
external DCN.
l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP
address must be in the same network
segment.
l The IP address of other NEs should be
set according to the NE ID. In this case,
the IP address of an NE should be set in
the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is,
if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address
should be set to 129.9.0.1.
Extended ID
1 to 254
l Do not change the extended ID when the

number of actual NEs does not exceed
the range permitted by the basic NE ID.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

254

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NSAP Address
This parameter is valid only when the OSI

over DCC solution is applied. This
parameter is used to set only the area ID of
an NSAP address. The other parts of the
NSAP address are automatically generated
by the NE.
Connection Mode
Common + Security
SSL
Common + Security
SSL
l Specifies the connection mode that the

gateway NE allows the NMS to use for
connecting to the gateway NE.
Common
Security SSL
l If the gateway NE has no special

security requirement for connection to
the NMS, Connection Mode can be set
to Common.
l If the gateway NE requests secure
connection to the NMS for preventing
information interception and cracking,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Security SSL.
l If NE communication security level
needs to be the same as NMS
communication security level,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Common + Security SSL.
l The default parameter value is
recommended unless the gateway NE
requires that the NMS use the SSL
connection mode.
l The parameter value takes effect only
when it is set for a gateway NE and the
gateway NE is connected to the NMS by
means of the IP protocol.
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2.
Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

255

Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter indicates the port that is

connected to the DCC channel.
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
It is recommended that you use the default

value, except for the following cases:
Disabled
l If the port is connected to the other ECC

subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party
network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
Channel
D1-D3
D4-D12
D1-D12
D1-D1
D1-D1 (for the PDH

radio whose
transmission
capacity is less than
16xE1)
D1-D3 (for other
cases)

l If the IP DCN or OSI over DCC solution
is adopted, Channel for the SDH line
ports is set to a value that is the same as
the value for third-party network.
l If the DCC transparent transmission
solution is adopted, the value of
Channel for the SDH line ports should
not conflict with the value that is set for
the third-party network.
DCC Resources
This parameter indicates the DCC

resources.
Communication
Status
This parameter indicates the

communication status.
Protocol Type
HWECC
HWECC

TCP/IP
l If the IP DCN solution is adopted,

Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
OSI
L2DCN
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,

Protocol Type is set to OSI.
l When the L2 DCN solution is used, set
Protocol Type to L2DCN.
IP Address
l IP Address is available only if Protocol

Type is set to TCP/IP.
l When the IP DCN solution is used and
the NE functions as an ABR, this
parameter specifies the interface IP
address of the non-backbone area port on
the ABR.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

256

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Subnet Mask
l Subnet Mask is available only if

Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
parameter specifies the subnet mask of
the non-backbone area port on the ABR.
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission

Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2.
Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
3.
Click Create.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Timeslot/
Porta
This parameter specifies the source timeslot

or port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

257

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Source Port
D1
l Only one overhead byte can be selected

each time.
D2
l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the

customized overhead bytes that are used
for transmitting asynchronous data
services.
D3
D4
D5
D6
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that

is used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC
channel.
D7
D8
D9
NOTE
Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports
transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
Sink Timeslot/
Porta
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
This parameter specifies the sink timeslot or

port.

258

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Sink Port
D1
l Only one overhead byte can be selected

each time.
D2
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that

is used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC
channel.
D3
D4
D5
D6
l Generally, Transparent Transmission

of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be
set to a value that is the same as or
different from the value in the case of
Transparent Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at Source Port.
D7
D8
D9
D10
NOTE
Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports
transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ECC Extended
Mode
Auto mode
Auto mode

value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Specified mode

259

Parameters for Setting the Server

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP
This parameter indicates the IP address of

the server.
Port
1601 to 1699
l This parameter is valid only when ECC

Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the server of the
extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE
that is close to the NMS functions as the
server.
l This parameter can be set to any value
from 1601 to 1699.
Parameters for Setting the Client

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Opposite IP
0.0.0.0
Port
1601 to 1699
l This parameter is valid only when ECC

Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
NE functions as the client of the
extended ECC. Except for the NE that
functions as the server, all other NEs that
use the extended ECC can function as the
client.
l Opposite IP and Port are respectively
set to the IP address of the server NE and
the specified port number.
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

260

Parameter for NE ECC Link Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination NE
This parameter specifies the sink NE of the

ECC connection.
Transfer NE
This parameter specifies the next transfer

NE and the direction of the ECC route.
Distance
l This parameter specifies the number of

NEs (excluding the source NE and sink
NE) through which the ECC route
passes, namely, the number of ECC
packet forwarding attempts. The value
can be set to a value that is greater than
the number of actual ECC packet
forwarding attempts. If the value is set to
a value that is less than the number of
actual ECC packet forwarding attempts,
however, the destination NE fails to be
accessed.
l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the
source NE is adjacent to the destination
NE.
Level
l This parameter indicates that multiple

ECC routes from the source NE to the
destination NE may be available. An
ECC route of a higher priority is selected
to transmit the packets to the destination
NE.
l If the ECC route is generated
automatically, the priority is 4.
l If the ECC route is added manually, the
priority is 5.
Mode
This parameter indicates the ECC routing

mode.
SCC No.
This parameter specifies the physical port

through which the ECC route passes. The
value of this parameter is automatically
assigned the NE.
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test

This topic describes the parameters that are used to test ECC availability.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

261

Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.
Ping Test Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Target NE
Specifies the NE for which a ping test will

be performed.
Packet Length
(Byte)
0-800
64
l Specifies the test packet length.
Packet Quantity
1-65535

take its default value.
3
l Specifies the number of test packets.

Sending Interval
(ms)
0-65535
l Specifies the test packet transmission

interval.
To Be Translated
(ms)
1-65535
1000
l Specifies the maximum time for test

packet to wait until being responded to.
Traceroute Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Target NE
Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test

will be performed.
To Be Translated
(ms)
0-65535
1000

Forwarding NEs
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
0-255
64
Specifies the number of NEs that test

packets will traverse during the forwarding
process.

262

A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route

Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Address
This parameter indicates the destination

address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask
This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.
Gateway

the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
Protocol
l DIRECT: indicates the route between

the local NE and an adjacent NE.
l STATIC: indicates the route that is
created manually.
l OSPF: indicates the route between the
local NE and a non-adjacent NE.
l RIP: indicates the route that is
discovered by the routing information
protocol.
l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is beyond the
OSPF domain.
l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is in a not so
stubby area (NSSA).
l A route can be deleted in the case of
STATIC only, but cannot be edited in
the other cases.
l Compared with a dynamic route, a static
route has a higher priority. If any conflict
occurs, the static route is preferred.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

263

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Interface
This parameter indicates the interface that is

used on the route. Interface is a concept
specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In
the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create
multiple types of interface, such as a
loopback interface (namely, the interface
whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet
interface, and PPP interface. Each interface
must have a unique interface name.
Metric
This parameter indicates the maximum

number of routers through which the
packets are transmitted. Metric is used to
indicate the overhead bytes that are
transmitted to the destination address. The
smaller the value, the less the overhead
bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same
destination address, a route whose overhead
is less is preferred to transmit the packets.
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route

Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the IP Route Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Address
This parameter specifies the destination

address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask
This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

264

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Gateway
This parameter specifies the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test

This topic describes the parameters that are used to test IP DCN availability.
Navigation Path
1.
Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.
Ping Test Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Target NE IP
Specifies the NE for which a ping test will

be performed.
Packet Length
(Byte)
0-800
64
l Specifies the test packet length.
Packet Quantity
1-65535

3
l Specifies the number of test packets.

Sending Interval
(ms)
0-65535
l Specifies the test packet transmission

interval.
To Be Translated
(ms)
1-65535
5000

Traceroute Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Target NE IP
Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test

will be performed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

265

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Hops
1-30
10
Specifies the number of hops which test

packets traverse during the packet
transmission process.
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter

Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Area
0.0.0.0
l If only an OSPF area is configured on an

NE, set this parameter according to the
l If multiple OSPF areas are configured on
an NE, this parameter takes its default
value 0.0.0.0.
DCC Hello Timer

(s)
1 to 255
10
l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello

packet timer for the DCC channel or
inband DCN.
l The Hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer to
transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

266

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
DCC Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
40
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

the dead time of a neighbor router for the
DCC channel or inband DCN.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should
be set to a value that is a minimum of
twice the value of DCC Hello Timer
(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
default value.
DCC
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535
l DCC Retransmission Timer(s)

specifies the interval for transmitting a
request through the DCC channel or
inband DCN to retransmit the link state
advertisement (LSA) packets.
default value.
DCC Delay(s)
1 to 3600
l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time

to transmit the LSA packets through the
DCC channel or inband DCN.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
DCC Delay(s).
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

267

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAN Hello Timer

(s)
1 to 255
10
l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello

packet timer at the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port.
l The hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
default value.
LAN Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
40
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

the dead time of a neighbor router at the
LAN interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of two
times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead
Time(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

268

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAN
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535
l LAN Retransmission Timer(s)

specifies the time for transmitting a
request for retransmission of the LSA
packets through the Ethernet network
default value.
LAN Delay(s)
1 to 3600
l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time

to transmit the LSA packets through the
Ethernet network management port or
NE cascading port.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
LAN Delay(s).
default value.
OSPF Status
Enabled
Enabled
Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is

enabled. If an NE uses only static routes
with OSPF disabled, set this parameter to
Disabled.
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the STUB

Area.
Disabled
STUB Area
Enabled
Disabled
l Set this parameter as required.

l A backbone area cannot be a STUB area.
NSSA Area
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the NSSA

Area.
l A backbone area cannot be an NSSA
area.
Direct route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the direct route

automatic flooding function is enabled.
l Direct route: the route detected by the
link layer protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

269

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Static route
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the static route

Disabled
l Static route: the route manually

configured by the network
administrator.
RIP route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the RIP route

l RIP route: the route detected by the RIP
protocol.
Default route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the default route

automatic flooding function is enabled
for ASBRs.
l Default OSPF routes are routes whose
destination addresses and subnet masks
are 0s.
l Set this parameter according to the
Router ID
The Router IP address is always the NE IP

address.
Opaque LSA of
External Network
Port
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether the Ethernet network

management port or NE cascading port
transmits Type-10 LSAs.
Disabled
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, the

Ethernet network management port or
NE cascading port transmits network
management information.
LAN Interface
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is

enabled for the Ethernet network
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
OSPF protocol is communicated with
other equipment through the Ethernet
network management port or NE
cascading port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

270

OSPF authentication parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Interface Type
l Displays the DCN port types that allow

the OSPF authentication key to be
specified.
l LAN indicates the Ethernet network
l DCC indicates the DCC channels or
inband DCN port.
none
Authentication
Type
none
MD5
l Specifies the OSPF authentication mode

for which a key needs to be set.
l If Authentication Type is MD5, a key
needs to be set for the MD5
authentication mode.
simple
l If Authentication Type is simple, a key

needs to be set for the simple
authentication mode.
l If Authentication Type is none, all
preset keys for the related port type are
cleared.
Authentication
Password
Specifies the OSPF authentication password

for each port type.
MD5 Key
1-255
MD5 Key is available only when

Authentication Type is MD5.
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Proxy ARP tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

271

Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Proxy ARP
Disabled
Disabled
l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the

same network segment but different
domains to communicate with each
other.
Enabled
l To realize communication between such

NEs, the source NE sends the ARP
broadcast packet to address the route to
the destination NE. The NE with the
proxy ARP function enabled checks the
routing table after sensing the ARP
broadcast packet. If the routing table
contains the destination address that the
ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE
returns an ARP spoofing packet, which
enables the NE that sends the ARP
broadcast packet to consider that the
MAC address of the NE that returns the
ARP spoofing packet is the MAC
address of the destination NE. In this
manner, the packet that is to be sent to
the destination NE is first sent to the NE
with the proxy ARP function enabled
and then forwarded to the destination
NE.
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas

This topic describes the parameters that are related to management of multiple OSPF areas.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack
2.
Click the Multi-OSPF Management tab.
Parameters Required for Configuring Multiple OSPF Areas

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
Displays the area ID.
Default Area
Displays whether an area is the default area.
Authentication
Type
none
none
MD5
l Specifies the OSPF authentication type

used by an area.
simple
l none indicates no authentication.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

272

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Automatic Route
Aggregation
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether automatic route

aggregation is enabled for an area.
Disabled
l The number of routes after automatic

route aggregation is the same as the
number of Networks.
Stub Type
Displays the STUB type of an area.
Network Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
Displays the IP addresses of the Networks

in an area.
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet masks of the Networks

in an area.
Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
Displays the IP address of the Network

where route aggregation is manually
enabled.
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask of the Network

where route aggregation is manually
enabled.
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding

OSPF Areas
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding OSFP areas.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

273

Parameters Required for Creating OSPF Areas

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
l Set the area ID of a new OSPF area

according to the planning information.
l An NE can be configured with a
maximum of four OSPF areas.
IP Address
l Set the IP addresses of the Networks in

an area according to planning
information.
l An area supports a maximum of four
Networks.
Subnet Mask
Set the subnet masks of the Networks in an

area according to planning information. A
subnet mask can contain a maximum of 30
bits.
Authentication
Type
none
none
Specifies the OSPF authentication type used

by an area according to planning
information.
MD5
simple
l none indicates no authentication.

l MD5 indicates that authentication is
performed based on the preset password,
with the password encrypted in MD5
mode.
l simple: indicates that authentication is
performed based on the preset password,
with the password not encrypted.
Enabled
Automatic Route
Aggregation
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether automatic route

aggregation is enabled for an area.
l The number of routes after automatic
route aggregation is the same as the
number of Networks.
STUB Type
NON-STUB
STUB
NSSA
NON-STUB
Set the STUB type of an area according to

l For the backbone area, this parameter
must be set to NON-STUB.
l For other areas, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to NON-STUB. If
required, this parameter can also be set
to STUB or NSSA.
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding

Routes to Be Manually Aggregated
This topic describes the parameters for adding routes to be manually aggregated.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

274

Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
In Manual Route Aggregation, click Add.
Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID Address
Specifies the IP address of the Network

where routes need to be aggregated
manually.
Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the Network

where routes need to be aggregated
manually.
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting

This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
Port OSPF Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the ports that allow OSPF

parameters to be set.
Path Type
Displays the current DCC channel type.
OSPF Status
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.

Disabled
Opaque LSA of
External Network
Port
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether DCC channels support

Opaque LSAs.
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

275

Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
2.
Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE

NE.
Configuration Role
ES
L1
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set

to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area. It uses a route in the
local area only and accesses the other
area by distributing the default route of
the nearest L2 NE.
L1
L2
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set

to L2 can function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area and can use a route
in the backbone area. The backbone area
is a collection that is formed by
consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE
of all the roles must be consecutive
(connected to each other).
NOTE
Configuration Role cannot be set to ES.
Current Role
This parameter indicates the current role.
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Routing Table tab.
Parameters for Link Adjacency Table

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter indicates the port used for

OSI communication.
Data Link Layer
This parameter indicates the protocol that is

used at the data link layer.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

276

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Adjacency No.
l This parameter specifies the identifier of

the adjacency that is set up by two NEs
through the OSI protocol. One adjacency
number corresponds to an OSI
adjacency.
l The value is dynamically allocated by
the NE.
Adjacency Type
This parameter indicates the type of the

adjacency.
Adjacency State
This parameter indicates the state of the

adjacency.
Peer End Area ID
This parameter indicates the area ID that is

contained in the NSAP address of the
opposite NE.
Peer End System

ID
This parameter indicates the system ID of

the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID
is the MAC address.
Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing Tables

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination SYSID
This parameter indicates the system ID of

the destination NE. Generally, the system
ID is the MAC address.
Metric
This parameter indicates the number of hops

that reach the destination NE or destination
area.
Adjacency No.1
This parameter indicates the number of the

adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
Adjacency No.2

adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

277

Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote IP Address

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
LAPD Actor
User
User
l This parameter specifies the LAPD

actor.
Network
l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,

they can perform the LAPD negotiation
only when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
Efficient LAPD
Enable
This parameter indicates whether the

current LAPD is enabled.
Configurable
LAPD Enable
Enabled
Enabled
This parameter specifies whether the LAPD

is enabled.
Disabled
LAPD Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote IP Address

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
L2 Wait Time to
Retry(s)
1 to 20
l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time

to Retry(s).
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the
interval for retransmitting packets at the
LAPD link layer.
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be
set according to the network situation. If
the network is in good situation, L2 Wait
Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller
value. Otherwise, it is recommended that
you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a
greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

278

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 Retry Times
2 to 6
l This parameter specifies L2 Retry

Times.
l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum
number of packet retransmission
attempts at the LAPD link layer.
l L2 Retry Times needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L2 Retry
Times can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.
default value.
L3 Hello Timer(s)
1 to 100
l This parameter specifies L3 Hello

Timer(s).
l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello
packet timer at the LAPD link network
layer. It is used for periodical
transmission of the Hello packets.
l The Hello timer determines the interval
for transmitting the Hello packets once.
L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hello
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

279

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L3 ES Timer(s)
1 to 200
50
l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer

(s).
l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information on the ES route.
l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 ES
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
L3 IS Timer(s)
1 to 200
10
l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer

(s).
l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information through the L1/L2 router.
l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network
is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can
be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 IS Timer
(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

280

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L3 Hold Timer(s)
2 to 63
l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer

(s).
l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold
timer at the LAPD link network layer.
l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hold
Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.
set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.
default value.
1 to 63
COST
20
l This parameter specifies COST.

l COST indicates the overhead value of
the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the
OSI tunnel.
l The overhead value determines whether
this link is perverted. If the overhead
value is smaller, this link has a higher
priority to be selected.
l This parameter needs to set according to
the planning information.
A.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters

This topic describes the OSI port parameters.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose
Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Parameters tab.
OSI port parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAPD Role
User
User
l This parameter is available only when

Protocol Type is OSI.
Network
l Set LAPD Role to User at one end of a

DCC and to Network at the other end of
the DCC.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

281

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAPD MTU
This parameter displays the maximum

LAPD packet length.
A.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2.
Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
Parameters for Bandwidth Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Ethernet Board
VLAN ID
2 to 4094
4094
l The equipment on the traditional DCN

can be connected to the NMS through the
SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 950 can
also be connected to the NMS through an
Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is
used to carry the network management
information, the NE differentiates the
network management information and
Ethernet service information according
to the VLAN ID.
l If the default VLAN ID of the inband
DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the
service, the Ethernet Board VLAN ID
of the inband DCN can be changed
manually. The same VLAN ID must be,
however, is used on the network-wide
inband DCN.
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
64 to 1000
512
Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth

for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet
link.
E1 Port
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this

parameter.
Tunnel Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)

parameter.
IF Port Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)
64 to 1000
512
IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the

bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on
the radio link.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

282

A.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2.
Click the Port Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
This parameter indicates the port name.
Enabled Status
Enabled
Enabled
l Enabled Status specifies the enabling

status of the port.
Disabled
l The network management information

can be transmitted over the inband DCN
when the DCN function is enabled for
the ports at both ends of a link.
IP
Protocol Type
IP
HWECC
l If Protocol Type is set to different

values for two interconnected sets of
equipment, equipment interconnection
fails. Therefore, set Protocol Type to the
same value for both ends of a link.
L2DCN
IP Address
l Specifies the DCN protocol used by the

inband DCN.

Protocol Type is set to IP.
parameter specifies the interface IP
address of the non-backbone area port on
the ABR.
Subnet Mask

Protocol Type is set to IP.
parameter specifies the subnet mask of
the non-backbone area port on the ABR.
A.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control

This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

283

Navigation Path
l
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
Click the Access Control tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
Displays the Ethernet ports that support this

function.
Enabled Status
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies the enabling status of the port.
Enabled
l If the Enabled Status is set to

Enabled, this port can be used to support
access of the management information
from the NMS.
l If the Enabled Status is set to
Disabled, this port cannot be used to
support access of the management
information from the NMS.
IP Address
0.0.0.0
Specifies the IP address of the port.
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0
Specifies the submask of the port.
A.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control

This topic describes the parameters for controlling the priority of inband DCN packets.
Navigation Path
l
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
Click the Packet Control tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Type
Displays the packet type for which the

packet priority can be manually specified.
Supported
Application
This parameter cannot be specified

manually.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

284

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Priority
CS6
CS6 (Packet Type

is VLAN)
Specifies the PHB service class of inband

DCN packets.
EF
BE (Packet Type is
DSCP)
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
A.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management

This section describes the parameters that are related to L2 DCN management.
Navigation Path
l
Communication > L2DCN Management from the Function Tree.
Click Query.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Config Status
Auto
Auto
When the OptiX RTN 950 uses the L2 DCN

solution, the RSTP protocol can be used to
prevent L2 forwarding loops. It is
recommended that the RSTP protocol uses
its default enable/disable mode Auto for the
OptiX RTN 950 NE level. That is, the RSTP
protocol is automatically enabled/disabled
depending on the enable/disable status of
the L2 DCN function over IF ports.
l Real Status is queried to be Disabled in

the following scenarios:
Disabled
Real Status
Disabled
Enabled
Config Status is set to Disabled.

When Config Status is set to Auto,
the L2 DCN function is disabled for
all IF ports on the NE.
l When Config Status is set to Auto, the
L2 DCN function is enabled for at least
one IF port on the NE. In this case, the
RSTP protocol will automatically work.
At this time, the queried Real Status is
Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

285

A.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Ethernet
Access
Selected
After The First Network Port is set to

Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
PORT
This parameter displays the NMS port and

the NE cascading port on the system control,
switching, and timing board.
Work Mode
adapt
This parameter specifies the working modes

of the NMS port and the NE cascading port
on the system control, switching, and timing
board.
This parameter displays the working modes

of the NMS port and the NE cascading port
on the system control, switching, and timing
board.
Deselected
10M Half_Duplex
10M Full_Duplex
100M Half_Duplex
100M Full_Duplex
Actual Work Mode
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Specifies whether the Ethernet network

management port or NE cascading port is
enabled.
Disabled
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Serial Port

Access
Selected
Selected
After Enable Serial Port Access is

selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.
Access Command
Line
Selected
Deselected
If Access Command Line is selected, the

serial interface can be used to access the
command line terminal.
Access NM
Selected
Deselected
If Access NM is selected, the serial interface

can be used to access the NMS.
Deselected
Deselected
Deselected
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

286

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Baud Rate
1200
9600
l This parameter specifies the data

transmission rate in the communications
through serial ports.
2400
4800

rate of the serial port at the opposite end,
and the rates at both ends must be the
same.
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
2.
Close the dialog box.
Parameters for NE user management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
Displays the current NE

name.
NE User
Displays the registered NE

user name.
User Level
Displays the registered NE

user level.
NE User Flag
Displays whether a
registered NE user is
logged in.
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

287

Navigation Path
1.
Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful.
2.
Close the dialog box.
3.
Click Add.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE User
Specifies the name of a

registered NE user.
NOTE
The name of an NE cannot
contain any space or
Chinese characters.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

288

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
User Level
Monitor Level
Monitor Level
l A Debug Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities, and has the
right to run debugging
commands.
Operation Level
Maintenance Level
System Level
Debug Level
l A System Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities.
l A Maintenance
Level NE user has
some security
authorities, some
configuration
authorities, the
communication setting
authority, and the log
management
authority.
l An Operation Level
NE user has all fault
performance
authorities, some
security authorities,
and some
configuration
authorities.
l A Monitor Level NE
user has the right to use
all query commands, to
log in, to log out, and to
change its own
password.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

289

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE User Flag
LCT NE User
LCT NE User
l Specifies the NE user

flag.
EMS NE User
l LCT NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the U2000 Local Craft
Terminal (U2000
LCT).
CMD NE User
General NE User
l EMS NE User
NE management on
the U2000.
l CMD NE User
NE management on
the CMD.
l General NE User
all NMS types.
Detailed Description
Describes a configured
NE user.
New Password
l Specifies the password

for a new NE user.
Confirm Password
Enter the same value as

New Password.
Immediate Password
Change
Yes
Yes
Specifies whether the

password of a registered
NE user can be changed.
No
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Parameters for LCT Access Control

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE

NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

290

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LCT Access
Control Switch
Access Allowed
Access Allowed
l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this

case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE does not
check the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.
Disable Access
l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In

this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
l When both the LCT user and NMS user
log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.
A.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS configuration.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE
RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Function
Server ID
Server Type
Specifies the desired RADIUS function, the

authentication server ID, and the server type.
l Function, Server ID, and Server Type are
associated with the servers that are
configured in Creating a RADIUS Server
or a RADIUS Proxy Server.
l Select the desired RADIUS server or proxy
server according to planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

291

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Server Status
Active
Active
Specifies the active/standby status of the

RADIUS server or proxy server.
Standby
l If no standby server is required, set Server

Status to Active.
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports one active
server and one standby server. If both the
active and standby servers are configured,
set Server Status of the active server to
Active and Server Status of the standby
server to Standby.
-
Shared Key
Specifies the key for communication between

an NE and the RADIUS server.
l Set Shared Key to the same value on the
NE and on the RADIUS server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server, Shared
Key is not available.
Interval of Packet
Transmission
3-10
Packet
Retransmission
Attempts
1-5
Specifies the number of packet retransmission

attempts and the interval between the attempts.
l If an NE does not receive the response from
the RADIUS server within a specific
period, the NE re-transmits the
authentication request for the configured
attempt times and at the configured
interval.
l It is recommended that Interval of Packet
Transmission and Packet
Retransmission Attempts take their
default values.
A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS server configuration.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the RADIUS Server Configuration tab.

The RADIUS Server Information dialog box is displayed.
3.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Click New.

292

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Function
Authentication
Authentication
Accounting
Specifies the RADIUS function that an NE

needs to use.
Authentication +
Accounting
l For NE RADIUS authentication, select

Authentication.
l For both NE RADIUS authentication and
NE usage accounting, set this parameter to
Authentication + Accounting or
Accounting (when the Authentication
function has been enabled).
RADIUS Server
Server Type
RADIUS Server
Proxy Server
Specifies the server type used for NE RADIUS

authentication.
l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication
in the NAS mode or functions as a proxy
server, set Server Type to RADIUS
Server.
in the proxy NAS mode, set Server Type
to Proxy Server.
IP Address
Server ID
NE ID
IP Address
Specifies the address of the server that is used

for NE RADIUS authentication.
l If Server Type is RADIUS Server, set
Server ID to IP Address and specify the
IP address of the RADIUS server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server, it is
recommended that you set Server ID to
NE ID and set the gateway NE as the proxy
server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server and there
is no IP route between the NE and the proxy
server, Server ID can be set to only NE
ID. If Server Type is Proxy Server and
there is an IP route between the NE and the
proxy server, Server ID can be set to NE
ID or IP Address.
A.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function

This topic describes the parameters that are required for enabling/disabling the RADIUS
function.
Navigation Path
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

293

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
Displays the NE name.
RADIUS Client
Open
Close
Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be

a RADIUS client. The RADIUS function can
be enabled on an NE only if RADIUS Client
is set to Open for the NE.
Close
Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be

a proxy server.
Close
Proxy Server
Open
Close
l If an NE needs to function as a proxy

server, set Proxy Server to Open for the
NE.
l Proxy Server can be set to Open only if
RADIUS Client is set to Open.
in the proxy NAS mode, set Proxy
Server to Close.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC

Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the XPIC tab.
3.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

294

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel
Bandwidth
ISX2:
l This parameter specifies the channel

spacing when the XPIC function is
enabled.
7M
14M
l When this parameter is set to 56M or

40M, the high-power ODU must be
used.
28M
40M
56M
IFX2:
7M
14M
28M
56M
Polarization
Direction-V
l This parameter indicates the polarization

direction of a radio link.
l It is recommended that you install the
two XPIC IF boards that form an XPIC
workgroup in the slots that are at the
same layer or in the same column, and
set the IF port on the XPIC IF board that
has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V
and the IF port on the other XPIC IF
board to Link ID-H.
1 to 4094
l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.

l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link
and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
same value at both ends of a link and
Link ID-H must also be set to the same
value at both ends of a link.
Polarization
Direction-H
Link ID-V
Link ID-H
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

295

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Power
(dBm)
l This parameter specifies the transmit

power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
l This parameter specifies the maximum

transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
l This parameter indicates the channel

central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

296

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
l This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the transmit frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the transmit frequency is one
T/R spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute
l When this parameter is set to mute, the

ODU does not transmit microwave
signals but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute,
the ODU normally transmits and
receives microwave signals.
l In normal cases, Transmission Status is
set to unmute.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

297

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the

ATPC function is enabled.
Enabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if

the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
-45.0
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-70.0
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
l The central value between the ATPC

upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold
and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status is set to
Disabled.

298

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Disabled

ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
Enabled

equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
2.
Click the XPIC tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.
Polarization
Direction-V
This parameter indicates the IF port to which

the polarization direction V corresponds.
Link ID-V
This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction V
corresponds.
Polarization
Direction-H

the polarization direction H corresponds.
Link ID-H
This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction H
corresponds.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

299

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel
Bandwidth
ISX2:
l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the

channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.
7M
14M
l When this parameter is set to 56M or

40M, the high-power ODU must be
used.
28M
40M
56M

IFX2:
7M
14M
28M
56M
Power to Be
Received -V(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l This parameter is used to set the

expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

300

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received -H(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l This parameter is used to set the

expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
l This parameter specifies the maximum

modulation module.
exceed this value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

301

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Power
(dBm)
l This parameter indicates or specifies the

exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)

transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
to the planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

302

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)

spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
radio link.
Transmission
Status
unmute
unmute
mute

transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.
Polarization
direction

the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

303

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to

Disabled, the radio link uses only the
specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.
Enabled

Enabled, the radio link uses the
corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
This parameter specifies the highest-gain

modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM

Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
This parameter specifies the highest-gain

supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

304

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
This parameter specifies the modulation

scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
16QAM
32QAM

Enable Status is set to Disabled.
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Transmit-End
Modulation Mode
Displays the modulation mode at the

transmit end.
Receive-End
Modulation Mode
Displays the modulation mode at the receive

end.
Parameters for ATPC Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled

Enabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if

the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold.
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
l Set the central value between the ATPC


305

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
threshold to a value for the expected

receive power.
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled

enabled.
Enabled

ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

306


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time.

l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Enabled
SD enable
Enabled
Disabled

signal degradation switching function of
N+1 protection is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the signal degradation condition is
considered as a trigger condition of
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Select Mapping
Direction
Work Unit
Work Unit
l This parameter specifies the mapping

direction of N+1 protection.
Protection Unit

Select Mapping
Way
l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF

ports as Work Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
Mapped Board
This parameter indicates the working unit

and protection unit that have been set.
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

307

Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection Group Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID
This parameter indicates the ID of the

protection group.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720

WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
SD Enable
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies

whether the SD switching function of N
+1 protection is enabled.
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection
switching.
Protocol Status
This parameter indicates the status of the

switching control protocol.
Protection Unit Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Unit
This parameter indicates the protection unit.
Line
This parameter indicates the information

about the working board or protection
board.
Switching Status
This parameter indicates the switching state.
Protected Unit
This parameter indicates the protected unit.
Remote/Local End
Indication
This parameter indicates the local end or

remote end.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

308

A.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
2.
Click Create.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
HSB
HSB
l This parameter specifies the working

mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
FD
SD
l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the

equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby
configuration for the IF board and ODU
at both ends of each hop of a radio link
to realize the protection.
l When Working Mode is set to FD, the
system uses two channels that have a
frequency spacing between them, to
transmit and receive the same signal. The
remote end selects signals from the two
received signals. With FD protection, the
impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l When Working Mode is set to SD, the
system uses two antennas that have a
space distance between them, to receive
the same signal. The equipment selects
signals from the two received signals.
With SD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
network plan.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

309

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
l This parameter specifies the revertive

mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
Non-Revertive
l When Revertive Mode is set to

Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal. It is recommended
that you set this parameter to Revertive
Mode.
l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time.

set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode. It is recommended that you use
the default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

310

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates whether the

reverse switching function is enabled.
Disabled
l When both the main IF board and the

standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
Enable Reverse Switching at the source
end is set to Enabled and the reverse
switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1
protection switching occurs at the source
end.
l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only
when Working Mode is set to HSB or
SD.
l Generally, if Working Mode is set to
HSB, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Disabled; if Working Mode is set to
SD, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Enabled.
Working Board
This parameter specifies the working board

of the protection group.
Protection Board
This parameter specifies the protection

board of the protection group.
Alarm Report
Mode
Only board alarms
Only board alarms
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to

Only board alarms, only IF board
alarms are reported.
Only protection
group alarms
Protection group
and board alarms

Only protection group alarms, alarms
are reported if a protection group fails or
degrades and suppress IF board alarms
and radio link alarms.
Protection group and board alarms,
IF board alarms and protection group
l It is recommended that you set Alarm
Report Mode to Only protection
group alarms. In this case, protection
group alarms are reported to indicate
radio link faults.
NOTE
The faulty board reports related fault alarms
regardless of parameter settings.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

311

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Anti-jitter Time(s)
0 to 600
300
l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,

a protection group does not report an
alarm immediately after it is degraded,
but reports the alarm after the specified
anti-jitter time expires.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time
(s) take its default value.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable
Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID

protection group.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

312

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
HSB
l This parameter indicates the working

mode of the created IF 1+1 protection
group.
FD
SD
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a

1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive
the same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD
protection, the impact of the fading on
signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Mode

revertive mode of the protection group.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the
parameter to Revertive Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

313

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720

WTR time.
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
default value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Disabled

whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
NE Switching
Status
l This parameter indicates the switching

state on the equipment side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Channel Switching
Status
l This parameter indicates the switching

state on the channel side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Active Port of
Device
This parameter indicates the current

working board on the equipment side.
Active Port of
Channel

working board on the channel side.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

314

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Alarm Report
Mode
Only board alarms

Only board alarms, only IF board
Only Protection
group alarms

Only protection group alarms, alarms
are reported if a protection group fails or
degrades and suppress IF board alarms
and radio link alarms.
Protection group
and board alarms

Protection group and board alarms, IF
board alarms and protection group
l It is recommended that you set Alarm
Report Mode to Only protection group
alarms. In this case, protection group
alarms are reported to indicate radio link
faults.
NOTE
The faulty board reports related fault alarms
regardless of parameter settings.
Anti-jitter Time
0 to 600
l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,

a protection group does not report an
alarm immediately after it is degraded,
but reports the alarm after the specified
anti-jitter time expires.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time
(s) take its default value.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio hop.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Unit
This parameter indicates the working board

and protection board.
Slot Mapping
Relation
This parameter indicates the names and

ports of the working board and protection
board.
Working Status of
Device
This parameter indicates the working state

on the equipment side.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

315

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Signal Status of
Channel

link signal.
A.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA

Group
This topic describes the parameters for creating a PLA group.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters for Creating a PLA group

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PLA ID
1 to 3
This parameter specifies the ID of a PLA

group.
Main Board
This parameter specifies the main IF board

in a PLA group.
Main Port
This parameter specifies the main port in a

PLA group.
Board
This parameter specifies the slave IF board

in a PLA group.
Port
This parameter specifies the slave port in a

PLA group.
Selected Slave
Ports
This parameter displays the slave IF board

and slave port that have been selected.
A.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA

This topic describes PLA parameters.
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.

316

PLA Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PLA ID
This parameter displays the ID of a PLA

group.
Main Board
This parameter displays the main IF board

in a PLA group.
Main Port
This parameter displays the main port in a

PLA group.
Hardware Status
of Main Port
This parameter displays whether the main IF

board in a PLA group is functional.
Link Status of
Main Port
This parameter displays whether the main

link in a PLA group is functional.
Work Status of
Main Port
This parameter displays the working status

of the main port in a PLA group.
Minimum Active
Links
This parameter specifies the minimum

number of available links in a PLA group
and helps to trigger ERPS switching even if
not all members in the PLA group fail
For example, if you set Minimum Active
Links to 2, ERPS switching is triggered
when either PLA member link fails.
Slave Board
This parameter displays the slave IF board

in a PLA group.
Slave Port
This parameter displays the slave port in a

PLA group.
Hardware Status
of Slave Port
This parameter displays whether the slave IF

board in a PLA group is functional.
Link Status of
Slave Port
This parameter displays whether the slave

link in a PLA group is functional.
Work Status of
Slave Port
This parameter displays the working status

of the slave port in a PLA group.
A.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
2.
Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

317

Parameters for Configuring the IF

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Work Mode
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK

work mode of the radio link in "work
mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K

network plan. The work modes of the IF
boards at the two ends of a radio link
must be the same.
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
NOTE
The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
Link ID
1 to 4094
l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of

a radio link. As the identifier of a radio
link, this parameter is used to prevent
incorrect connections of radio links
between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to
the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do
not match.
l Link ID is set according to the network
plan. Each radio link of an NE should
have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at
both ends of a radio link should be the
same.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

318

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Received Link ID
l This parameter indicates the received ID

of the radio link.
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.
IF Service Type
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH)
l Displays or specifies the type of services

carried by the IF board.
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native E1 services, set this parameter to
Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
SDH

Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
3.5M
7M
14M
28M
IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the

channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
network plan.
NOTE
40M
l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1

board.
56M
l The IFU2 board does not support the value

40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
40M.
l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M
only for the ISU2 board.
AM Mode
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX

RTN 950.

319

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled

Enabled

l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M
for the ISU2 board, the AM function is
unavailable and AM Enable Status
must be set to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
l This parameter is valid only when AM

64QAM
128QAM
NOTE
256QAM
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
l This parameter specifies the modulation

transmission.
QPSK

l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order
supports. This parameter is set according
to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

320

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
QPSK

16QAM
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM

Capacity specifies the highest-order
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
NOTE
STM-1 Capacity
l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF

board.
l This parameter is available only when IF
Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support
this parameter.
Guarantee E1
Capacity
l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,

this parameter needs to be set according
to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,
and the actually transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
according to IF Channel Bandwidth,
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

321

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guarantee E1
Capacity Range
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF

board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
Displays the data service bandwidth of the

IF board.
Enable E1 Priority
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether to

enable the E1 priority function.
Enabled

NOTE
Full E1 Capacity

transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
NOTE
Full E1 Capacity
Range
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

board in full capacity modulation mode.

322

Parameters for Configuring the RF

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Frequency
(MHz)

the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
channel spacing.
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
to the network plan.
Range of TX
Frequency(MHz)
l This parameter indicates the range of the

transmit frequency of the ODU.
l The Range of Frequency(MHz)
depends on the specifications of the
ODU.
Actual TX
Frequency(MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual transmit

frequency of the ODU.
Actual RX
Frequency(MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual receive

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

323

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
l This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
This parameter indicates the actual T/R

spacing of the ODU.

324

Parameters for Configuring the Power

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Power(dBm)

exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l This parameter cannot take a value
greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
Range of TX
Power(dBm)
This parameter indicates the range of the

transmit power of the ODU.
Actual TX Power
(dBm)
l This parameter indicates the actual

l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

325

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to

set the expected receive power of the
ODU and is mainly used in the antenna
alignment stage. After this parameter is
set, the NE automatically enables the
antenna misalignment indicating
function.
indicating function is enabled, When the
antenna non-alignment indication
function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the
power expected to be received, the ODU
indicator on the IF board connected to
the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300
ms off), indicating that the antenna is not
aligned.
l When Power to Be Received(dBm)
takes the default value (-10.0), the
function is disabled.
network plan.
Actual RX Power
(dBm)

power of the ODU.
TX Status
Unmute
Unmute

Mute
l When this parameter is set to Mute, the

transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l When this parameter is set to Unmute,
the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set TX Status to unmute.
Actual TX Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

status of the ODU.

326

Equipment Information
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frequency(GHz)
This parameter indicates the frequency band

where the ODU operates.
Equip Type
l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.
Station Type

ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Produce SN
This parameter indicates the manufacturing

serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
Transmission
Power Level
This parameter indicates the level of the

output power of the ODU.
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

327


Parameter
Value Range
Default
Value
Description
Protection Type
1+1 Protection
1+1 Protection
l This parameter specifies the

protection type of the linear
MSP group.
1:N Protection
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP,

one working channel and one
protection channel are
required. When the working
channel fails, the service is
switched from the working
channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP,
N working channels and one
protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working
channels and extra services
are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one
working channel fails, the
services are switched from
this working channel to the
protection channel, and the
extra services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be
transmitted or several
working channels are
required, select 1:N
Protection.
according to the planning
information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

328

Parameter
Value Range
Default
Value
Description
Switching Mode
Single-Ended
Switching
Single-Ended
Switching (1
+1 Protection)

switching mode of the linear
MSP.
Dual-Ended
Switching (1:N
Protection)
l In single-ended mode, the

switching occurs only at one
end and the state of the other
end remains unchanged.
Dual-Ended
Switching
l In dual-ended mode, the

switching occurs at both ends
at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to
1:N Protection, Switching
Mode can be set to DualEnded Switching only.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive
(1+1
Protection)

revertive mode of the linear
MSP.
Revertive (1:N
Protection)
l When this parameter is set to

Revertive, the NE that is in
the switching state releases
the switching and enables the
former working channel to
return to the normal state
some time after the former
working channel is restored to
normal.
Non-Revertive, the NE that
is in the switching state keeps
the current state unchanged
unless another switching
occurs even though the
former working channel is
restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you
set this parameter to
Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to
1:N Protection, Revertive
Mode can be set to
Revertive only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

329

Parameter
Value Range
Default
Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600

WTR time.
l When the time after the
former working channel is
restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive
switching occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s)
only when Revertive Mode
is set to Revertive.
use the default value.
SD Enable
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or

specifies whether the
switching at the SD alarm of
the linear MSP is enabled.
Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is
considered as a switching
condition.
Enabled.
Protocol Type
New Protocol
New Protocol
Restructure
Protocol
l The new protocol is

supported at the early stage,
and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol
optimizes the new protocol
and provides better measures
to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new
protocol runs in a better
manner.
l The new protocol is more
mature, and the restructure
protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended
that you use the new protocol.
l You must ensure that the
interconnected NEs run the
protocols of the same type.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

330


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Select Mapping
Direction
West Working Unit
West Working Unit
This parameter specifies the mapping

direction of the linear MSP.
Select Mapping
Mode
l This parameter specifies the mapping

board and port in the mapping direction.
West Protection
Unit
l If the protection type is set to 1+1

Protection, only one line port can be
mapped as West Working Unit.
l Only one line port can be mapped as
West Protection Unit.
l The line port mapped as West
Protection Unit and the line port
mapped as West Working Unit should
be configured for different boards if
possible.
-
Mapped Board
This parameter indicates the preset slot

mapping relations, including the mapping
direction and the corresponding mapping
mode.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID

protection group.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

331

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
l This parameter indicates the protection

type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched
from the working channel to the
protection channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working channels and
extra services are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one working
channel fails, the services are switched
from this working channel to the
protection channel, and the extra
services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted
or several working channels are
required, select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode
Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching

switching mode of the linear MSP.
l In single-ended mode, the switching
occurs only at one end and the state of
the other end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the switching
occurs at both ends at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

332

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive

revertive mode of the linear MSP.
Revertive

Revertive, the NE that is in the
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal.
l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the
parameter to Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720

WTR time.
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
default value.
SD Enable
Enabled
Disabled

whether the reverse switching function
is enabled.
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

333

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
New Protocol
l The new protocol is supported at the

early stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
Restructure Protocol
l The restructure protocol optimizes the

new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
l The new protocol is more mature, and
the restructure protocol complies with
the standard. It is recommended that you
use the new protocol.
Protocol Status
This parameter indicates the protocol status

of the linear MSP.
Protection Subnet
This parameter displays the protection

subnet where the MS protection is
configured.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Unit
This parameter indicates that which of the

units, namely, the west protection unit or the
west working unit, is currently in the
protection status.
West Line
This parameter indicates the west protection

unit and the west working unit of the linear
MSP.
West Switching
Status
This parameter indicates the switching

status of the line.
Protected Unit
This parameter indicates the working

channel protected by the current protection
channel.
Remote/Local End
Indication
When Switching Mode is set to DualEnded Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

334

A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.
3.
Click Create.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
VC12
l This parameter specifies the level of the

service to be created.
VC3
l If the service is an E1 service or a data

service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
VC4
l If the service is a data service that is

bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Unidirectional

Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to
the service sink.
Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to
the service sink and the crossconnections from the service sink to the
service source.
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Slot
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
This parameter specifies the slot of the

service source.

335

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VC4

the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
l This parameter indicates the timeslot

range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
network plan.
Sink Slot

service sink.
Sink VC4

the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
l This parameter specifies the timeslot

range of the service sink.
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
network plan.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

336

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
E1 Priority
High
l This parameter specifies the priority of

an E1 service. This parameter is
available only if the E1 priority function
is enabled for the ports configured in the
cross-connections.
Low
None
l If E1 Priority is set to High,

transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Yes
Activate
Immediately
Yes
No

immediately activate the configured
service.
l To immediately deliver the configured
SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP

Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.
3.
Click Create SNCP Service.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
This parameter indicates that the type of the

service to be created is SNCP.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

337

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional

Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the SNCP service
source to the SNCP service sink.
Unidirectional

Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the SNCP service
source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the SNCP service sink
to the service source.
Level
VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12
l This parameter specifies the level of the

SCNP service to be created.
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

338

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100
l This parameter specifies the duration of

the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set
to prevent SNCP protection switching,
when SNCP works with N+1 protection.
Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer
than the switching time of any protection
mode that works with SNCP. Generally,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms.
l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD,
trigger conditions for HSM switching or
SNCP switching trigger HSM switching
but do not trigger SNCP switching.
Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does
not need to be set in this case.
l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection is much longer than that of
SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service
interruptions, it is recommended that you
do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when
SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive

switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

339

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the WTR time.

occurs.
default value.
Source Slot

service source.
Source VC4

source is located.
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Sink Slot

service sink.
Sink VC4

is located.
board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

340

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Selected
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Deselected
Deselected
l After the Configure SNCP Tangent

Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
you do not select this checkbox.
Selected
Activate
Immediately
Deselected
Selected

SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service

Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Optional: If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in CrossConnection. Right-click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from
the shortcut menu.
3.
Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to
SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

341


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
This parameter indicates that the type of the

service to be created is SNCP.
Direction
Unidirectional
This parameter indicates the direction of the

SNCP service.
Level
l This parameter indicates the level of the

SNCP service.
channels, the parameter value is VC12.
bound with VC-3 channels, the
parameter value is VC3.
through the NE, the parameter value is
VC4.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

342

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100

the hold-off time.
protection.
time to 0.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive

switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

343

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the WTR time.

occurs.
default value.
Source Slot

service source.
Source VC4

source is located.
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Sink Slot

service sink.
Sink VC4

is located.
board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

344

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring

checkbox is selected, you can quickly
configure the SNCP service for the SNCP
ring tangent point.
Activate
Immediately
l This parameter indicates whether to

SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

345

Cross-Connection Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12

service.
VC3

channels, VC12 is displayed.
VC4

bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot
This parameter indicates the slot of the

service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path
This parameter indicates the timeslot or

timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot

source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path

timeslot range of the service sink.
E1 Priority
High

an E1 service. This parameter is
available only if the E1 priority function
is enabled for the ports configured in the
cross-connections.
Low
None
l If E1 Priority is set to High,

transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Activation Status
Yes
This parameter indicates whether to activate

the service.
No
Bound Group
Number

parameter.
Lockout Status

parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

346

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Trail Name

parameter.
Schedule No.

parameter.
Parameters for Automatically Created Cross-Connections

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12

service.
VC3

VC4

displayed.
Source Slot

service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path

timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot

source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path

timeslot range of the service sink.
Lockout Status

parameter.
Trail Name

parameter.
Schedule No.

parameter.
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

347

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
This parameter indicates the service

protection type of the protection group.
Source
This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service source and protection
service source of the protection group are
located.
Sink
This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service sink and protection
service sink of the protection group are
located.
Level
VC12

service.
VC3

VC4

displayed.
Current Status

switching mode and switching status of the
services of the protection group.
Revertive Mode
Revertive

revertive mode of the service.
Non-Revertive
l This parameter determines whether to

switch the service from the protection
channel to the original working channel
after the fault is rectified.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

348

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720

WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100

the hold-off time.
protection.
time to 0.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

349

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Initiation
Condition
Null

conditions that trigger the protection
switching of the service.
l After being selected as SD Initiation
Condition, an alarm becomes a
condition for triggering switching of an
SNCP service.
l It is recommended that you set SD
Initiation Condition to the same
condition for Working Service and
Protection Service.
l The protection switching conditions in
SD Initiation Condition are optional
values not included in the default values,
and they are set according to the planning
information.
Trail Status

working service and protection service of
the protection group.
Service Grouping

parameter.
Group Type

parameter.
Active Channel

working service or protection service is
currently received by the protection group.
Trail Name
Displays the trail name.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion

This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > Triggered
Alarm Insertion from the Function Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

350


Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the slot ID of the IF board and the

ID of the IF port.
High Channel
Displays the higher order path number of the

IF board.
Low Channel
Displays the lower order path number of the

IF board.
Insert TU_AIS to
E1_AIS
Enable
Auto
l When Insert TU_AIS to E1_AIS is

Auto, the TU_AIS is automatically
inserted after the E1_AIS is detected in
the E1 channel.
Disable
Auto
l Generally, it is recommended that Auto

A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface
boards.
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General Attributes tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the ID of a
service port.
Name
Specifies or displays the

customized port name.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

351

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Mode
Layer 1
Layer 2
l Specifies the working

mode of a PDH port.
Layer 2

set to Layer 1, the port
can transmit TDM
signals. A port can
transmit CES and
serial services only if
Layer 1.
set to Layer 2, the port
can transmit ATM
signals.
Encapsulation Type
l Displays
Encapsulation Type
of a PDH port.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 1,
Encapsulation Type
takes its default value
Null.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2,
Encapsulation Type
ATM.
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1.
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the name of a

service port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

352

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Format
Unframe
CRC-4 Multiframe
l Specifies the frame

format.
Double Frame
l If a CES service uses

the emulation mode of
CESoPSN, this
parameter can assume
the value CRC-4
Multiframe or
Double Frame. The
value CRC-4
Multiframe is
recommended.
CRC-4 Multiframe
l If a CES service uses

the emulation mode of
SAToP, this parameter
needs to assume the
value Unframe.
l The value of Frame
Format must be the
same at the local and
opposite ends.
Line Encoding Format
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Displays the line encoding

format. The parameter
value is always HDB3.
353

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Loopback Mode
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l Specifies the loopback

status for a port.
Inloop
l Non-Loopback
indicates that
loopbacks are
cancelled or not
performed.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that

the signals that need to
be transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that
the received signals are
looped back.
l This function is used
for fault locating for
the PDH ports. This
function affects
services over related
ports. Therefore,
exercise precaution
before starting this
function.
l Generally, this
parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Impedance
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Displays the port

impedance.
354

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Mode
30(ATM)
l 30 timeslots: In an E1
frame format,
timeslots 1 to 15 and 17
to 31 are used to
transmit service data,
and timeslot 16 is used
to transmit signaling.
31(ATM,CES)
l 31 timeslots: In an E1
frame format,
timeslots 1 to 31 are
used to transmit
service data.
l This parameter is
unavailable if Frame
Format is Unframe.
l The port frame modes
need to be the same at
the local and opposite
ends.
Clock Mode
Master Mode
Master Mode
Slave Mode
System Clock Mode
l Master Mode: The

system clock is used as
the output clock of
services.
l Slave Mode: The CES
ACR clock is used as
the output clock of
services. The port
inputting E1 clocks on
Slave is set to Slave
Mode.
l System Clock Mode:
The upstream E1 line
clock of the opposite
equipment is used as
the output clock of
services. The port
inputting E1 clocks on
Master is set to System
Clock Mode
Composite Port
Loopback
For the OptiX RTN 950,

this parameter cannot be
configured.
Service Load Indication

configured.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

355

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Equalize Input Signal

configured.
Equalize Outpput Signal

configured.
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the port name.
Name
Specifies the port name.
Enable Port
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether an
Ethernet port is
enabled. An Ethernet
port can receive,
process, and forward
Ethernet services only
if this parameter is set
to Enabled.
Disabled
l Set this parameter

according to the
NOTE
Port 10 of the EFP8 board
does not support this
parameter.
Port 8 of the EMS6 board
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

356

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 2
l Port Mode specifies

the mode of the
Ethernet port.
Layer 3
Layer Mix
l If Port Mode is Layer

2, Encapsulation
Type can be set to
Null, 802.1Q, or
QinQ.
l If Port Mode is Layer
3, Encapsulation
Type can be set to
802.1Q only and the
port can carry MPLS
tunnels.
NOTE
does not support the value
Layer 3 and Layer Mix.
does not support the value
Layer 3 and Layer Mix.
Encapsulation Type
Null
802.1Q
QinQ
l Encapsulation Type
specifies the method of
the port to process the
received packets.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to Null, the port
transparently
transmits the received
packets.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1q standard.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to QinQ, the port
IEEE 802.1ad QinQ
standard.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

357

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
l The Ethernet ports of

different types support
different Working
Mode.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
l When the equipment

on the opposite side
works in autonegotiation mode, set
the Working Mode of
the equipment on the
local side to AutoNegotiation.
works in full-duplex
mode, set the
Working Mode of the
equipment on the local
side to 10M FullDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, or 1000M
Full-Duplex
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
works in half-duplex
mode, set the
Working Mode of the
equipment on the local
side to 10M HalfDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, or AutoNegotiation
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
l FE ports support 10M
full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M halfduplex, and autonegotiation.
l GE electrical ports
support 10M fullduplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M half-
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

358

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
duplex, 1000M fullduplex, and autonegotiation.
l GE optical ports
support 1000M fullduplex and autonegotiation.
NOTE
parameter.
parameter.
Max Frame Length

(byte)
1518 to 9600
1522
The value of Max Frame

Length(byte) should be
greater than the length of
any frame to be
transported.
Auto-Negotiation
Ability
10M Half-Duplex
FE: 100M Full-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
GE: 1000M Full-Duplex
l Auto-Negotiation
Ability specifies the
auto-negotiation
capability of the
Ethernet port.
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
l For GE optical ports,

Auto-Negotiation
Ability can be set to
1000M Full-Duplex
only.
l Auto-Negotiation
Ability is valid only
when Working Mode
is set to AutoNegotiation.
Logical Port Attribute
Optical Port
Electrical Port
l This parameter
specifies the attribute
of the logical port.
l The SFP on the
EM6F,EM6FA board
supports the optical
port and electrical
port.
Physical Port Attribute
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


the attribute of the
physical port.
359

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Traffic Monitoring
Status
Enabled
Disabled
This parameters indicates

the enabled status of the
traffic monitoring
function over an Ethernet
port.
Traffic Monitoring
Period (min)
1 to 30
15

the traffic monitoring
period.
Disabled
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control

This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Flow Control tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port name.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

360

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled
l Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode is
valid only when
Working Mode is not
set to AutoNegotiation.
Enable Symmetric Flow

Control
l Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
of the equipment on
the local side must be
consistent with the
non-autonegotiation
flow control mode of
the equipment on the
opposite side
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports only two nonauto-negotiation flow
control modes,
namely, Disabled
mode and Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control mode.
NOTE
parameter.
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

361

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled
l Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode is
valid only when
Working Mode is set
to Auto-Negotiation.
Enable Symmetric Flow

Control
l Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode
of the equipment on
the local side must be
consistent with the
auto-negotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports only two
auto-negotiation flow
control modes,
namely, Disabled
mode and Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control mode.
NOTE
parameter.
parameter.
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

362

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port name.
QinQ Type Domain
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to QinQ, you need
to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default
value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to Null or 802.1Q,
you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this
case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed
as FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l QinQ Type Domain
should be set to the
same value for all the
ports on the EM6T/
EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA board.
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
l If all the accessed

services are frames
with the VLAN tag
(tagged frames), set
TAG to Tag Aware.
l If all the accessed
services are frames
without the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), set
TAG to Access.
l If the accessed
services contain
tagged frames and
untagged frames, set
TAG to Hybrid.
NOTE
TAG specifies the TAG
flag of a port. For details
about the TAG flags and
associated frameprocessing methods, see
Table A-2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

363

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4094
l Default VLAN ID is
valid only when TAG
is set to Access or
Hybrid.
l Default VLAN ID is
set according to the
actual situations.
NOTE
For details about the
functions of Default VLAN
ID, see Table A-2.
VLAN Priority
0 to 7
l VLAN Priority is
valid only when TAG
is set to Access or
Hybrid.
l When the VLAN

priority is required to
divide streams or to be
used for other
purposes, VLAN
Priority is set
according to the
In normal cases, it is
NOTE
For details about the
functions of VLAN
Priority, see Table A-2.
Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames

Port
Ingress UNI
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port receives the

frame.
The port discards

the frame.
The port receives

the frame.
Untagged frame
The port discards the

frame.
The ports add the

VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receive
the frame.
The ports add the

VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receive
the frame.

364

Port
Egress UNI
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port transmits

the frame.
The port strips the

VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1.
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.

NOTE
Layer 3 Attributes is valid only if Port Mode is set to Layer 3.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Enable Tunnel
Disabled
Enabled
l If Enable Tunnel is set

Enabled, a port
identifies and
processes MPLS
labels.
Enabled
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer 3
in the General
Attributes tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

365

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Specify IP Address
Manually
Unspecified
l Specifies the method of

setting the IP address
of a port.
Unspecified
l The value
Unspecified indicates
that the IP addresses do
not need to be
configured.
l The value Manually
indicates that the IP
address of the port can
be manually
configured.
-
IP Address
0.0.0.0
l Specifies the IP
address of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
l Specifies the subnet

mask of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

366


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port name.
Port Physical
Parameters

the physical parameters of
the port.
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
Inloop
l In normal cases, it is
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the PHY layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
MAC Address

the MAC address of the
port.
Transmitting Rate(kbit/
s)

the rate at which the data
packets are transmitted.
Receiving Rate(kbit/s)

the rate at which the data
packets are received.
Loopback Check
Enabled
Disabled

whether to enable loop
detection, which is used to
check whether a loop
exists on the port.
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

367

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Loopback Port Block
Enabled
Disabled

whether to enable the loop
port shutdown function.
Disabled
Egress PIR Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)

the egress PIR bandwidth.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
limit the traffic rate of
the broadcast packets
according to the
proportion of the
broadcast packets in
the total packets.
When the equipment at
the opposite end may
encounter a broadcast
storm, this parameter
is set to Enabled.
Enabled
l If Ethernet services are

E-LAN services, the
recommended value is
Enabled.
l This parameter takes
effect only for E-LAN
services in the ingress
direction.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
0 to 100
30
When the proportion of

the broadcast packets in
the total packets exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the received
broadcast packets are
discarded. The value of
this parameter should be
more than the proportion
of the broadcast packets in
the total packets before
the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases,
default value.
Network Cable Mode
This parameter displays

the working mode of the
network cable connected
to an Ethernet port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

368

A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree.
2.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the name of the

port where a serial service
is configured.
Name

Level
l Specifies or displays
the serial port level.
l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/
s timeslots of E1
signals can be bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports 64K Timeslot
only.
Used Port
Displays the physical port

that carries a serial
service.
64K Timeslot
Displays the timeslots that

a serial service occupies.
The timeslots can be
consecutive or not.
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 3
l Displays or specifies
the port mode.
Layer 3
l A port supports ATM

encapsulation if its
Port Mode is Layer
2. A port does not
support encapsulation
if its Port Mode is
Layer 3.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

369

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation Type
l Displays and specifies

the encapsulation type
of a PW.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2, this
parameter displays
ATM; when Port
Mode is Layer 3, this
parameter displays
Null.
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports

This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the New tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Number(e.g:1,3-6)
Specifies the port where

the serial service is
configured.
Name
Specifies the customized

port name.
Level
64K Timeslot
64K Timeslot
l Specifies the serial

port level.
set to 64K Timeslot ,
E1 timeslots can be
bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the parameter
value 64K Timeslot .
Used Board
Specifies the board where

a serial port is located.
Used Port
Displays the board where

a serial port is located.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

370

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
High Channel
The OptiX RTN 950 does

not support this parameter.
Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6)

64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6)
Specifies the 64 kbit/s

timeslots to be bound with
the serial port. The
timeslots can be
consecutive or not.
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter indicates the corresponding

IF port.
Name
This parameter indicates or specifies the

Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 2
l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation

Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or
QinQ.
Layer 3
Layer Mix
l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation

Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the
port can carry tunnels.
l If Port Mode is Layer Mix,
Encapsulation Type can be set to only
802.1Q or QinQ and the port can carry
both tunnels and Native Ethernet
services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

371

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation
Type
Null
802.1Q
l Encapsulation Type specifies the

method of the port to process the
received packets.
802.1Q
QinQ
l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, the

port transparently transmits the received
packets.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to
802.1Q, the port identifies the packets
that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ,
the port identifies the packets that
comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ
standard.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes

NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF port.
QinQ Type
Domain
l When Encapsulation Type in the

General Attributes tab page is set to
QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation Type in the
General Attributes tab page is set to
Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed as FFFF and
cannot be changed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

372

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
l If all the accessed services are frames

that contain the VLAN tag (tagged
frames), set Tag to "Tag Aware".
Access
Hybrid

that do not contain the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), set Tag to "Access".
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set Tag to
"Hybrid".
NOTE
Tag specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details
about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-3.
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4094
l Default VLAN ID is valid only when

TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l Default VLAN ID needs to be set
according to the actual situations.
NOTE
For details about the functions of Default VLAN
ID, see Table A-3.
VLAN Priority
l VLAN Priority is valid only when

l When the VLAN priority is required to
divide streams or to be used for other
purposes, VLAN Priority needs to be set
according to the planning information. In
normal cases, it is recommended that you
2
3
4
5
6
NOTE
For details about the functions of VLAN
Priority, see Table A-3.
Table A-3 Data frame processing

Status
Ingress Port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame

frame.
The port discards

the frame.
The port receives

the frame.

373

Status
Egress Port
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Untagged frame
The port discards the

frame.
The port receives

the frame after the
VLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" is added to
the frame.
The port receives

the frame after the
VLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" is added to
the frame.
Tagged frame
The port transmits

the frame.
The port strips the

VLAN tag from the
frame and then
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not "Default
VLAN ID", the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the
corresponding IF port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

374

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Tunnel
Disabled
Disabled
l A port identifies and

processes MPLS
labels, if its Enable
Tunnel is set
Enabled.
Enabled
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer
3 in the General
Attributes tab.
Specify IP Address
Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified
l Specifies the method

of setting the IP
address of a port.
l The value
Unspecified indicates
that the IP addresses do
not need to be
configured for a port.
l The value Manually
indicates that the IP
address of a port can be
manually configured.
IP Address
0.0.0.0
l Specifies the IP
address for a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
l Specifies the subnet

mask of a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

375


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF port.
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
l This parameter specifies the ID of the

radio link. As the identifier of a radio
between sites.
l The ID of each radio link of an NE must
be unique, and the link IDs at both ends
of a radio link must be the same.
Received Radio
Link ID

of the radio link.
ID does not match with the preset value
of Radio Link ID at the local end, the
local end inserts the AIS signal to the
IDs do not match.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

376

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Port Loopback
l This parameter indicates the loopback

status of the IF interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received IF
signals are looped back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to
locate the faults that occur at each IF
interface. The IF loopback is used for
diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the
services at the related ports are affected.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Composite Port
Loopback
l This parameter indicates the loopback

status on the composite interface.
l Inloop indicates that the composite
signals transmitted to the opposite end
are looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
composite signals are looped back.
Non-Loopback.
Error Frame
Discard Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled

whether to discard the Ethernet frame
when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet
frame.
l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the
IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video
service, you can set this parameter to
Disabled.
MAC Address
This parameter indicates the MAC address

of the port.
Transmitting Rate
(Kbit/s)
This parameter indicates the transmit rate of

the local port.
Receiving Rate
(Kbit/s)
This parameter indicates the receive rate of

the local port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

377

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter specifies the loopback

state at the MAC layer. When this
parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet
signals transmitted to the opposite end
are looped back.
Inloop

you use the default value.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards can not be set to
Inloop.
Speed
Transmission at
L2
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l If Speed Transmission at L2 is set to

Enabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packets
transmitted at microwave ports will be
compressed to improve transmission
efficiency.
l If the Layer 2 header compression
function can be enabled for the ISU2 or
ISX2 board, it is recommended that you
set Speed Transmission at L2 to
Enabled.
l The settings of Speed Transmission at
L2 must be the same at both ends of a
radio link.
NOTE
parameter.
Speed
Transmission at
L3
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l If Speed Transmission at L3 is set to

Enabled, the IP packets transmitted at
microwave ports will be compressed to
improve transmission efficiency.
l If the Layer 3 header compression
function can be enabled for the ISU2 or
ISX2 board, it is recommended that you
set Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled.
l The settings of Speed Transmission at
L3 must be the same at both ends of a
radio link.
NOTE
l The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to
Enabled, Encapsulation Type of the ISU2
and ISX2 boards cannot be set to Null.
Loopback Check
Disabled
Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to enable

loop detection, which is used to check
whether a loop exists on the port.

378

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Loopback Port
Shutdown
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates whether to enable

the automatic shut-down of looped ports.
Enabling
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether to limit

the traffic rate of the broadcast packets
according to the proportion of the
broadcast packets in the total packets.
When the equipment at the opposite end
may encounter a broadcast storm, this
parameter is set to Enabled.
Enabled
Enabled
l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services,

the recommended value is Enabled.
l This parameter takes effect only for ELAN services in the ingress direction.
0 to 100
Enabling
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold
30
When the proportion of the broadcast

packets in the total packets exceeds the value
of this parameter, the received broadcast
packets are discarded. The value of this
parameter should be more than the
proportion of the broadcast packets in the
total packets before the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set
to default value.
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

379

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Radio Link ID
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK

work mode of the radio link in "work
mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K

network plan. The work modes of the IF
boards at the two ends of a radio link
must be the same.
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
NOTE
The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
IF Service Type
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH)
SDH
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
l Displays or specifies the type of services

carried by the IF board.
Native E1 services, set this parameter to
Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

380

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of

a radio link. As the identifier of a radio
between sites.
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same
time, the local end reports MW_LIM
IDs do not match.
l Link ID is set according to the network
plan. Each radio link of an NE should
have a unique link ID, and the link IDs
at both ends of a radio link should be the
same.
Received Radio
Link ID

of the radio link.
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

381

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Port Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback

loopback status of the IF interface.
Inloop

Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals

looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received IF
l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used to
locate the faults that occur at each IF
interface. The IF loopback is used for
diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the
services at the related ports are affected.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
2M Wayside
Enable Statusa
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled

whether the radio link transmits the
wayside E1 service.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM mode.
2M Wayside Input
Boarda

slot in which the 2M wayside service is
accessed.
l This parameter can be set only when 2M
Wayside Enable Status is set to
Enabled.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM mode.
350 MHz
Consecutive Wave
Status
Stop
Start
Stop

status of transmitting the 350 MHz
carrier signals at the IF interface.
l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status
can be set to Start in the commissioning
process only. In normal cases, this
parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the
services are interrupted.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

382

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
XPIC Enabledb
Enabled
Enabled

whether the XPIC function of the XPIC
IF board is enabled.
Disabled
l If the XPIC IF board does not perform

the XPIC function, XPIC Enabled
should be set to Disabled.
Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslotc
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to be

set consistently between two ends of a radio
link.
NOTE
l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support way-side services.

l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

NOTE
The IF1 board does not support Hybrid/AM configuration.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF port.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
3.5M
IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the

channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
network plan.
7M
14M
28M
40M
56M
NOTE
l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
board.
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
40M.
l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M
only for the ISU2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

383

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled

Enabled

l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M
for the ISU2 board, the AM function is
unavailable and AM Enable Status
must be set to Disabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
QPSK

l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the

384

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
QPSK

16QAM
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM

Capacity specifies the highest-order
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
Manually
Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
l This parameter specifies the modulation

transmission.
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
STM-1 Capacity
l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF

board.
l This parameter is available only when IF
Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support this
parameter.
Enable E1 Priority
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

enable the E1 priority function.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

385

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guarantee E1
Capacity
l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,

this parameter needs to be set according
to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,
and the actually transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
according to IF Channel Bandwidth,
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
Guarantee E1
Capacity Range

board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
Displays the data service bandwidth of the

IF board.
Full E1 Capacity

transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
Full E1 Capacity

board in full capacity modulation mode.
Transmit-End
Modulation Mode
Displays the modulation mode at the

transmit mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

386

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Receive-End
Modulation Mode
Displays the modulation mode at the receive

mode.
Guarantee AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
Displays the guarantee AM service capacity.
Full AM Service
Capacity(Mbit/s)
Displays the full AM service capacity.
Transmitted AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
Displays the transmitted AM service

capacity.
Received AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
Displays the received AM service capacity.
E1 Capacity For
High Priority
Displays the number of configured highpriority E1s.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
l
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

387

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Disabled

Enabled
l When this parameter is set to Enabled

and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit
power until the RSL is within the range
that is 2 dB higher or lower than the
central value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
is recommended that you set ATPC
Enable Status to Disabled.
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
-45.0
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-70.0
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
l Set the central value between the ATPC

threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.

388

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled
Disabled

enabled.
Disabled
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable

Status is set to Enabled, the equipment
automatically uses the preset ATPC
upper and lower thresholds according to
the work mode of the radio link.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled, you need to
manually set ATPC Upper Automatic
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Automatic Threshold(dBm).
ATPC Upper
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
ATPC Lower
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
l This parameter indicates that the

ATPC upper and lower thresholds.
l This parameter is valid only when ATPC
Automatic Threshold Enable Status is
set to Enabled.

This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
l
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface
Click the AM Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF interface.
Modulation Mode
Displays the modulation schemes.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

389

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
E1 Capacity
l You can specify the number of E1s that

can be transmitted in intermediate
modulation scheme, by setting the
advanced attributes correspondingly.
l Generally, it is recommended that this
parameter takes the default value. To
ensure that a specific number of E1s can
be transmitted in intermediate
modulation scheme, adjust the E1
capacity in each modulation scheme
according to the network planning
information.
l If the E1 priority function is enabled, the
maximum number of allowed E1
services in the current mode = Min
{[Bandwidth of the air interface in the
current mode - (Bandwidth for the
assured capacity - Assured E1 number x
2Mbps)]/2Mbps, E1 number in the
highest-gain modulation mode}.
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
Displays the data service bandwidth.
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter indicates the port for the

ATPC adjustment.
Event NO.

ATPC adjustment event.
Adjustment Time
This parameter indicates the time of the

ATPC adjustment.
Adjustment
Direction
This parameter indicates the direction of the

adjustment at the port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

390

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover
This parameter indicates the switching

operation at the port.
Transmitted
Power(dBm)
This parameter indicates the transmitted

power of the port to be switched.
Received Power
(dBm)
This parameter indicates the received power

of the port to be switched.
A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

PRBS test.
Direction
Cross
Cross

direction of the PRBS test.
Tributary
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test

is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration
1 to 255

duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time

time unit used for the PRBS test.
10min
h
Start Time
This parameter indicates the start time of the

PRBS test.
Progress
This parameter indicates the progress

percentage of the PRBS test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

391

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Total PRBS
This parameter indicates the number of bit

errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies whether to display

the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
Deselected
A.5.6 ODU Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

ODU.
Transmit
Frequency(MHz)

the central frequency of the channel.
l The value of Transmit Frequency
(MHz) must not be less than the sum of
the minimum transmit frequency
channel spacing, and must not be more
than the difference between the
maximum transmit frequency supported
by the ODU and a half of the channel
spacing.
frequencies at both ends of a radio link
should be one T/R spacing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

392

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)

spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference of the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, T/R Spacing(MHz) is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
by the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing
(MHz) should be set according to the
technical specifications of the ODU.
radio link.
Actual Transmit
Frequency(MHz)

Actual Receive
Frequency(MHz)

Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual T/R

spacing of the ODU.
The range of
frequency point
(MHz)
This parameter indicates the working range

of the frequency of the ODU.
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Click the Power Attributes tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

393

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

ODU.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) is

set according to the network plan. This
modulation module.
exceed Maximum Transmit Power
(dBm).
Transmit Power
(dBm)
l Transmit Power(dBm) is set according

to the network plan. This parameter
specifies the transmit power of the ODU.
This parameter cannot be set to a value
that exceeds the nominal power rang of
the ODU or a value that exceeds
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

394

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to

set the expected receive power of the
ODU and is mainly used in the antenna
alignment stage. After this parameter is
set, the NE automatically enables the
function.
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is set
according to the network plan. When this
parameter takes the default value, the
function is disabled.
TX High
Threshold(dBm)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
l If the value of the actual transmit power

of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is greater than the
preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX
Low Threshold(dBm) in the
performance events.
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records
the duration when the value of the actual
transmit power of the ODU is greater
than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.

395

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Low Threshold
(dBm)

of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX
Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only
when the ATPC function is enabled.
RX High
Threshold(dBm)
l If the value of the actual receive power

of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the
system records the duration when the
value of the actual receive power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is lower than the
preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm)in the performance events.
value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of RX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records
the duration when the value of the actual
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

396

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
RX Low Threshold
(dBm)
Actual Transmit
Power(dBm)
Description
value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
l This parameter indicates the actual

l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual Receive
Power(dBm)

power of the ODU.
Actual range of
Power(dBm)
This parameter indicates the range of the

actual transmit power of the ODU.
Transmission
Power Type

A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
Click the Equipment Information tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

397

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

ODU.
Frequency(GHz)
This parameter indicates the frequency band

where the ODU operates.
Equipment Type
l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.
T/R Spacing(MHz)
This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of

the ODU.
Intermediate
Frequency
Bandwidth (MHz)
This parameter indicates the IF frequency

bandwidth of the ODU.
IF Bandwidth
Type
Displays the IF bandwidth type.
Station Type

ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Transmission
Power Type

Produce Time

time of the ODU.
Produce SN

serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

398

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

ODU.
RF Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback

loopback status of the RF interface of the
ODU.
Inloop

loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the RF signals
looped back.
l RF Loopback function is used for fault
locating for the RF interfaces. The RF
Loopback function is used for diagnosis
and may affect the services that are
transmitted over the interfaces. Hence,
exercise caution before starting this
function.
l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set to
Non-Loopback.
unmute
Configure
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute

l If Configure Transmission Status is set
to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does
not work but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l If Configure Transmission Status is set
to unmute, the ODU can normally
transmit and receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, Configure
Transmission Status is set to unmute.
Actual
Transmission
Status
Displays the ODU manufacturer

information.
Factory
Information
This parameter indicates the manufacturer

information about the ODU.
Remarks
Specifies the remarks of the ODU.
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards

This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

399

A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

SDH interface.
Optical Interface
Namea

name of the optical interface.
Laser Switcha
On
On

on/off state of the laser.
Off
l This parameter is set for SDH optical

interfaces only.
On.
Optical(Electrical)
Interface
Loopbacka
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback

loopback status on the SDH interface.
l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
l This function is used for fault locating
for the SDH interfaces. The Optical
(Electrical) Interface Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.
Non-Loopback.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

400

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VC4 Loopbackb
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback

loopback status in the VC-4 path.
Inloop

Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals

looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
VC-4 signals are looped back.
for the VC-4 paths. The VC4
Loopback function is used for diagnosis
and may affect the services that are
transmitted over the interfaces. Hence,
exercise precaution before starting this
function.
Non-Loopback.
NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Optical Interface

optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

401

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Shutdown
Disabled
Disabled

whether the Auto Laser Shutdown
function is enabled or disabled for the
laser.
Enabled
l The ALS function allows the laser to shut

down automatically when an optical port
does not carry services, an optical fiber
is broken, or no optical signal is received.
l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period
(ms), and Continuously On-test Period
(ms) only when this parameter is set to
Enabled.
On Period(ms)
1000 to 3000
2000

period when a shutdown laser automatically
starts up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
Off Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
60000

period when the laser does not work (with
the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously Ontest Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
90000

period when a shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards

This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select By Board/Port(Channel).
3.
Select Port from the list box.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

402

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

port.
Port Name

name of the port.
Tributary
Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback

loopback status in the associated path of
the tributary unit.
Inloop
Outloop

l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received PDH
for the paths of the tributary unit. The
Tributary Loopback function is used
for diagnosis and may affect the services
that are transmitted over the interfaces.
Hence, exercise precaution before
starting this function.
Non-Loopback.
Port Impedance
This parameter indicates the impedance of a

path, which depends on the tributary unit.
Service Load
Indication
Load
Load

service loading status in a specific path.
Non-Loaded
l When this parameter is set to Load, the

board detects whether alarms exist in the
path.
l When this parameter is set to NonLoaded, the board does not detect
whether there are alarms in the path.
l If a path does not carry any services, you
can set this parameter to Non-Loaded
for the path to mask all the alarms. If a
path carries services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the path.
Input Signal
Equalization
Unequalized
Equalized
Unequalized

input signals are equalized.
parameter to default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

403

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Retiming Mode
Normal
Normal

retiming mode of a specific path.
Retiming Mode of
Tributary Clock
l By using the retiming function, the

retiming reference signal from the SDH
network and the service data signal are
combined and then sent to the client
equipment, therefore decreasing the
output jitter in the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that the service
code flow can normally transfer the
retiming reference signal.
Retiming Mode of
Cross-Connect
Clock
l When this parameter is set to Normal,

the retiming function is not used.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming
function is used with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit traced.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the
retiming function is used with the clock
of the cross-connect unit traced.
l It is recommended that the external
clock, instead of the retiming function,
should be used to provide reference
clock signals for the equipment.
l If the retiming function is required, it is
recommended that you set this parameter
to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect
Clock.
Port Service Type
This parameter indicates the type of services

that are processed in a path. It depends on
the services that are transmitted in a path.
Output Signal
Equalization
Unequalized
Unequalized

output signals are equalized.
Equalized

default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

404

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
E1 Frame Format
Unframe
Unframe
Specifies the E1 frame format for E1 ports.

l To detect E1 BER performance on the
OptiX RTN 950, set E1 Frame
Format of the local E1 port to the same
value as that of the opposite E1 port. It is
recommended that E1 Frame Format of
both the local and opposite E1 ports be
CRC-4 Multiframe.
Double Frame
CRC-4 Multiframe
l In other scenarios wherein the OptiX

RTN 950 is used, it is recommended that
E1 Frame Format take its default value
Unframe. If E1 Frame Format is
Unframe, the OptiX RTN 950
transparently transmits E1 frames and
the local E1 port allows for
interconnection with another E1 port
whose E1 Frame Format is Double
Frame or CRC-4 Multiframe.
NOTE
E1 Frame Format needs to be set to the same
value at both ends of an E1 link.
A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

PRBS test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

405

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Cross
Cross

direction of the PRBS test.
Tributary
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test

is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration
1 to 255

duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time

time unit used for the PRBS test.
10min
h
Start Time
This parameter indicates the start time of the

PRBS test.
Progress
This parameter indicates the progress

percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS
This parameter indicates the number of bit

errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies whether to display

the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
Deselected
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
Navigation Path
1.
Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.
Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

406

Parameters for Setting the Display Format

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected
This parameter specifies the display in the

text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected

hexadecimal format.
Deselected
Deselected

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
J0 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the

J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J0 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J0 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
[Disabled]
l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be

received.
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J0
byte.
default value.
J0 Received
([Mode]Content)
This parameter indicates the J0 byte that is

actually received.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1.
Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected

text format.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Deselected

407

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected

hexadecimal format.
Deselected
Parameters for the Trace Byte J1

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
J1 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS

HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J1 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J1 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
[Disabled]

byte.
default value.
J1 Received
([Mode]Content)
This parameter displays the J1 byte that is

actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag C2

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
C2 to be Sent

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
C2 to be Received
If the NE at the local end reports the

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be sent at the
opposite end.
C2 Received
This parameter displays the C2 byte that is

actually received.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

408

Parameters for Overhead Termination

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
VC4 Overhead
Termination
Termination
Auto
l If this parameter is set to PassThrough, the NE forwards the original

overhead after monitoring the VC-4 path
overhead regardless of the C2 byte.
Pass-Through
Auto
l If this parameter is set to Termination,

the NE generates the new VC-4 path
overhead according to the board setting
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through
service is passed through, and the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-12 service is
terminated.
default value.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.
2.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected

text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected

hexadecimal format.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Deselected
Deselected

409

Parameters for the Trace Byte

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
J2 to be Sent
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS

LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC12 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the J2 byte to
be received by the NE at the opposite end.
J2 to be Received
[Disabled]

byte.
default value.
NOTE
IF boards do not support this parameter.
J2 Received
This parameter displays the J2 byte that is

actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to
be Sent

LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be received at the opposite end.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to
be Received
If the NE at the local end reports the

LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be sent at the opposite end.
NOTE
IF boards do not support this parameter.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5)
Received
This parameter displays the V5 byte that is

actually received.
A.5.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters of Ethernet virtual interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

410

Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Virtual Interface from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3.
Choose New > Create Ethernet Virtual Interface.
Basic Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
1 to 8191
This parameter displays or specifies the port

number of an Ethernet virtual interface.
Name

name of an Ethernet virtual interface.
Port Type
EoA Virtual
Interface
EoA Virtual
Interface

type of an Ethernet virtual interface.
VLAN Sub Interface
The OptiX RTN 950 allows Port Type to be

set to VLAN Sub Interface only.
Board
This parameter displays or specifies the

board where an Ethernet virtual interface is
located.
Port

where an Ethernet virtual interface is
located.
VPI
Setting this parameter is not available.
VCI
AAL5
Encapsulation
Type
VLAN
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that

an Ethernet virtual interface uses.
This parameter can be set when Port Type
is VLAN Sub Interface.
Specify IP Address
Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified
This parameter specifies whether to set the

IP address for a port.
l Unspecified: indicates that the IP
address will not be specified for a port.
l Manually: indicates that the IP address
will be specified for a port. If the
specified IP address is a valid value, it
will become the IP address of this port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

411

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
0.0.0.0
This parameter specifies the IP address of a

port.
l This parameter can be set only when
Specify IP Address is Manually.
l The IP addresses of different ports on an
NE must be in different network
segments, but the IP addresses of the
ports at both ends of an MPLS tunnel
must be in the same network segment.
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
This parameter specifies the subnet mask for

a port.
This parameter can be set only when Specify
IP Address is Manually.
Enable Tunnel
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled

an MPLS tunnel.
This parameter specifies the MPLS enabled
status for a port. If you set Enable Tunnel
to Enabled for a port, the port identifies and
processes MPLS labels.
MAC Address
This parameter displays the port MAC

address of an Ethernet virtual interface.
Layer 3 Attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter displays an IF port.
Enable Tunnel
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter displays or specifies whether

to enable an MPLS tunnel.
Disabled
Set the MPLS enabled status for a port. If

you set Enable Tunnel to Enabled, the port
identifies and processes MPLS labels.
Specify IP
Address
Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified
This parameter displays or specifies whether

to set the IP address for a port.
l Unspecified: indicates that the IP
address will not be specified for a port.
l Manually: indicates that the IP address
will be specified for a port. If the
specified IP address is a valid value, it
will become the IP address of this port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

412

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
0.0.0.0
This parameter displays or specifies the IP

address of a port.
l This parameter can be set only when
Specify IP Address is Manually.
l The IP addresses of different ports on an
NE must be in different network
segments, but the IP addresses of the
ports at both ends of an MPLS tunnel
must be in the same network segment.
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
This parameter displays or specifies the

subnet mask of a port.
This parameter can be set only when Specify
IP Address is Manually.
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features

on the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the
packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

413


Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294

the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name

the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

l Set this parameter to

UNI-UNI.
414

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
l This parameter
specifies the
transparent
transmission ID of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets.
It is used to indicate
whether the E-Line
service transparently
transmits the BPDU
packets.
Transparently
Transmitted
l If the BPDU packets

are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted. That is,
the parameter value
Transparently
Transmitted takes
effect only if
Encapsulation Type
of the source and sink
ports of the E-Line
service are Null.
l In other cases, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
according to the
MTU(bytes)
This parameter cannot be

set here.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

415

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Port
l Before setting this

parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
the same as the value
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

416

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
l This parameter can be

set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l The number and value
of VLANs must be the
same value of Sink
VLANs.
to null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

417

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Port

ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of Source Port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

418

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VLANs
1 to 4094

or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
l The number and value
of VLANs must be the
same value of Source
VLANs.
at the sink port are
used as the service
sink.
the VLAN ID at the
sink port can be used
as the service sink.
Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294

service.
Service Name

service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


UNI-NNI.
419

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
For UNI-NNI ETH

PWE3 services, the
parameter value is always
Not Transparently
Transmitted.
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU(bytes)

set here.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
Source Port

ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

420

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLANs
1 to 4094

or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
used as the service
source.
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be
used as the service
source.
PRI

not support this
parameter.
Bearer Type
QinQ Link
PW
For UNI-NNI ETH

PWE3 services, the
parameter value is always
PW.
PW
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

421

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
No Protection
No Protection

to PW APS, working
and protection PWs
need to be configured.
PW APS
Slave Protection Pair

to Slave Protection
Pair, you need to bind
the slave PW APS
protection group with
the master PW APS
protection group. The
switching of the
master PW APS
protection group
triggers the switching
of the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294

service.
Service Name

service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted

UNI-NNI.
Not Transparently
Transmitted
For UNI-NNI QinQ

services, the parameter
value is always Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU(bytes)

set here.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

422

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Port

ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
Source VLANs
1 to 4094

or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
used as the service
source.
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

423

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PRI

not support this
parameter.
Bearer Type
QinQ Link
PW
For NNI-NNI QinQ

value is always QinQ
Link.
Selects or specifies the ID

of a QinQ link. You can
create a QinQ link or
select an existing QinQ
link.
PW
QinQ Link ID
Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294

service.
Service Name

service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted

NNI-NNI.
Not Transparently
Transmitted
For NNI-NNI QinQ

value is always
Not Transparently
Transmitted
.
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU(bytes)

set here.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
PRI

not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

424

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bearer Type 1
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
Uses the QinQ link to

carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 1
l Selects the QinQ link

ID of the first QinQ
link.
l The QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link.
Bearer Type 2
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
Uses the QinQ link to

carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 2
l Selects the QinQ link

ID of the second QinQ
link.
l The QinQ link ID is
QinQ Link ID
Selects or specifies the ID

of a QinQ link. You can
create a QinQ link or
select an existing QinQ
link.
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters
of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working
PW as an example.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Specifies the ID of the PW

that carries services.
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
Labels for static PWs need

to be manually assigned.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

425

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
Ethernet
Ethernet
l Specifies the type of

the PW.
Ethernet Tagged Mode
l PW Type indicates
whether P-TAG is
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated for
transmission on PWs.
If it is not required to
add VLAN IDs, set this
parameter to
Ethernet. If it is
required to add VLAN
IDs, set this parameter
to Ethernet Tagged
Mode and then set
Request VLAN in the
Advanced Attributes
tab.
PW Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Displays the direction of

the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the
encapsulation type of the
packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575
Specifies the PW Ingress

label.
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
16 to 1048575
Specifies the PW Egress

label.
Tunnel selection mode
Displays the method to

select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the type of the

tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel
A tunnel needs to be
selected. If no tunnel is
available, creation of a
PW will fail.
Egress Tunnel
For a bidirectional tunnel,

the system will configure
the egress tunnel
automatically.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

426

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Peer LSR ID
Specifies the LSR ID of

the PW at the remote end.
If an existing tunnel is
selected, the LSR ID will
be automatically assigned.
QoS Parameters (PW)

NOTE
QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit

bandwidth limit function
is enabled.
l This function limits the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3 service
corresponds to a PW.
Therefore, this
function can also limit
the bandwidth of ETH
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy

CIR(Kbit/s)
Specifies the committed

information rate (CIR) of
a PW.
It is recommended that
you set this parameter to
the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte)

burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s)
Specifies the peak

information rate (PIR) of a
PW.
the same value as CIR.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

427

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
Specifies the peak burst

size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP

LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe: When stripping

MPLS tunnel labels from
packets, an egress node
does not update the
scheduling priority for the
packets.
Parameters of Advanced Attributes (PW)

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
No Use
No Use
For ETH PWE3 services,

the parameter value is
always No Use.
Control Channel Type
None
Alert Label
l Specifies the mode of

PW connectivity
check.
Alert Label
l None indicates that

VCCV is not used.
l Alert Label indicates
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
Ping
None
l Specifies the VCCV

verification mode. The
VCCV verification is
used for PW
connectivity check.
l If the VCCV-Ping test
is required, do not set
this parameter to
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

428

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Request VLAN

when PW Type is
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
l If the received packets
do not carry any
VLAN IDs, the PW
will add VLAN IDs to
the packets as required
by the setting of this
parameter.
TPID

not support request VLAN
TPID of the PW level.
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS)

NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
PW APS.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
Specifies the protection

type.
Protection Group ID

group ID.
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies the enabling

status of the PW
protection group.
Enabled
l During the creation of

a protection group, set
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
APS protection group
is configured at both
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode
Displays the protection

mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports 1:1 protection
mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

429

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working PW ID
Displays the ID of the

working PW.
Protection PW ID

protection PW.
Switching Mode
Displays the switching

mode to be used when a
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports dual-ended
switching.
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter
switch services back to
the original working
PW after it recovers.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Nonrevertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
Switchover Restoration
Time(min)
1 to 12
l Specifies the WTR

time of the protection
group.
l When the preset WTR
time expires after the
original working PW
recovers, services are
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
l The default value is
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

430

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Delay Time

(100ms)
0 to 100
l Specifies the hold-off

group.
to a value other than 0,
the protection group
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but waits
until the hold-off time
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist. If any
faults persist, the
switching is triggered;
otherwise, no
switching is triggered.
recommended.
Detection mode
Displays the detection

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of
PWs is set to PW APS.
l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management >
PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
Displays the enabling

status of PW OAM.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

431

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies the detection

mode of OAM packets.
Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval specified
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value AutoSensing is
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

432

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Type
CV
CV
l CV: The detection

packets are sent at a
fixed interval.
FFD
l FFD: The detection

packets are sent at the
interval specified by
the user.
set to Auto-Sensing,
this parameter
specifies the PW OAM
detection packets to be
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
parameter specifies the
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
connectivity check on
PWs.
Detection Packet Period
(ms)
3.3
50
10
l Specifies the period of

detection packets.
l This parameter is
configurable when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD and
assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
20
50
100
200
500

3.3 for PW APS.
LSR ID to be Received
Specifies the LSR ID to be

received.
PW ID to be Received
Specifies the PW ID to be
received.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

433

Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair)

NOTE
Slave Protection Pair.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode

mode.
Protection Group ID
Specifies the ID of the

slave protection pair. The
switching of the master
PW APS protection group
triggers the switching of
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Working PW ID

working PW in the slave
protection pair.
Protection PW ID

protection PW in the slave
protection pair.
A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294

service.
Service Name

or specifies the name of
the E-Line service.
Source Node

the source node.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

434

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Node

the sink node.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
MTU(byte)

queried here.
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted

the transparent
transmission tag of the
bridge protocol data unit
(BPDU) packets. This
parameter is used to
indicate whether the
Ethernet line
transparently transmits
the BPDU packets.

whether E-Line service is
deployed.
Transparently
Transmitted
Deployment Status
Parameters Associated with UNI Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the UNI port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

435

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLANs
1 to 4094

or specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.
NNI Parameters (PW)

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

the PW ID.
Working Status

the working status of a
PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

436

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Status

whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling Type

the PW signaling type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses
static PWs only.
PW Type

the configured PW type.
PW Direction

the direction of the PW.

the PW encapsulation
type.
NOTE
MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port

the configured PW ingress
label.
Port

the configured PW egress
label.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS

the type of the tunnel that
carries a PW.
Peer LSR ID

the opposite LSR ID.
Tunnel

the tunnel.
Control Word

always No Use.

the control channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode

the VCCV mode.
Local Working Status
Displays the working

status of the PW at the
local end.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

437

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote Working Status

the working status of the
PW at the remote end.
Compositive Working
Status

the comprehensive
working status of the PW.
Request VLAN

the request VLAN.
Deployment Status

the deployment status.
Tunnel Automatic
Selection Policy

the automatic tunnel
selection policy.
TPID

not support request
VLAN TPID of the PW
level.
Parameters Associated with NNI Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
1 to 4294967295
l This parameter
indicates the QinQ link
ID of the QinQ link
connected to the NNI
port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
Port
l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

438

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN ID
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of the
NNI port.
only when Direction
is set to UNI-NNI or
NNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
l This parameter is
QoS Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

the PW ID.
Direction
l This parameter
displays the direction
of the PW.
l Egress indicates the
egress direction of the
PW.
l Ingress indicates the
ingress direction of the
PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

439

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
This parameter displays or

is enabled for a PW to
prevent network
congestion.
l Regarding
transmission channels,
this function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3
service corresponds to
a PW. Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy

not support this
parameter.
CIR (Kbit/s)

specifies the committed
a PW.
CBS (kbyte)

PIR (kbit/s)

specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) of
a PW.
PBS (kbyte)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


specifies the peak burst
size (PBS) of a PW.
440

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP

not support this
parameter.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe

does not update the
packets.
Parameters for the Port Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the port

information.
Enable Port
l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the port.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

441

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation Type
Null
l This parameter
indicates the
encapsulation type of
the port.
802.1Q
QinQ

only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
to Null, the port
transparently
transmits the received
packets.
to 802.1Q, the port
IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
to QinQ, the port
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
TAG
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
l This parameter
displays the tag of the
port.
l This parameter is
preset in Layer 2
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface .

NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

442

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID

protection group to be
created.
Working PW ID

working PW.
Protection PW ID

protection PW.
Protection Mode

mode.
Enabling Status
Enabled
the enabling status of
the PW protection
group.
Disabled

Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Switchover Mode

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supporting dual-ended
switching.
Restoration Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
l Specifies whether to
switch services to the
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
switched to the
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

443

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Time(min)
1 to 12
the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.

(100ms)
0 to 100
the hold-off time of the
protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
Deployment Status
Display the deployment

status of the protection
group.
Switchover Status
Displays the switchover

group.
Protocol Status

status of the protocol.
Working Path Status
Displays the status of the

current working path.
Protection Path Status
Display the status of the

current protection path.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

444


NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Working PW ID

protection pair.
Protection PW ID

protection pair.
DNI PW ID
Displays the DNI PW ID.
PW Type
Displays the PW type.
Deployment Status
Displays the deployment

status of the slave
protection pair.
A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line

Services_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI

the network attribute of
the source interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

445

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Interface

the source interface.
Source VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the VLAN ID of the
source service.
Sink Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI

the network attribute of
the sink interface.
Sink Interface

the sink interface.
Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the VLAN ID of the sink
service.
NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service.
Navigation Path
1.
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

446


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports simultaneous
creation of an E-LAN
service only.
Service Name

the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU
l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an ELAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

447

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag Type
C-Awared
C-Awared
l C-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to CAwared.
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
l S-Awared indicates
learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to SAwared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that the
packets are
transparently
transmitted. To create
the 802.1d bridge, set
this parameter to TagTransparent.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

448

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
Disabled
l If the MAC selflearning function of an

Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
MAC Address Learning
Mode
IVL
SVL
l This parameter
indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
Deployment Status

whether E-LAN service is
deployed.
MTU(byte)

set here.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

449

Parameters for UNIs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the UNI port.
SVLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
according to the
VLANs/CVLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
work as the service
source or service sink.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

450

Parameters of NNIs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
l This parameter
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs
l This parameter
ID of the NNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group ID
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

451

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group

Member
l A split horizon group

member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon
group.
l The port members that
are added to the same
split horizon group
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

452


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
l This parameter
E-LAN service.
l The supports
simultaneous creation
of an E-LAN service
only.
Service Name

the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU
l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an ELAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

453

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag Type
C-Awared
C-Awared
l C-Awared indicates
learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to CAwared.
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
l S-Awared indicates
learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to SAwared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that the
packets are
transparently
transmitted. To create
the 802.1d bridge, set
this parameter to TagTransparent.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

454

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
MAC Address Learning

Mode
l This parameter
indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
MTU(byte)

queried here.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
Deployment Status

whether E-LAN service is
deployed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

455

Parameters for UNIs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the UNI port.
SVLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
according to the
VLANs/CVLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
of the UNI port.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
to null, the E-LAN
service exclusively
uses the corresponding
UNI physical port.
That is, the entire port
is mounted to the
bridge.
to a non-null value,
only the
corresponding UNI
port whose service
packets contain this
VLAN ID works as the
logical port and is
mounted to the bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

456

Parameters for NNIs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
l This parameter
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs
l This parameter
ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

457

Parameters for Static MAC Addresses

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset static MAC
address entries are
valid for all VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset
static MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
according to the
MAC Address
l This parameter
the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address
is an address that is set
manually. It is not
aged automatically
and needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static
MAC address is used
for the port that
receives but does not
forward Ethernet
service packets or the
port whose MAC
address need not be
aged automatically.
Egress Interface
l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

458

Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset self-learning
MAC address entries
are valid for all
VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset selflearning MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
according to the
MAC Address
l This parameter
the self-learning MAC
address. A selflearning MAC address
is also called a
dynamic MAC
address.
l A self-learning MAC
address is an entry
obtained by a bridge in
SVL or IVL learning
mode. A self-learning
MAC address can be
aged.
Egress Interface
l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

459

Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Aging Ability
Enabled
Enabled
The OptiX RTN 950

supports enabling/
disabling of the aging
function and aging time
for the MAC address
table.
If one routing entry is not
updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new
packet from this MAC
address is received to
enable the re-learning of
this MAC address, this
routing entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is called
aging, and this period is
called aging time. The
aging time of a MAC
address table is 5 minutes
by default.
Disabled
Aging Time(min)
1 to 640
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID

or specifies the VLAN ID
of the service. A disabled
MAC address is valid for
the VLAN whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

460

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
l This parameter
specifies or indicates
the disabled MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address is also
called a blacklisted
MAC address.
l This parameter is used
for discarding an
entry, also called a
black hole entry,
whose data frame that
contains a specific
destination MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address needs to
be set manually and
cannot be aged.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group ID
l This parameter
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

461

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group

Member
l A split horizon group

member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon
group.
l The port members that
are added to different
split horizon groups
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Type
Unicast

the type of the received
unknown frame.
Broadcast
Selects the method of

processing the unknown
frame. If this parameter is
set to Discard, the
unknown frame is directly
discarded. If this
parameter is set to
Broadcast, the unknown
frame is broadcast at the
forwarding port.
Multicast
Handing Mode
Discard
Broadcast
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

462

A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path
1.
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
1 to 4294967295

the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports 1024 QinQ links,
whose IDs must be different
from each other.
Board

the board where the QinQ
link is located.
Port

the port where the QinQ
link is located.
S-Vlan ID
1 to 4094
l This parameter
(at the network
operator side) for the
QinQ link.
according to the
A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation

This topic describes the parameters for creating E-AGGR services.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

463


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294

the ID of an E-AGGR
service.
Service Name

the name of an E-AGGR
service.
MTU(bytes)
Setting this parameter is

not available.
Service Tag Role

not available.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Location
Sink

whether a port functions
as a service source or sink.
UNI Parameters
Source
You can configure one or

more source ports but only
one sink port for an EAGGR service.
Otherwise, configuration
of the E-AGGR service
will fail.
Port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


UNI ports.
464

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLANs
1 to 4094
l This parameter
for a UNI port.
l Set this parameter to a
numeral or several
numerals. When you
several numerals, use
","s to separate
discrete values and use
" - "s to indicate
consecutive numerals.
For example, 1, 3 - 6
indicates numerals 1,
3, 4, 5, and 6.
you do not set this
parameter to null.
Priority

not available.
NNI (PW) Parameters

Table A-8 Basic attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Location
Sink

Source
You can configure one or

more source ports but only
one sink port for an EAGGR service.
Otherwise, configuration
of the E-AGGR service
will fail.
PW ID
1 to 4294967295

the ID of a PW.
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static

the signaling type of a
PW.
You need to allocate the
same PW label for both
ends of a static PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

465

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
Ethernet
Ethernet
l This parameter
specifies whether PTAGs will be added to
Ethernet frames when
the Ethernet frames are
encapsulated on a PW.
Ethernet Tagged Mode
l If Request VLAN
does not need to be
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated on a PW,
Ethernet. If Request
VLAN needs to be
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated on a PW,
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
Currently, this parameter
can be set only to
Ethernet because EAGGR services on the
OptiX RTN 950 do not
support PWs in Ethernet
tagged mode.
PW Direction

the direction of a PW.
MPLS
MPLS

the encapsulation type of
a PW.
PW Incoming Label
16 to 1048575

the ingress label for a PW.
PW Outgoing Label
16 to 1048575

the egress label for a PW.
Tunnel Selection Mode

whether an existing
MPLS tunnel or a new
MPLS tunnel is used.
Tunnel Type

the type of a tunnel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

466

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel
This parameter requires

you to select an existing
static MPLS tunnel. If
there is no static MPLS
tunnel available, PW
creation will fail.
Peer LSR ID

the LSR ID for the NE at
the opposite end of a PW.
If an existing MPLS
tunnel is used, the peer
LSR ID is automatically
generated based on the
local LSR ID.
Table A-9 Advanced attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
Not in use
Not in use

this parameter has a fixed
value of Not in use.
Alert Label
None

the control channel type,
which determines the PW
continuity check (CC)
mode.
l None: indicates that
virtual circuit
connectivity
verification (VCCV)
packets are not used.
l
l Alert Label: indicates
that VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode
are used.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

467

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
Ping
l This parameter
specifies the VCCV
verification mode,
which is used for a PW
CC test.
None
l If the LSP ping

function is used to
implement VCCV,
VCCV Verification
Mode cannot be set to
None.
Request VLAN

not available.
TPID

not available.
Parameters for a VLAN Forwarding Table

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
V-UNI
V-UNI

the network attribute for a
source port.
Source Interface
This parameter specifies a

source port.
Source VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the source VLAN ID.
Sink Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI

the network attribute for
the sink port.
Sink Interface

the sink port.
Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the sink VLAN ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

468

NOTE
l Regardless of whether VLAN ID swapping is required by an E-AGGR service, a VLAN forwarding table
needs to be configured, specifying the source and sink VLAN IDs of each VLAN-based service.
l A VLAN forwarding table enables VLAN ID swapping for an E-AGGR service. After a VLAN forwarding
table is created, a service from Source Interface will carry the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when
leaving Sink Interface.
l For an E-AGGR service, the VLAN forwarding table specifies bidirectional VLAN ID swapping
relationships. This means that swapping from Sink VLAN ID to Source VLAN ID and swapping from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID will be implemented once a VLAN forwarding entry for changing
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID is configured.
l For service aggregation from UNI ports to an NNI port, Source VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs
that have been configured for UNI ports.
l For service aggregation from NNI ports to a UNI port, Sink VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that
have been configured for UNI ports.
QoS (PW)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

the ID of a PW.
Direction
l This parameter
of a PW.
l Egress: indicates the
egress direction of a
PW.
l Ingress: indicates the
ingress direction of a
PW.
PW Type
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


the type of a PW.
469

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit

prevent network
congestion.
l For transmission
channels, the
bandwidth limit
function controls the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs as required.
l For services, the
bandwidth limit
bandwidth of each
ETH PWE3 service in
an MPLS tunnel,
because an ETH
PWE3 service
Policy

not available.
CIR(Kbit/s)

information rate (CIR) for
a PW.
The CIR is recommended
to be the same as the PIR.
CBS(Kbit/s)

burst size (CBS) for a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s)

specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) for
a PW.
The PIR is recommended
to be the same as the CIR.
PBS(Kbit/s)

size (PBS) for a PW.
EXP

not available.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

470

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe: When an egress

node strips off the MPLS
tunnel labels in the
received service packets,
it does not renew the
packet scheduling
priorities.
A.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services

This topic describes E-AGGR service parameters.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function
Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294

the ID of an E-AGGR
service.
Service Name

the name of an E-AGGR
service.
MTU(byte)

not available.
Service Tag Role

not available. OptiX RTN
950.
Deployment Status

whether an E-AGGR
service has been deployed.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID

the ID of a UNI port.
UNI Parameters
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

471

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Location

Port

UNI ports.
VLANs

the VLAN ID of a UNI
port.
Priority

not available.
NNI (PW) Parameters

Table A-10 Basic attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID

the ID of an NNI port.
Location

PW ID

the ID of a PW.
PW Status

whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling Type

the signaling type of a
PW.
PW Type

the type of a PW.
PW Direction

the direction of a PW.

the encapsulation type of
a PW.
PW Incoming Label

the ingress label of a PW.
PW Outgoing Label

the egress label of a PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

472

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Peer LSR ID

the LSR ID for the NE at
the opposite end of a PW.
Tunnel Type

the type of a tunnel.
Tunnel

the tunnel carrying PWs.
Select an existing static
MPLS tunnel. If there is
no static MPLS tunnel
available, PW creation
will fail.
Control Word

whether the control word
is used.

the control channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode

the VCCV verification
mode.
Local Operation Status

the PW running status at
the local end.
Local Operation Status

the PW running status at
the opposite end.
Overall Operation
Status

the overall PW running
status.
Request VLAN

the request VLAN ID.
Automatic Tunnel
Selection Policy

the automatic tunnel
selection policy.
TPID

not allow TPIDs in
request VLANs to be
specified for a PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

473

Parameters for a VLAN Forwarding Table

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
V-UNI
V-UNI

the network attribute for a
source port.
Source Interface
This parameter specifies a

source port.
Source VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the source VLAN ID.
Sink Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI

the network attribute for
the sink port.
Sink Interface

the sink port.
Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the sink VLAN ID.
NOTE
l Regardless of whether VLAN ID swapping is required by an E-AGGR service, a VLAN forwarding table
needs to be configured, specifying the source and sink VLAN IDs of each VLAN-based service.
l A VLAN forwarding table enables VLAN ID swapping for an E-AGGR service. After a VLAN forwarding
table is created, a service from Source Interface will carry the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when
leaving Sink Interface.
l For an E-AGGR service, the VLAN forwarding table specifies bidirectional VLAN ID swapping
relationships. This means that swapping from Sink VLAN ID to Source VLAN ID and swapping from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID will be implemented once a VLAN forwarding entry for changing
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID is configured.
l For service aggregation from UNI ports to an NNI port, Source VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs
that have been configured for UNI ports.
l For service aggregation from NNI ports to a UNI port, Sink VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that
have been configured for UNI ports.
QoS (PW)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

the ID of a PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

474

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
l This parameter
of a PW.
l Egress: indicates the
egress direction of a
PW.
l Ingress: indicates the
ingress direction of a
PW.
PW Type

the type of a PW.
Bandwidth Limit

prevent network
congestion.
l For transmission
channels, the
bandwidth limit
bandwidth of one or
more PWs as required.
l For services, the
bandwidth limit
bandwidth of each
ETH PWE3 service in
an MPLS tunnel,
because an ETH
PWE3 service
Policy

not available.
CIR(Kbit/s)

information rate (CIR) for
a PW.
The CIR is recommended
to be the same as the PIR.
CBS(Kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


burst size (CBS) for a PW.
475

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(Kbit/s)

specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) for
a PW.
The PIR is recommended
to be the same as the CIR.
PBS(Kbit/s)

size (PBS) for a PW.
EXP

not available.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe: When an egress

node strips off the MPLS
tunnel labels in the
received service packets,
it does not renew the
packet scheduling
priorities.
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
Protection > ERPS Management.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

476

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8
l This parameter
Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
East Port

the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port

the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node

Flag
Yes
No
l This parameter
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
No
l Only one node on the

ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
l An RPL owner needs
to balance the traffic
on each link of an
Ethernet ring.
Therefore, it is not
select a convergence
node as an RPL owner.
Instead, select the NE
that is farthest away
from the convergence
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

477

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RPL Port
l This parameter
specifies the RPL port.
l There is only one RPL
port and this RPL port
must be the east or
west port on the RPL
owner node.
you set the east port on
an RPL owner as an
RPL Port.
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets.
l The ID of a Control
VLAN must not be the
same as any VLAN ID
used by Ethernet
services. All ring
nodes should use the
same Control VLAN
ID.
Destination Node
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
01-19-A7-00-00-01
01-19-A7-00-00-01


destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
478

A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8

the ID of the ERPS
instance.
East Port

instance.
West Port

instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node

Flag
Yes

whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port

the RPL port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
No

479

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
the service packets or
inband DCN packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
01-19-A7-00-00-01


480

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0 to 10000, in step of 100
l This parameter
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating
the protection
switching sequence
when the ERPS
coexists with other
protection schemes so
that the fault can be
rectified in the case of
other protection
switching (such as
LAG protection)
before the ERPS
occurs. When a node
on the ring detects one
or more new faults, it
starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset
hold-off time is set to a
value that is not 0.
During the hold-off
time, the fault is not
reported to trigger an
ERPS. When the holdoff timer times out, the
node checks the link
status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can
be the same as or
different from the fault
that triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

481

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guard Time(ms)
10 to 2000, in step of 10
500
l This parameter
the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the
ring receives the
outdated R-APS
packets, an incorrect
ERPS may occur. The
ERPS guard timer is an
R-APS timer used for
preventing a node on
the ring from receiving
outdated R-APS
packets. When a faulty
node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer
expires.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

482

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(mm:ss)
l This parameter
the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers
to the duration from
the time when the
working channel is
restored to the time
when the switching is
released. When the
working channel is
restored, the WTR
timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not
transmitted. In
addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by
the unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit
Interval(s)
1 to 10

specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level
0 to 7

or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request

the last switching request.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

483

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RB Status

the RB (RPL Blocked)
status of the packets
received by the working
node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB: The RPL is
blocked.
DNF Status

the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
a non-RPL link, and
the node that receives
the packets is
requested to clear the
forwarding address
table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain the
DNF flags. In this
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed
not to clear the
forwarding address
table.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

484

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
State Machine Status

the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receives the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.
Node Carried with

Current Packet

the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
East Port Status

east port.
West Port Status

west port.
A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
1.
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3.
Click Create.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

485


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
MSTP
MSTP

the protocol type.
STP
l MSTP: stands for

Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports the CIST
MSTP only.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Enable Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
enable the protocol of
the port group or a
member port in the
port group.
l If the STP or MSTP is
enabled, the spanning
tree topology is
automatically reconfigured. As a
result, the services are
interrupted.
Parameters for Application Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List

the available port list in
which a port can be added
to the port group.
Selected Port List

the selected ports that can
be added to the port group.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

486

A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3.
On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4.
Click Config. The Config Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List

the available port list in
which a port needs to be
added to the port group.
Selected Port List

the selected ports that
need to be added to the
port group.
A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

487


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
l This parameter
port group.
set to only the port
group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Name

not support this
parameter.
Redaction Level

not support this
parameter.
Mapping List

not support this
parameter.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
l This parameter
port group.
Bridge Parameters

set to only the port
Group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Max Hop
Count
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
20

Specifies the maximum

hop count of the MSTP.
488

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Network Diameter
2 to 7
l This parameter
specifies the MSTP
network diameter.
l Network Diameter is
related to the link
whose number of
switches is the most
and is indicated by the
number of switches
that are connected to
the link. When you set
Network Diameter
for the switches, the
MSTP automatically
sets Max Age(s),
Hello Time(s), and
Forward Delay(s) to
the more appropriate
values for the
switches.
l If the value of
Network Diameter is
greater, the network is
in a larger scale.
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
l This parameter
specifies the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value
of this parameter, the
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

489

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is
recorded by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
is greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
l This parameter
specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the
recovery in the case of
faults is slower.
Port Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port in the port group.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

490

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Edge Attribute
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
Enabled
l This parameter
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Actual Edge Attribute
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
491

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point-to-Point Attribute
false
auto
l This parameter
specifies the point-topoint attribute of the
port.
true
auto
l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link

attribute
l true: forced point-topoint link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-topoint link attribute
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode
is full-duplex, the
actual point-to-point
attribute is true. If the
actual working mode
is half-duplex, Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True"
can transmit the rapid
state migration request
and response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point-to-Point
Attribute
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
492

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Transmit Packet

Count
1 to 255
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
to be set according to
the planning
information.
A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group

the port group.
MSTI ID

the MSTI ID. The value 0
indicates common and
internal spanning tree
(CIST). The OptiX RTN
950 supports only the
MSTP that uses CIST.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

493

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
l The most significant

16 bits of the bridge ID
indicate the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP/
MSTP network use the
same value, the bridge
whose MAC address is
the smallest is selected
as the root bridge.
Port Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

Priority
128

eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
FE Port: 200000
GE Port: 20000
l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

494

A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About

the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the CIST Running Information tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID

the ID of the port group.
Protocol Running Mode
MSTP
l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
STP
l MSTP: stands for

Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

495

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the bridge.
the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
as the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address

bridge.
Root Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768

the priority of the root
bridge.
Root Bridge MAC

Address

root bridge.
External Path Cost

ERPC

not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge

Priority

not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge

MAC Address

not support this
parameter.
Internal Path Cost IRPC

not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

496

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Root Port Priority
128
l This parameter
of the root port.
eight bits of the ID of
the root port indicate
the priority of the root
port.
l When the value is
higher.
Root Port

the root port.
Hello Time(s)
l This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum age of the
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

497

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
l This parameter
specifies the holdoff
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower and the
faults is slower.
MST Domain Max Hop

Count

the maximum hop count
of the MSTP.
Topology Change Count

the identifier of the
topology change.
Last Topology Change

Time(s)

the duration of the last
topology change.
Topology Change Count

the count of the topology
changes.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

Enable Protocol
Enabled
Disabled

whether the protocol of
the port group or a
member of the port group
is enabled.
Disabled

the role of a port.
Port Parameters
Disabled
Port Role
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

498

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Status
Discarding
Discarding

the state of a port.
Learning
l Discarding: receives
only BPDU packets
Forwarding
l Learning: only
receives or transmits
BPDU packets
l Forwarding: forwards
user traffic, and
transmits/receives
BPDU packets
Priority
128

indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
200000
l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768

the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
as the root bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

499

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge MAC Address

bridge.
Designated Port Priority

indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Design Port

the designated port.
Edge Port Attribute
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
Enabled
l This parameter
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Actual Edge Port
Attribute
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Disabled


the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
500

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point to Point
false
auto
l This parameter
specifies the point-topoint attribute of the
port.
true
auto
l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link

attribute
l true: forced point-topoint link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-topoint link attribute
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point to Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode
is full-duplex, the
actual point-to-point
attribute is true. If the
actual working mode
is half-duplex, Actual
Point to Point
Attribute is false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True"
can transmit the rapid
state migration request
and response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point to Point
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
501

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Count of
Transmitting Message
1 to 255
l This parameter
indicates the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
Protocol Running Mode
STP
MSTP
l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
l This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

502

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum age of the
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.
4 to 30
Forward Delay(s)
15
l This parameter
specifies the holding
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower and the
faults is slower.
Remain Hop

not support this
parameter.
A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG

Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
503

2.
Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG No.
l This parameter
specifies the LAG
number to be set
manually.
only when
Automatically
Assign is not selected.
Automatically Assign
Selected
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter
indicates whether
LAG No. is allocated
automatically.
l When Automatically
Assign is selected,
LAG No. cannot be
set.
LAG Name
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


the LAG name.
504

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG Type
Static
Static
l Static: You can create

a LAG. When you add
or delete a member
port to or from the
LAG, the Link
Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP)
protocol is required. In
a LAG, a port can be in
selected, standby, or
unselected state. The
aggregation
information is
exchanged among
different equipment
through the LACP
protocol to ensure that
the aggregation
information is the
same among all the
nodes.
Manual
l Manual: You can

create a LAG. When
you add or delete a
member port, the
LACP protocol is not
required. The port can
be in the up or down
state. The system
determines whether to
aggregate a port
according to its
physical state (UP or
DOWN), working
mode, and rate.
Switch Protocol

not support this
parameter.
Switch Mode

not support this
parameter.
Link Trace Protocol

not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

505

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive Mode
l Revertive Mode can

be set only when Load
Sharing is set to NonSharing.
Non-Revertive Mode
l When Revertive
Mode is set to
Revertive Mode, the
services are switched
back to the former
working channel after
this channel is restored
to normal.
l When Revertive
Mode is set to NonRevertive Mode, the
status of the LAG does
not change after the
former working
channel is restored to
normal. That is, the
services are still
transmitted on the
protection channel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

506

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Load Sharing
Sharing
Non-Sharing
l Set Load Sharing to

the same value as the
peer equipment. It is
set Load Sharing to
Non-Sharing at both
ends if the LAGs are
used for protection and
set Load Sharing to
Sharing at both ends if
the LAGs are used for
increasing
bandwidths.
Non-Sharing
l Sharing: Each member

link of a LAG
processes traffic at the
same time and shares
the traffic load. The
sharing mode can
increase a bandwidth
utilization for the link.
When the LAG
members change, or
certain links fail, the
system automatically
re-allocates the traffic.
l Non-Sharing: Only
one member link of a
LAG carries traffic,
and the other link is in
the standby state. In
this case, a hot backup
mechanism is
provided. When the
active link of a LAG is
faulty, the system
activates the standby
link, thus preventing
link failure.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

507

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Load Sharing Hash

Algorithm
Source MAC
Source MAC

only when Load
Sharing of a LAG is
set to Sharing.
Destination MAC
Source and Destination
MAC
Source IP
Destination IP
Source and Destination IP
MPLS Label
l The load sharing

computation methods
include computation
based on MAC
addresses (based on
the source MAC
address, based on the
destination MAC
address, and based on
the source MAC
address + sink MAC
address), computation
based on IP addresses
(based on the source IP
address, based on the
destination IP address,
and based on the
source IP address and
sink IP address), and
computation based on
MPLS labels.
l After the configuration
data is deployed, Load
Sharing Hash
Algorithm takes
effect for the entire
NE.
l For PW-carried UNINNI E-Line services,
Load Sharing Hash
Algorithm cannot be
set to MPLS Label.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

508

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
System Priority
0 to 65535
32768
l System Priority
of a LAG. The smaller
the value of System
Priority, the higher
the priority.
l When a local LAG
negotiates with an
opposite LAG through
LACP packets, both
LAGs can obtain the
system priorities of
each other. Then, the
LAG of the higher
system priority is
considered as the
comparison result of
both LAGs so that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs. If the priorities
of both LAGs are the
same, the system MAC
addresses are
compared. Then, the
comparison result
based on the LAG with
smaller system MAC
address is considered
as the result of both
LAGs and is used to
ensure that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs.
WTR Time(min)
1 to 30
10
l Specifies the WTR

time for the LAG.
l WTR Time(min)
takes effect only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

509

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switch LAG upon Air

Interface SD
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter
enable the switching
triggered by bit errors.
Enabled
l If Switch LAG upon

Air Interface SD is set
to Enabled, the
MW_BER_SD alarm
will trigger the LAG
switching at the air
interface.
Port Settings Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Main Board
l This parameter
specifies the main
board in a LAG.
according to the
Main Port
l This parameter
specifies the main port
in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created,
you can add Ethernet
services to the main
port only. Services
cannot be added to a
slave port. When Load
Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link
connected to the main
port is used to transmit
the services, and the
link connected to the
slave port is used for
protection.
Board (Available Slave

Ports)
l This parameter
specifies the slave
board in a LAG.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

510

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port (Available Slave

Ports)
l This parameter
specifies the salve port
in a LAG.
l The slave ports in a
LAG are fixed. Unless
they are manually
modified, the system
does not automatically
add them to or delete
them from the LAG.
Selected Standby Ports

the selected slave ports.
A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation

This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
Navigation Path
1.
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Priority tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port whose priority can
be set.
Port Priority
0 to 65535
32768
l This parameter
indicates the priorities
of the ports in a LAG
as defined in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher
the priority.
l When ports are added
into a LAG, the port of
the highest priority is
preferred for service
transmission.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

511

A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
Parameters on the main interface

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Binding Status

the binding status of pointto-point services.
Primary Function Point

the port where the primary
point of point-to-point
LPT resides.
Secondary Function
Point Type

the type of secondary
point for point-to-point
LPT.
Secondary Function
Point

the port where the
secondary point of pointto-point LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status

the status of point-to-point
LPT.
LPT Enabled
Enabled
Disabled

specifies the enabling
status of point-to-point
LPT.
Disabled
The LPT function can take

effect only when LPT
Enabled is set to
Enabled.
Recovery Times(s)
1-600

specifies the recovery time
of point-to-point LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms)
0-10000
1000

specifies the hold-off time
of point-to-point LPT.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

512

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switching Mode

the switching mode of
point-to-point LPT. Pointto-point LPT is available
only in strict mode.
Fault Detection Mode
PW OAM
LPT OAM

the fault detection mode of
point-to-multipoint LPT.
LPT OAM
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period
(100ms)
10-100
10

specifies the fault
detection period of pointto-point LPT.
User-Side Port Status

the status of a user-side
port.
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID

the NET IDs of LPT
packet out ports at both
ends.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

513

A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
3.
Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4.
Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 net ID
1-4294967295

the NET ID of LPT packet
out port at the local end.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295

the NET ID of LPT packet
out port at the opposite
end.

point of point-to-point
LPT resides.
VLAN ID
1-4094

the VLAN ID that is
carried by a point-to-point
LPT packet to traverse an
L2 network.
LPT package out port

the out port of a point-topoint LPT packet.
A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

514

Parameters of Primary Point

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description

Type

the type of primary point
for point-to-multipoint
LPT.

point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status

the status of point-tomultipoint LPT.
LPT Enabled
Enabled
Disabled

Disabled
Recovery Times(s)
1-600

specifies the recovery time
of point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms)
0-10000
1000

specifies the hold-off time
of point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Switching Mode
Strict mode
Strict mode

Point-to-point LPT is
available only in strict
mode.
Non-strict mode
l Strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when all its secondary
points detect faults.
l Non-strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when anyone of its
secondary points
detects a fault.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

515

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Fault Detection Mode
PW OAM
LPT OAM

the fault detection mode of
LPT OAM
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period
(100ms)
10-100
10

specifies the fault
detection period of pointto-multipoint LPT.

port.

the NET IDs of LPT
ends, when the service
network is an L2 network.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

516

Parameters of Secondary Point

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Access Point Type

the type of second point
LPT.
Access Point

the port or PW ID for the
secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT.

port.

the NET IDs of LPT
ends, when the service
network is an L2 network.
A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint

LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
3.
Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4.
Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

517

Parameters of primary point

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point Type
UNI

the type of primary point
LPT. The value range of
this parameter pertains to
the type of service
network.
PW
QinQ
L2 net
If the primary point is on

the access side, select
UNI; if the primary point
is on the network side, set
the parameter as follows.
l If the service network
is a PSN, select PW.
is a QinQ network,
select QinQ.
is an L2 network,
select L2 net.
Board

the board where the
primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides.
only when Point Type is
set to UNI.
Port

point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides.
set to UNI.
Point ID

the service ID for the
primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT.
set to PW or QinQ.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

518

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 net ID
1-4294967295

the NET ID of a local NE.
only when Point Type of
the primary point is set to
UNI, and when Point
Type of the secondary
point is set to L2 net.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295

the NET ID of an opposite
NE.
set to L2 net.
VLAN ID
1-4094

the VLAN ID that is
carried by an LPT packet
to traverse an L2 network.
set to L2 net.
LPT package out port

the out port of an LPT
packet.
set to L2 net.
Parameters of secondary point

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point Type
UNI

specifies the type of
secondary point for pointto-multipoint LPT.
PW
QinQ
L2 net
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

519

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

the board where the
secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides.
set to PW, QinQ, or L2
net.
Available Points

the available ports where
the secondary point of
point-to-multipoint LPT
can reside.
net.
Selected Points

the selected port where the
secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides.
net.
L2 net ID
1-4294967295

the NET ID of a local NE.
set to UNI.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295

the NET ID of an opposite
NE.
UNI, and when Point
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

520

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
1-4094

the VLAN ID that is
carried by an LPT packet
to traverse an L2 network.
UNI, and when Point
LPT Package out port

the out port of an LPT
packet.
UNI, and when Point
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance

Domain Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
Navigation Path
1.
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

521


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
default
l This parameter specifies the name of the

maintenance domain.
l The maintenance domain refers to the
network for the Ethernet OAM.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
Maintenance
Domain Level
l Maintenance Domain Level specifies

the level of the maintenance domain.
l The values 0 to 7 indicates maintenance
domain levels in an ascending order.
2
3
l MEPs transparently transmit OAM

protocol packets if the packets have a
higher level than the parameter value.
4
5
6
l MEPs discard OAM protocol packets if

the packets have a lower level than the
parameter value.
l MEPs respond to or terminate OAM

protocol packets based on the packet type
if the packets have the same level as the
parameter value.
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance

Association Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.

Choose New > New Maintenance Association.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
This parameter indicates the maintenance

domain of the created maintenance
association.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

522

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Association Name
l This parameter specifies the name of the

maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
Relevant Service
This parameter specifies the service

instance that is related to the maintenance
association.
CC Test Transmit
Period
1s
1s
l This parameter specifies the interval for

transmitting packets in the CC.
10s
l The CC is performed to check the

availability of the service.
1m
10m
A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name

domain of the created MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name

association of the created MEP.
Board
This parameter specifies the board where

the MEP is located.
Port
This parameter specifies the port where the

MEP is located.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

523

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN
This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of

the current service.
MP ID
1 to 2048
l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.

l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
Direction
Ingress
Ingress
Egress
l Direction specifies the direction of the

MEP.
l Ingress indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and Egress indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
Active
CC Status
Active
Inactive

enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
AIS Active Status
Active
Active
Inactive
l This parameter specifies the AIS active

status.
l If several MDs exist on a link, to locate
a fault accurately, set AIS Active
Status to Active and Client Layer
Level that functions to suppress the AIS
information.
l After a fault is detected by an MP, if this
MP activates the AIS, it sends the AIS
packet to a higher level MP, informing
the higher level MP of the fault
information; if this MP does not activate
the AIS, it does not report the fault.
Client Layer Level
1 to 7
l Normally, if an MP is set to level n,

Client Layer Level that functions to
suppress the AIS information should be
set to n+1.
l Client Layer Level is valid only if AIS
Active Status is Active.
A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP

Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

524

Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. The Manage Remote MEP Point dialog
box is displayed.
4.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name

domain of the MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name

association of the created MEP.
Remote
Maintenance Point
ID(e.g:1,3-6)
1 to 2048
l This parameter specifies the ID of the

remote MEP.
l If other MEPs will initiate OAM
operations to an MEP in the same MA,
set these MEPs as remote MEPs.
A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the MIP Point tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name

domain of the MIP.
Board
This parameter specifies the board where

the MIP is located.
Port
This parameter specifies the port where the

MIP is located.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

525

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MP ID
1 to 2048
l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.

l Each MIP needs to be configured with an
MP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance domain. The MP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
NOTE
To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a
port, ensure that only one MIP can be created
and the level of the MIP must be higher than
the level of the MEP.
A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4.
Choose OAM > Start LB.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Selected
Deselected
This parameter needs to be selected if the

LB test is performed on the basis of
Destination Maintenance Point IDs.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
Selected
Selected
This parameter needs to be selected if the

LB test is performed on the basis of MAC
addresses.
Maintenance
Domain Name

maintenance domain for the LB test.
Maintenance
Association Name

maintenance association for the LB test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
l This parameter specifies the source

maintenance point in the LB test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Deselected
Deselected
l Only the MEP can be set to the source

maintenance point.

526

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
l This parameter specifies the destination

maintenance point in the LB test.
l Only the MEP ID can be set to the
Destination Maintenance Point ID.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
00-00-00-00-00-00
l This parameter specifies the MAC

address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LB
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address.
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
1 to 255
Transmitted
Packet Count

packets transmitted each time in the LB
test.
l When the value is greater, the required
duration is longer.
Transmitted
Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
l This parameter specifies the length of a

transmitted LBM packet.
l If the packet length is different, the test
result may be different. In normal cases,
it is recommended that you use the
default value.
0 to 7
Transmitted
Packet Priority

transmitting packets.
l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7
indicates the highest priority. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to the highest
priority.
Detection Result
This parameter indicates the relevant

information and result of the LB test.
A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

527

Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4.
Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Selected
Deselected
This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
Selected
Selected
This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

test is performed on the basis of MAC
addresses.
Maintenance
Domain Name

maintenance domain for the LT test.
Maintenance
Association Name

maintenance association for the LT test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
l This parameter specifies the source

maintenance point in the LT test.
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Deselected
Deselected
l Only the MEP can be set to the source

maintenance point.
-
l This parameter specifies the destination

l Only the MEP ID can be set to the
Destination Maintenance Point ID.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
00-00-00-00-00-00
l This parameter specifies the MAC

address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address.
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

528

Parameters for the Detection Result

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
This parameter indicates the source

Destination
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC

of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Response
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC

of the port where the responding
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Hop Count
1 to 64
l This parameter indicates the number of

hops from the source maintenance point
to the responding maintenance point or
to the destination maintenance point in
the LT test.
l The number of hops indicates the
adjacent relation between the responding
maintenance point to the source
maintenance point. The number of hops
increases by one when a responding
point occurs on the link from the source
maintenance point to the destination
maintenance point.
Test Result
This parameter indicates the result of the LT

test.
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback

Detection
This topic describes the parameters for enabling E-LAN service loopback detection.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service
Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

529

Parameters for Enabling Service Loopback Detection

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Vlans/CVLAN
1 to 4094
1 to 4094
Vlans/CVLAN displays
the VLAN ID of a
loopback service.
Loopback detection can be
performed for only one
service one time.
Packet Timeout Period

(s)
3 to 10
Loopback detection stops

if no loopback detection
packets are received until
Packet Timeout Period
(s) expires.
Packet Length

the loopback detection
packet length.
VLAN Packet Sending

Interval(s)

the intervals for
transmitting different
VLAN packets.
Disable Service When

Loopback is Detected
No
No
Disable Service When

Loopback is Detected
displays whether a
loopback service will be
deactivated.
Yes
A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter

This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1.
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameter tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

530

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable OAM
Protocol
Enabled
Disabled

whether to enable the OAM protocol.
Disabled
l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the

current Ethernet port starts to use the
preset mode to create the OAM
connection with the opposite end.
OAM Working
Mode
Active
Active
Passive

working mode of the OAM.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Active can initiate the OAM
connection.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Passive can only wait for the
opposite end to send the OAM
connection request.
l The OAM working mode of the
equipment at only one end can be
Passive.
Link Event
Notification
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled

whether the local link events can be
notified to the opposite end.
l If the alarms caused by link events can
be reported, that is, if the number of
performance events (for example, error
frame period, error frame, error frame
second, and error frame signal cycle) at
the local end exceeds the preset
threshold, these performance events are
notified to the port at the opposite end
through the link event notification
function.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

531

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote Side
Loopback
Response
Disabled
Disabled

whether the port responds to the remote
loopback.
Enabled
l Remote loopback indicates that the local

OAM entity transmits packets to the
remote OAM entity for loopback. The
local OAM entity can locate the fault and
test the link performance through
loopback data analysis.
l If a port does not support remote
loopback response, this port does not
respond to the loopback request from the
remote port regardless of the OAM port
status.
Non-Loopback
Loopback Status
Initiate Loopback at
Local
This parameter indicates the loopback status

at the local end.
NOTE
Loopback Status is valid only after you choose
OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
Respond Loopback
of Remote
OAM Discovery
Status
This parameter indicates the OAM

discovery status at the local end.
Port Transmit
Status
This parameter indicates the status of

transmitting packets at the local end.
Port Receive Status
This parameter indicates the status of

receiving packets at the local end.
A.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error

Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
1.
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

532

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Error Frame
Monitor Window
(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000
This parameter specifies the duration of

monitoring error frames.
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(frames)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
l This parameter specifies the threshold of

monitoring error frames.
Error Frame
Period Window
(frame)
1488 to 892800000,
in step of 1
892800000
This parameter specifies the window of

monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame
Period Threshold
(frames)
1 to 892800000, in
step of 1

monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
60
This parameter specifies the time window of

monitoring the error frame second.
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
1

monitoring error frame seconds.
l Within the specified value of Error

Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Monitor Threshold(frame), an
alarm is reported.
l Within the specified value of Error

Frame Period Window(frame), if the
Frame Period Threshold(frame), an
alarm is reported.
l If any error frame occurs in one second,

this second is called an errored frame
second. Within the specified value of
Error Frame Second Window(s), if the
Frame Second Threshold(s), an alarm
is reported.
A.6.4 QoS Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

533

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the
Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
1 to 8

the ID of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
Mapping Relation Name
Default Map

the name of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this
domain.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
of the C-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.
SVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
of the S-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

534

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP DSCP
0 to 63
l This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the
differentiated services
(DS) field in the packet
and indicates the
service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
MPLS EXP
0 to 7
l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of ingress
packets.
l When a packet in an
egress queue leaves an
NNI port, the NNI port
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
PHB service classes of
egress queues and
egress packet
priorities (MPLS EXP
values), and writes the
obtained priority value
into the EXP field of
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
The MPLS EXP value can
be modified in the default
Diffserv domain (Default
Map) only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

535

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
l This parameter
indicates the per-hop
behavior (PHB)
service class of the
DiffServ domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
l The PHB service class

refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DiffServ node
on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
EF
CS6
CS7
l The PHB service

classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value,
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PHB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

536

Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
l This parameter
indicates the PHB
DiffServ domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3

refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DiffServ node
on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
l The PHB service

AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value
and MPLS value)
contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.
CVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
of the C-VLAN of the
egress packets.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

537

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
of the S-VLAN of the
egress packets.
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
l This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The DSCP refers to
bits 0-5 of the DS field
in the packet and
indicates the service
class and discarding
priority of the packet.
MPLS EXP
0 to 7
l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of egress
packets.
l When a packet arrives
at an NNI port, the
NNI port obtains the
packet priority value
depending on its
trusted priority type
(MPLS EXP value)
and specifies the PHB
packet according to the
mappings between
packet priorities and
PHB service classes.
NOTE
Map) only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

538


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port that uses the
DiffServ domain.
Packet Type
CVLAN
CVLAN
The packets trusted by the

OptiX RTN 950 are the
C_VLAN, S_VLAN and
IP DSCP packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value or
MPLS value. By default,
the untrusted packets are
mapped to the BE service
class for best-effort
forwarding.
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
MPLS-EXP
NOTE
l The trusted packet
priorities of a UNI port
include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the
E-Line services that are
transparently
transmitted end to end
(UNI-UNI), a UNI port
only trusts DSCP value.
l An NNI port carrying
MPLS/PWE3 services
trusts only packets with
MPLS EXP values.
priorities of a QinQ link
NNI port are configured
according to the
A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1.
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from
the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

539


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
2 to 8

the ID of the mapping
relationship of a DS
domain.

relationship of a DS
domain.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.
SVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
priority of the ingress
packets.
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

540

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP DSCP
0 to 63
l This parameter
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
services code point
0-5 of the
and indicates the
service class and
the packet.
MPLS EXP
l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of ingress
packets.
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
egress queues and
egress packet
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
Map) only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

541

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3

refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DS node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
l The PHB service

AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DS
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relationship.
NOTE
AF4.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

542

Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3

refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DS node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
l The PHB service

AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DS
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relationship.
NOTE
AF4.
CVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
client-side VLAN
priority, and the value
7 indicates the highest
priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

543

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
priority of the egress
packets.
server-side VLAN
priority, and the value
priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
l This parameter
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the egress
packets.
services code point
0-5 of the
and indicates the
service class and
the packet.
MPLS EXP
l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of egress
packets.
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
egress queues and
egress packet
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
Map) only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

544


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

the board that uses the
mapping relationships
between DS domains.
Available Port

the available port list from
which you can select the
port that uses the mapping
relationships between DS
domains.
Port

the selected port list. The
ports in the list use the
mapping relationships
between DS domains.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

545

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Type
cvlan
cvlan
l This parameter
the packet.
svlan
ip-dscp
mpls-exp
l The packets trusted by

the OptiX RTN 950
are the C_VLAN,
S_VLAN, IP DSCP
and MPLS packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
or MPLS EXP value.
By default, the
untrusted packets are
mapped to the BE
service class for besteffort forwarding.
NOTE
transparently
MPLS/PWE3 services
MPLS EXP values.
according to the
A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
Navigation Path
1.
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from
the Function Tree.
2.
Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

546

3.
Click the Apply Port tab.
4.
Click Modify.
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description

relation of a DS domain.
Packet Type
CVLAN
CVLAN
The packets trusted by the

OptiX RTN 950 are the CVLAN, S-VLAN, IP
DSCP packets, and MPLS
packets that respectively
contain the C-VLAN
priority, S-VLAN
priority, IP DSCP value
and MPLS EXP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to the
BE service class for besteffort forwarding.
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
MPLS-EXP
NOTE
transparently
MPLS/PWE3 services
MPLS EXP values.
according to the
Board

the board where the port is
located.
Available Port

the available port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

547

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected Port

the selected port.
The selected port is
applied to the DS domain.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path (Port Policy)

1.
Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CoS Configuration tab.
Parameters (Port Policy)

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID

the policy ID of the port.
Policy Name

or specifies the policy
name of the port.
WRR Scheduling Policy

the current WRR
scheduling policy.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

548

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
l The BE, AF1, AF2,

AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service
classes respectively
map eight queuing
entities. The OptiX
RTN 950 provides
different QoS policies
for the queues at
different service
classes.
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

549

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Grooming Police After

Reloading
SP
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
WRR
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:

WRR
l The strict priority (SP)

scheduling algorithm
is designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the
key services is that
higher priorities are
required to minimize
the response delay in
the case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
divides each port into
multiple output subqueues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each subqueue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

550

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
according to the
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter
whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Traffic shaping for an

egress queue uses the
single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.
551

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
l When the buffer queue

is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it
is directly forwarded;
if the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded
at a rate equal to the
PIR.
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
passes the restriction
of the PIR directly
enter the buffer queue
and then are forwarded
PIR.
according to the
CBS(byte)
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

552

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)

is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR
in a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
Navigation Path (WRR Scheduling Policy)

1.
Management > Policy Management > WRR Scheduling Policy from the Function Tree.
Parameters (WRR Scheduling Policy)

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID

the policy ID of the WRR
scheduling policy.
Policy Name

the policy name of the
WRR scheduling policy.
Scheduling Weight
1 to 100
l The eight classes of

service (CoSs),
namely, BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7
correspond to eight
queues.
l The Scheduling
Weight parameter
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
gained by the WRR
queue.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

553

A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path (Creating a Port Policy)

1.
2.
3.
Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters (Creating a Port Policy)

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID

the policy ID of the port.
Automatically Assign
Selected
Deselected

whether to automatically
allocate the policy ID of
the port policy. After this
parameter is selected, the
system automatically
allocates the policy ID,
and then the policy ID
cannot be set manually.

port.
Deselected
Policy Name
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

554

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WRR Scheduling Policy
l This parameter
specifies the desired
WRR scheduling
policy.
l The WRR weight set
in the WRR
scheduling policy only
applies to WRR
queues.
l When the total WRR
weight value of all
WRR queues equals to
100%, the WRR
weight set for each
queue in the WRR
scheduling policy is
the actual WRR
weight. For example,
when AF4, AF3, AF2,
and AF1 are all WRR
queues and their
weight values are
25%, 25%, 25%, and
25% respectively,
each queue is actually
allocated with 25%
total bandwidth.
l When the total WRR
weight value of all
WRR queues is less
than 100%, the actual
WRR weight is
recalculated based on
the proportion
between the WRR
weights of different
queues set in the WRR
scheduling policy. For
example, when AF4,
AF3, AF2, and AF1
are all WRR queues
and their weight values
are 20%, 20%, 20%,
and 20% respectively,
the actual bandwidth
allocation weight of
each queue will be
recalculated based on
the proportion
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

555

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
between the set WRR
weight (1:1:1:1). That
is, each queue is
allocated with 25%
total bandwidth.
CoS
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
l The BE, AF1, AF2,

AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service
classes respectively
map eight queuing
entities. The OptiX
RTN 950 provides
different QoS policies
for the queues at
different service class.
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
transmission.
forwarding. This
service class is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
assured forwarding.
that requires rate
limit.
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

556

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Grooming Police After

Reloading
SP
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
WRR
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:

WRR
l The strict priority (SP)

is designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the
key services is that
higher priorities are
required to minimize
the response delay in
the case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
divides each port into
multiple output subqueues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each subqueue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 950
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

557

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
according to the
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Bandwidth Limit
whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


the PIR is valid.
558

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)

are processed as
PIR.
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
PIR.
according to the
CBS(byte)
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

559

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)

packets can be
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
Navigation Path (Creating a WRR Scheduling Policy)

1.
Management > Policy Management > WRR Scheduling Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create WRR Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters (Creating a WRR Scheduling Policy)

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID

the policy ID of the WRR
scheduling policy.
Assign automatically
Selected
Deselected

whether to automatically
assign the policy ID of the
If this parameter is set to
Selected, the policy ID of
the WRR scheduling
policy can only be
assigned automatically.
Manual assignment is not
available.

Deselected
Policy Name
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

560

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Scheduling Weight
1 to 100
l The eight classes of

service (CoSs),
namely, BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7
correspond to eight
queues.
l The Scheduling
Weight parameter
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
gained by the WRR
queue.
l This parameter must
be set to 0% for SP
queues.
l The scheduling weight
sum of WRR queues
must be 100%.
A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Traffic Classification ID
1 to 512
l This parameter
traffic classification.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports a maximum
of 512 flow
classifications.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

561

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ACL Action
Permit
Permit
l The access control list

(ACL) determines
whether to forward or
discard the packets
that enter the port
according to the
specified matching
rules.
Deny
l When ACL Action is

set to Permit, the
ingress port accepts
and then performs QoS
processing for only the
packets that meet the
specified mapping
rules.
l When ACL Action is
set to Deny, the
ingress port discards
the packets that meet
the specified mapping
rules.
Ingress Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Logical Relation
Between Matched Rules
And
And
l This parameter
specifies the logical
relationship between
the traffic
classification
matching rules.
l The OptiX RTN 950
the logical AND
between multiple
matching rules.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

562

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Match Type
DSCP Value
l After you click Add or

Delete, complex
traffic classification
can be performed on
the traffic that enters
the ingress port
according to the preset
matching rules.
CVlan ID
CVlan priority
SVlan ID
SVlan priority
l In the case a specific

service, complex
traffic classification
can be divided into
basic traffic types
according to the DSCP
value, C-VLAN ID, CVLAN priority, SVLAN ID, or SVLAN priority.
Traffic type is based
on the associated
Ethernet packets.
Therefore, this
parameter is set
according to the packet
type and the planning
information.
Match Value
DSCP Value: 0 to 63
CVlan ID: 1 to 4094

CVlan priority: 0 to 7
SVlan ID: 1 to 4094
SVlan priority: 0 to 7
l If the matching value

of the packets is the
same as the preset
Match Value, the
packets match the
rules of complex
traffic classification.
according to the
Wildcard
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

This parameter has a fixed

value of 0.
563

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
l This parameter
specifies the PHB
service class queue
mapped by the traffic
classification packets.
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4

to empty (-), the traffic
classification packets
map the PHB service
class queue according
the mapping relation
specified in the topic
about Diffserv domain
management.
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE

according to the
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter
whether the CAR
operation is performed
for the flow in the
ingress direction.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

564

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
l When the rate of the

packets is not more
than the CIR, the
packets are marked
blue and pass the CAR
policing. These
packets are first
forwarded in the case
of network congestion.
packets is more than
the CIR but not more
than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can
pass the restriction of
the CAR and are
marked yellow. The
processing method of
the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked
yellow can be
processed according to
the new priority.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

565

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)

the PIR, the packets
that exceed the rate
restriction are marked
red and directly
discarded.
the CIR but not more
than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can
pass the restriction of
the CAR and are
marked yellow. The
processing method of
the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked
yellow can be
processed according to
the new priority.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

566

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CBS(byte)
l During a certain
period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is not
more than the CIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and can be
first forwarded in the
case of network
congestion. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
PBS(byte)
l During a certain
period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is more
than the CIR but not
more than the PIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and
marked yellow. The
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

567

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Coloration Mode
Color Blindness
Color Blindness
l This parameter
specifies the CAR
operation performed
by the equipment on
the packets. The
packets are dyed
according to the result
of the CAR operation.
The dying rule is
determined by the
comparison between
the rate of the packets
and the preset CAR
value.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports Color
Blindness only.
Packet Color
Red
Packets can be dyed in

three colors: red, yellow,
and green. The packets in
red are first discarded.
l This parameter
specifies the method of
handling the packets.
Yellow
Green
Handling Mode
Discard
Pass
Remark
l Discard: The packets

are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are
forwarded.
l Remark: The packets
are remarked.
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

568

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Relabeled CoS
CS7
If the handling method is

set to "Remark", you can
reset the CoS of the
packets.
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Egress Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enable
l This parameter
whether the traffic
shaping is performed
in the egress function.
Enable
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR

set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

569

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
l In the case that no

packets exist in the
egress queue: When
the rate of the packets
is not more than the
CIR, these packets
directly enter the
egress queue.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
enter the egress queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

570

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
l In the case that no

egress queue: If the
rate of the packets is
more than the CIR but
is not more than the
PIR, the packets
whose rate is more
than the CIR enter the
egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the
CIR. If the rate of the
the PIR, the packets
are directly discarded.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
enter the egress queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
according to the
CBS(byte)
l If the rate of the

packets is not more
than the CIR during a
certain period, the
burst packets are
directly transmitted.
The maximum traffic
of the burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

571

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
l If the rate of the

the CIR but is not more
than the PIR during a
certain period, the
burst packets enter the
egress queue. The
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Slot No.

the slot ID.
Port

the port.
CIR (kbit/s)
CBS (byte)
PIR (kbit/s)

the PIR is valid.
If the traffic shaping
function is enabled, OptiX
RTN 950 processes the
packets in the buffer
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

572

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS (byte)
queue through the

following methods when
no packets are available in
the queue.
are processed as
PIR.
packets can be
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
PIR.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

573

A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features

on the EoS/EoPDH Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoS/
EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet
port parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This section describes the parameters for EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services.
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation

This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet line service.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Deselect Display QinQ Shared Service.
3.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Displays the board name.
Service Type
EPL
EPL
Specify the Ethernet service type to EPL.
EVPL(QinQ)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

574

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
l If this parameter is set to

Unidirectional, you only need to create
a service from the service source to the
service sink. That is, there is traffic only
in the direction from the service source
to the sink port.
Unidirectional
l If this parameter is set to Bidirectional,

you need to create a service from the
service source to the service sink and a
service from the service sink to the
service source. That is, there is traffic in
the direction from the service source to
the sink port and in the direction from the
service sink to the source port at the same
time.
Source Port
l Specifies the port of the service source.

l When you create bidirectional Ethernet
services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,
it is recommended that you set the PORT
to the source port.
Source VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095
l This parameter can be set to null, a

number, or several numbers. When
setting this parameter to several
numbers, use the comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen
(-) to represent consecutive numbers. For
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs must be the same
as the value of Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6).
l If this parameter is set to null, all the
services at the source port are used as the
service source.
l If this parameter is not set to null, only
the service that carries a specified VLAN
ID at the source port can be used as the
service source.
Sink Port
l Specifies the port of the service sink.

l This parameter cannot take the same
value as Source Port.
l When you create bidirectional Ethernet
services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,
it is recommended that you set the
VCTRUNK to the sink port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

575

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095
l This parameter can be set to null, a

number, or several numbers. When
setting this parameter to several
numbers, use the comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen
(-) to represent consecutive numbers. For
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs must be the same
as the value of Source VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6).
l If this parameter is set to null, all the
services at the sink port are used as the
service sink.
l If this parameter is not set to null, only
the service that carries a specified VLAN
ID at the sink port can be used as the
service sink.
Table A-12 Parameters for port attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the ports involved in the Ethernet

service.
Port Type
Displays the network attribute of the

Ethernet port.
Port Enabled
Enabled
l When the source port or the sink port is

set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to
Enabled.
Disabled
l This parameter need not be set when the

source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK.
TAG
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid

with VLAN tags (tagged frames), set this
parameter to Tag Aware.
without VLAN tags (untagged frames),
set this parameter to Access.
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set this
parameter to Hybrid.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

576

Table A-13 Parameters for bound paths

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable
Ports
EFP8:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
Displays the level of the bound VC path.
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8
Level
In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter

always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink
l Set this parameter to Bidirectional

unless otherwise specified.
Downlink
Available
Resources
l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
l Displays the available VC4 paths.

l In the case of the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of
VC4-1.
l For EMS6 boards, when a VCTRUNK
needs to bind VC-12 paths, select VC-12
paths only in VC-4-4s.
Available
Timeslots
Specifies the available timeslots.
Bound Path
You need to plan and set this parameter

according to the following principles:
l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is
determined by the actual bandwidth
required by the services.
l The EFP8 board supports 16
VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can
bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and
the total number of bound VC-12 paths
cannot exceed 63.
l For EMS6 boards, their VCTRUNKs 1-7
each support a maximum bandwidth of
100 Mbit/s. If a bandwidth higher than
100 Mbit/s is required, VCTRUNK8 is
recommended.
Number of Bound
Paths
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
Displays the activation status of the bound

VC path.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

577

A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based

Ethernet Line Services
This section describes the parameters associated with QinQ-based Ethernet line services, which
need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Select Display QinQ Shared Service.
3.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Service Type
EPL
EPL
Specifies the service type to EVPL(QinQ).
Bidirectional

Unidirectional, only the service from
the service source to the service sink is
created. That is, the service source is
forwarded only to the sink port.
EVPL(QinQ)
Direction
Bidirectional
Unidirectional

Bidirectional, both the service from the
service source to the service sink and the
service from the service sink to the
service source are created. That is, when
the service source is forwarded to the
sink port, the service sink is forwarded to
the source port.
parameter to Bidirectional.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

578

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Type
l Add S-VLAN
Strip S-VLAN
l When used for private line services,

QinQ can process VLAN tags in
different manners as required.
l Transparently
transmit CVLAN
l When Service Direction is set to

Unidirectional, you can set Operation
Type to Strip S-VLAN.
l Transparently
transmit SVLAN
l Set this parameter according to actual

situations.
l Transparently
transmit SVLAN and CVLAN
l Translate SVLAN
l Translate SVLAN and
transparently
transmit CVLAN
l Strip S-VLAN
Source Port
l Specifies the port where the service

source resides.
l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet
service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you use the PORT
as the source port.
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1-4095
l You can set this parameter to null, a

number, or several numbers. When you
set this parameter to several numbers,
use "," to separate these discrete values
and use "-" to indicate continuous
numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates
numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs set in this
parameter should be the same as the
number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN
(e.g. 1, 3-6).
l When you set this parameter to null, all
the services of the source port work as
the service source.
l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the source
port whose VLAN IDs are included in
the value range of this parameter work as
the service source.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

579

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source S-VLAN
1-4095
l This parameter must be set to a

numerical value.
l Only the service of the source port whose
S-VLAN ID is equal to the value of this
parameter work as the service source.
Sink Port
l Specifies the port where the service sink

resides.
l This parameter must be set to be a value
different from Source Port.
l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet
service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you use the
VCTRUNK as the sink port.
Sink C-VLAN(e.g.
1, 3-6)
1-4095
l You can set this parameter to null, a

number, or several numbers. When you
set this parameter to several numbers,
use "," to separate these discrete values
and use "-" to indicate continuous
numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates
numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs set in this
parameter should be the same as the
number of VLANs set in Source CVLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6).
l When you set this parameter to null, all
the services of the sink port work as the
service sink.
l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the sink
port whose VLAN IDs are included in
the value range of this parameter work as
the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN
1-4095
l This parameter must be set to a

numerical value.
l Only the services of the sink port whose
S-VLAN IDs are equal to the value of
this parameter work as the service sink.
C-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Displays the C-VLAN priority.
S-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Specifies the S-VLAN priority. The bigger

the value, the higher the priority.
Priority 0 to Priority
7
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

580

Table A-15 Parameters of port attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the ports that are configured to

transmit the service.
Port Type

Ethernet port.
Port Enabled
Enabled
l When the source port or the sink port is

set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to
Enabled.
Disabled
l This parameter need not be set when the

source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK.
TAG
This parameter is invalid for QinQ line

services.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable
Ports
EFP8:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8
Level

Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink

Downlink
Available
Resources

VC4-1.
Available
Timeslots
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

581

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound Path

cannot exceed 63.
recommended.
Number of Bound
Paths
Activation Status

VC path.
A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service

This section describes the parameters for Ethernet line services.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

Table A-17 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is not selected)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Service Type
Displays the service type.
Service Direction
Displays the service direction.
Source Port
Displays the port of the service source.
Source VLAN
Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.
Sink Port
Displays the port of the service sink.
Sink VLAN
Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

582

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Activation Status
Displays whether to activate the service.
Table A-18 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is selected)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Service Type
Displays the service type.
Service Direction
Source Port
Displays the port of the service source.
Source C-VLAN
Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.
Source S-VLAN
l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service

source.
l This parameter can be set only for the
QinQ-based EVPL service.
Sink Port
Displays the port of the service sink.
Sink C-VLAN
Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN
l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service

sink.
C-VLAN Priority
l Displays the priority of the C-VLAN.

S-VLAN Priority
l Displays the priority of the S-VLAN.

Activation Status
Table A-19 Parameters for port attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Type

Ethernet port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

583

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Enabled
When the source port or sink port is a PORT,

this parameter indicates whether the port is
enabled.
TAG
Displays the tag attribute of the Ethernet

port.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
Displays the VCTRUNK that binds VC

paths.
Level
Displays the level of the bound VC paths.
Service Direction
Displays the direction of the bound VC

paths.
Bound Path
Displays the serial numbers of the bound VC

paths.
Number of Bound
Paths
Displays the number of the bound VC paths.
Activation Status
Displays whether the bound VC paths are

activated.
A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN

Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge
This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Displays the board that is configured with a

bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

584

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB name
Describes the bridge. It is recommended that

you set this parameter to a character string
that indicates the function of the bridge.
Bridge Type
802.1q
802.1q
l If this parameter is set to 802.1q, an

IEEE 802.1q bridge is created.
802.1d
l If this parameter is set to 802.1d, an

IEEE 802.1d bridge is created.
802.1ad
Bridge Switch
Mode
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(supported by the
IEEE 802.1q
bridge and IEEE
802.1ad bridge,
unsupported by
the IEEE 802.1d
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(supported by the
IEEE 802.1d
bridge and IEEE
802.1ad bridge,
unsupported by
the IEEE 802.1q
bridge)
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(IEEE 802.1q
bridge and the
IEEE 802.1ad
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(IEEE 802.1d
bridge)
l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all

the VLANs share one MAC address
table. When the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has an MAC address
table.
l When the filtering function is enabled at
the ingress port, the ingress port checks
the VLAN tags of all incoming packets.
If the VLAN ID contained in the VLAN
tag of a packet is not included in the
VLAN filtering table, the packet is
discarded. When the filtering function is
disabled at the ingress port, the ingress
port does not check any VLAN tag of the
incoming packets.
Bridge Learning
Mode
Displays the learning mode of the bridge.
Ingress Filter
Displays whether the filtering function is

enabled at the ingress port.
MAC Address Selflearning
Displays whether the MAC address selflearning of the bridge is enabled.
Table A-22 Parameters for mounting services

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
Displays the ID of the logical port on the

bridge.
Mount Port
Displays or specifies which physical port or

VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is
Port Type
Displays the network attribute of the port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

585

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Enabled
Disabled
Displays or specifies whether the port

mounted to the bridge is enabled.
Displays or specifies the tag attribute of the

port mounted to the bridge.
Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID

of the port mounted to the bridge.
Enabled
TAG
Access
Tag Aware
Hybrid
Default VLAN ID
This parameter is valid only when you set

the tag attribute of the port to Access or
Hybrid.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Displays or specifies the working mode of

the port mounted to the bridge.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
GE port: 1000M
Full-Duplex
Active
Service Direction
Displays the direction of the service.
C-VLAN
The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not

support this parameter.
S-VLAN

S-VLAN Priority

C-VLAN Priority

Table A-23 Parameters for mounting configuration

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Mounted
Ports
Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK

on the Ethernet switch board can be mounted
to the bridge.
Selected Mounted
Ports
Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK

on the Ethernet switch board is mounted to
the bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

586


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable
Ports
EFP8:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8
Level

Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink

Downlink
Available
Resources

VC4-1.
Available
Timeslots
Bound Path

cannot exceed 63.
recommended.
Number of Bound
Paths
Activation Status

VC path.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

587

A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad

Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service
This section describes the parameters associated with IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN
services, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Displays the board where the bridge is

configured.
VB Name
This parameter is a string that describes the

bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains
the information about the detailed
application of the bridge.
Bridge Type
802.1q
802.1q
When this parameter is set to 802.1ad,

create the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable (the
802.1q bridge
and the 802.1ad
bridge)
l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all

the VLANs share one MAC address
table. When the bridge uses the IVL
mode, all the VLANs correspond to their
respective MAC address tables.
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(the 802.1d
bridge)
l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN

tag is checked at the ingress port. If the
VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID
of the port defined in the VLAN filtering
table, the packet is discarded. If the
ingress filter is disabled, the preceding
described check is not conducted.
Displays the bridge learning mode.
802.1d
802.1ad
Bridge Switch
Mode
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(supported by the
802.1q bridge
and 802.1ad
bridge,
unsupported by
the 802.1d
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(supported by the
802.1d bridge
and 802.1ad
bridge,
unsupported by
the 802.1q
bridge)
Bridge Learning
Mode
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

588

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Ingress Filter
Displays whether the ingress filter function

is enabled.
MAC Address Selflearning
Displays whether the MAC address selflearning function of the bridge is enabled.
Table A-26 Parameters of service mounting

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
Displays the ID of the logical port of the

bridge.
Mount Port
Displays or specifies the external port or

VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switching
board that is connected to the bridge.
Port Type

external port/VCTRUNK connected to the
bridge.
Port Enabled
Disabled
Displays or specifies whether the external

port connected to the bridge is enabled.
Enabled
TAG
This parameter is invalid in the case of

Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad
bridge.
Default VLAN ID
Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID.

This parameter is valid only when TAG is
set to Access or Hybrid.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation

the external port.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
GE port: 1000M
Full-Duplex
Activate
Displays whether the service is activated.
Service Direction
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

589

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
C-VLAN
Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID that

the data frames carry.
Is valid only when the bridge is an IEEE
802.1ad bridge and Operation Type is set
to Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN.
Specifies the mapping relationship between
the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames
and the S-VLAN ID to be added.
S-VLAN
Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID that

the data frames carry.
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter
specifies that the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be
added with the S-VLAN ID.
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN,
this parameter and C-VLAN specify the
mapping relationship between the SVLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN
ID carried by the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port, this parameter is invalid.
Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN,
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID
to be carried by the data frames that enter
S-VLAN Priority
Displays or specifies the S-VLAN priority.
C-VLAN Priority
Displays or specifies the C-VLAN priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

590

Table A-27 Parameters of service mounting

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Type
Add S-VLAN base

for port
Add S-VLAN base

for port
For the meaning of each operation type, see

Application of the QinQ Technology in
802.1ad Bridge Services.
Add S-VLAN base

for Port and CVLAN
Mount Port
Mount Port and base
for Port and SVLAN
VB Port
Specifies the ID of the logical port of the

bridge.
Mount Port
Selects the external port or VCTRUNK on

the Ethernet switching board that is
connected to the bridge.
Port Type
Displays the port type.
C-VLAN
1-4095
Is valid only when Operation Type is set to

Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN.
Specifies the mapping relationship between
the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames
and the S-VLAN ID to be added.
S-VLAN
1-4095
specifies that the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be
added with the S-VLAN ID.
mapping relationship between the SVLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN
ID carried by the data frames that enter
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

591

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Specifies the S-VLAN priority.
Priority 0 to Priority
7
C-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Specifies the C-VLAN priority.
Port Enabled
Displays or specifies whether the external

port connected to the bridge is enabled.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable
Ports
EFP8:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8
Level

Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink

Downlink
Available
Resources

VC4-1.
Available
Timeslots
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

592

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound Path

cannot exceed 63.
recommended.
Number of Bound
Paths
Activation Status

VC path.
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service

This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.
Navigation Path

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Displays the board that is configured with a

bridge.
VB ID
Displays the ID of the bridge.
VB Name
This parameter is a character string that

describes the bridge. It is recommended that
you set this character string to a value that
indicates the specific purpose of the bridge.
Bridge Type
Displays the type of the bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

593

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Switch
Mode
Displays the switching mode of the bridge.
Bridge Learning
Mode
Displays the learning mode of the bridge.
Ingress Filter
Displays whether the filtering function is

enabled at the ingress port.
MAC Address selfLearning
Displays whether the MAC address selflearning of the bridge is enabled.
Active
Table A-30 Parameters for mounting services

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port

bridge.
Mount Port
Displays or specifies which physical port or

VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is
Port Type
Displays the network attribute of the port

Port Enabled
Displays or specifies whether the port

mounted to the bridge is enabled.
Hub/Spoke
Hub
Hub
Displays or specifies the Hub/Spoke

attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
Spoke
l Hub ports can mutually access each

other.
l Hub ports and Spoke ports can mutually
access each other.
l Spoke ports cannot mutually access each
other.
TAG
Displays or specifies the TAG attribute of

the mounted port in the case of Ethernet
LAN services based on 802.1d bridge or
802.1q bridge.
This parameter is invalid in the case of
Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad
bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

594

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Default VLAN ID
Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID

of the port mounted to the bridge.
This parameter is valid only when you set
the tag attribute of the port to Access or
Hybrid.
Working Mode

the port mounted to the bridge.
Service Direction
Displays the direction of the service.
C-VLAN
Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID

carried by the data frame.
This parameter is valid only when the bridge
is an IEEE 802.1ad bridge and Operation
Type is Add S-VLAN Base for Port and
C-VLAN.
This parameter specifies the mapping
relation between the C-VLAN tag carried by
the data frame and the S-VLAN tag to be
added.
S-VLAN
Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID

carried by the data frame.
specifies the S-VLAN to be added to the
data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad
bridge.
mapping relation between the S-VLAN
tag to be added and the C-VLAN tag
carried by the data frame that enters the
IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN tag
S-VLAN Priority
Displays the priority of the S-VLAN.
C-VLAN Priority
Displays the priority of the C-VLAN.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

595

Table A-31 Parameters for VLAN filtering table

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
Displays the VLAN ID that needs to be

filtered in forwarding.
VB Port

bridge.
Forwarding
Physical Port
Displays the actually specified forwarding

port.
l Selected forwarding ports can send
packets only among themselves.
l Selected forwarding ports can only
forward the packet that carries the
VLAN ID tag. These ports discard the
packet that carries other VLAN tags.
l The broadcast packets transmitted by
any of Selected forwarding ports can
be forwarded only among Selected
forwarding ports.
Activation Status
Displays whether the VLAN ID entry is

valid.
Table A-32 Parameters for VLAN unicast

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
l This parameter is invalid for the 802.1d

bridge and the 802.1ad bridge that adopt
the SVL learning mode. The entry
applies to all VLANs.
l In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the
802.1ad bridge that adopt the SVL
learning mode, the entry applies to only
the VLAN with the ID specified by this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

596

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
l Displays or specifies the static MAC

address.
l A static MAC address is an address that
is set manually. It does not age
automatically and needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static MAC address is used
for the port that receives but does not
forward Ethernet service packets or the
port whose MAC address need not age
automatically.
VB Port

bridge.
Physical Port
l Specifies the Ethernet port that

corresponds to the MAC address.
Aging Status
Displays the aging status of the entries.
Table A-33 Parameters for disabling MAC addresses

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID(e.g.
1,3-6)
Displays or specifies the VLAN ID of the

service. A disabled MAC address is valid for
the VLAN with the ID as specified by this
parameter.
MAC Address
l Displays or specifies the disabled MAC

address. A disabled MAC address is also
called a blacklisted MAC address.
l The data frame that contains a disabled
destination MAC address is discarded. A
disabled MAC address needs to be set
manually and does not age.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
Displays the VCTRUNK to bind VC paths.
Level
Displays the level of the bound VC paths.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

597

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Direction
Displays the direction of the bound VC

paths.
Bound Path
Displays the bound paths.
Number of Bound
Paths
Displays the number of bound paths.
Table A-35 Parameters for self-learned MAC addresses

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
l Displays or specifies the self-learned

MAC address. A self-learned MAC
address is also called a dynamic MAC
address.
l The entries of self-learned MAC
addresses are obtained when the bridge
uses the SVL or IVL learning mode. A
self-learned MAC address ages.
VB Port

bridge.
VLAN ID
l If the bridge uses the SVL learning

mode, this parameter is invalid. That is,
the preset self-learned MAC address
entries are valid for all VLANs.
l If the bridge uses the IVL learning mode,
the preset self-learned MAC address
entries are valid only for the VLAN with
the ID specified by this parameter.
Table A-36 Parameters for VLAN MAC address table capacity

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
Displays the VLAN ID specified for

querying the self-learned MAC addresses.
Actual MAC
Address Table
Capacity
Displays how many MAC addresses are

actually self-learned in the query condition
of a specific VLAN ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

598

Table A-37 Parameters for VB port MAC address table capacity

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port

bridge. The ID is specified for querying the
self-learned MAC addresses.
Actual MAC
Address Table
Capacity
Displays how many MAC addresses are

actually self-learned in the query condition
of a specific VB port.
A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation

This section describes the parameters for creating VLAN filtering tables.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Select an IEEE 802.1q or 802.1ad bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
NOTE
In the case of IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN services, the learning mode of the VB must
be IVL.
3.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
Displays the bridge whose VLAN filtering

table is to be created.
VLAN ID(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095
Specifies the VLAN IDs in the VLAN

filtering table.
l You can set this parameter to a number
or several numbers. When you set this
parameter to several numbers, use "," to
separate these discrete values and use "-"
to indicate continuous numbers. For
example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1,
3, 4, 5, and 6.
Available
forwarding ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Displays the ports mounted to the bridge.

599

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected
forwarding ports
Displays the selected forwarding ports.

l The selected forwarding ports can send
packets only among themselves.
l The selected forwarding ports can only
forward the packet that carries the
VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6) tag. These ports
discard the packet that carries other
VLAN tags.
l The broadcast packet that carries the
VLAN ID(e.g.1,3-6) tag can be
forwarded only among the selected
forwarding ports.
A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries

This section describes the parameters associated with the aging time of MAC address table
entries, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Displays the Ethernet board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

600

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
Aging Time
l 1 to 120 Min
5 Min
l If one entry is not updated in a certain

period, that is, if no new packet from this
MAC address is received to enable the
re-learning of this MAC address, this
entry is deleted automatically. This
mechanism is called aging, and this
period is called the aging time.
l 1 to 120 Hour
l 1 to 12 Day
l If you set this parameter to a very large

value, the bridge stores excessive MAC
address table entries that are outdated,
which exhausts the resources of the
MAC address forwarding table.
l If you set this parameter to a very small
value, the bridge may delete the MAC
address table entry that is required,
which reduces the forwarding
efficiency.
NOTE
The maximum MAC Address Aging Time
supported by EFP8 and EMS6 boards is 12 days.
A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols

This section describes the parameters for EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet protocols.
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

601

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 7
l This parameter
Ethernet ring
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
East Port

instance.
West Port

instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node

Flag
Yes
No
l This parameter
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
No
l Only one node on the

ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
l An RPL owner needs
to balance the traffic
on each link of an
Ethernet ring.
Therefore, it is not
select a convergence
Instead, select the NE
that is farthest away
from the convergence
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

602

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RPL Port
l This parameter
specifies the RPL port.
l There is only one RPL
port and this RPL port
must be the east or
west port on the RPL
owner node.
you set the east port on
an RPL owner as an
RPL Port.
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
the service packets.
l The ID of a Control
VLAN must not be the
same as any VLAN ID
used by Ethernet
services. All ring
nodes should use the
same Control VLAN
ID.
Destination Node
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
01-19-A7-00-00-01
01-19-A7-00-00-01


603

A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection >
ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8

the ID of the ERPS
instance.
East Port

instance.
West Port

instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node

Flag
Yes

whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port

the RPL port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
No

604

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
the service packets or
inband DCN packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
01-19-A7-00-00-01


605

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0 to 10000, in step of 100
l This parameter
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating
the protection
switching sequence
when the ERPS
coexists with other
protection schemes so
that the fault can be
rectified in the case of
other protection
switching (such as
LAG protection)
before the ERPS
occurs. When a node
on the ring detects one
or more new faults, it
starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset
hold-off time is set to a
value that is not 0.
During the hold-off
time, the fault is not
reported to trigger an
ERPS. When the holdoff timer times out, the
node checks the link
status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can
be the same as or
different from the fault
that triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

606

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guard Time(ms)
500
l This parameter
the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the
ring receives the
outdated R-APS
packets, an incorrect
ERPS may occur. The
ERPS guard timer is an
R-APS timer used for
preventing a node on
the ring from receiving
outdated R-APS
packets. When a faulty
node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer
expires.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

607

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(mm:ss)
l This parameter
the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers
to the duration from
the time when the
working channel is
restored to the time
when the switching is
released. When the
working channel is
restored, the WTR
timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not
transmitted. In
addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by
the unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit
Interval(s)
1 to 10

specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level
0 to 7

or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request

the last switching request.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

608

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RB Status

the RB (RPL Blocked)
status of the packets
received by the working
node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB: The RPL is
blocked.
DNF Status

the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
a non-RPL link, and
the node that receives
the packets is
requested to clear the
forwarding address
table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain the
DNF flags. In this
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed
not to clear the
forwarding address
table.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

609

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
State Machine Status

the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receives the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.
Node Carried with

Current Packet

the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
East Port Status

east port.
West Port Status

west port.
A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling

This section describes the parameters for the types of spanning tree protocols and for enabling
the spanning tree protocols.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the Protocol Enabled tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

610


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
Displays the created bridge.
Protocol Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to enable the spanning

tree protocol.
Disabled
l Try to avoid Layer 2 service loopbacks

in the service networking. If no loop
occurs, you need not start the STP/
RSTP.
l If the loop is already formed in the
service networking, you must start the
STP or RSTP.
STP
Protocol Type
RSTP
RSTP

Protocol Enabled is Enabled.
l The protocol type should be set
according to the requirement of the
interconnected Ethernet equipment. The
default value is recommended unless
otherwise specified.
A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters

This section describes the parameters for the spanning tree protocol.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the Bridge Parameters tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

611

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Priority
0-61440
32768
l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge

ID indicate the priority of the bridge.
l When the value is smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the bridge is more
likely to be selected as the root bridge.
l If the priorities of all the bridges on the
STP network take the same value, the
bridge whose MAC address is the
smallest is selected as the root bridge.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of a bridge.
Max Age(s)
6-40
20
l Indicates the maximum age of the

CBPDU packet that is recorded by the
port.
l The greater the value, the longer the
transmission distance of the CBPDU
packet, and the greater the network
diameter. When the value of this
parameter is greater, however, the link
fault detection of the bridge is slower and
thus the network adaptability is reduced.
1-10
Hello Time(s)
l Indicates the interval for transmitting

CBPDU packets through the bridge.
l The greater the value of this parameter,
the less the network resources that are
occupied by the spanning tree. As the
value of this parameter increases,
however, the topology stability
decreases.
4-30
Forward Delay(s)
15
l Indicates the holding time of a port in the

listening state and in the learning state.
l The greater the value, the longer the
delay of the network state change.
Therefore, the topology changes are
slower and recovery in the case of faults
is slower.
1-10
TxHoldCout(per
second)
Indicates how many times the port transmits

CBPDU packets in every second.
A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters

This section describes the parameters associated with the spanning tree protocol, which need to
be set on the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

612

Navigation Path
1.
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Parameters tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Priority
0-240
128
l The most significant eight bits of the port

ID indicate the port priority.
l The smaller the value of this parameter,
the higher the priority.
Port Path Cost
1-200000000
l Indicates the status of the network to

which the port is connected.
l In the case of the bridges on both ends of
the path, set this parameter to the same
value.
Status
Displays the state of a port.
Admin Edge
Attribute
Enabled
Disabled
l Is valid only when the RSTP is used.
Disabled
l Specifies whether to set the port to an

edge port. The edge port refers to the
bridge port that is connected only to the
LAN. The edge port receives the BPDU
and does not transmit the BPDU.
l Set this parameter to Enabled only when
the Ethernet port on the Ethernet board
is directly connected to the data
communication terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In other cases, it is
recommended that this parameter takes
the default value.
Protocol Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether the STP or RSTP is

enabled for the port.
l When this parameter is set to Disabled,
the port does not process or transmit the
BPDU.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

613

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Edge
Detection
Enabled
Disabled
l Is valid only when Admin Edge

Attribute is set to Enabled.
Disabled

if the bridge detects that this port is
connected to the port of another bridge,
the RSTP considers this port as a nonedge port.
l When Admin Edge Attribute is set to
Enabled, set this parameter to
Enabled. In other cases, it is
recommended that this parameter takes
the default value.
A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information

This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning
tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Bridge Running Information tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
Priority
Displays the priority of the bridge. The most

significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate
the priority of the bridge.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of the bridge.
Designed Root
Bridge Priority
Displays the priority of the specified bridge.
Designed Root
Bridge MAC
Address
Displays the MAC address of the specified

bridge.
Root Path Cost
Displays the root path cost. The root path

cost is the path cost of the root port and is
used for calculating the network topology.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

614

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Root Port
Displays the root port of the spanning tree

protocol.
Max Age(s)
Displays the maximum age of the CBPDU

packet that is recorded by the port.
Hello Time(s)
Displays the interval for transmitting the

CBPDU packets through the bridge.
Forward Delay(s)
Displays the holding time of a port in

listening state and in learning state.
HoldCout
Displays the number of times that each port

transmits CBPDU packets per second.
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information

This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Port Running Information tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the logical port of the bridge.
Port ID
Displays the port ID.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Port Path Cost
Displays the port path cost.
Designated Port D
Displays the ID of the specified port.
Designated Root
Bridge Priority
Displays the priority of the specified root

bridge.
Designated Root
Bridge MAC
Address

root bridge.
Designated Path
Cost
Displays the specified path cost.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

615

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Designated Bridge
Priority
Displays the priority of the specified bridge.
Designated Bridge
MAC Address

bridge.
Topology
Detection
Displays the enabled status of topology

detection.
Edge Port Status
Displays the enabled status of the edge port.
Running Time(s)
Displays the duration when the topology

remains unchanged.
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute

This section describes the parameters associated with the point-to-point attribute of the spanning
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Point to Point Attribute tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the internal and external ports on

the Ethernet board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

616

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point-to-point
Attribute
Adaptive
connection
Adaptive connection
l This parameter is valid only when the

RSTP is used.
Link connection
l If this parameter is set to Adaptive

connection, the bridge determines the
actual point-to-point attribute of the port
according to the actual working mode of
the port. If the port works in full-duplex
mode, the actual point-to-point attribute
of the port is True. If the port works in
half-duplex mode, the actual point-topoint attribute of the port is False.
Shared media
l If you set this parameter to Link

connection, the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port is True.
l If you set this parameter to Shared
media, the actual point-to-point attribute
of the port is False.
l Only the port whose actual point to point
attribute is True can transmit the fast
transition request and response
messages.
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling

This section describes the parameters for enabling the IGMP snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the
Function Tree.
2.
Click the Enable IGMP Snooping Protocol tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
VB
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

617

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Enable
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the IGMP

snooping protocol.
Disabled
l If the IGMP multicast router exists on

the interconnected Ethernet network,
enable the IGMP snooping protocol
according to the requirements of the
router.
The Discarded Tag
of the Packet
Excluded in the
Multicast Group
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies the method of

the port to process unknown multicast
packets. When the IEEE 802.1q or
802.1ad bridge receives the multicast
packets whose multicast addresses are
not included in the multicast table, these
packets are considered as unknown
packets.
Protocol Enable is Enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled,
unknown multicast packets are
broadcast in the VLAN.
l Set this parameter as required by the
IGMP multicast server.
1 to 4
Max.NonResponse Times
If the bridge transmits an IGMP group query

packet to the multicast member ports, the
router port starts the timer for the query of
the maximum response time. If the bridge
does not receive the IGMP report packet
within the maximum response time, the
bridge adds one to the no-response times of
the multicast member port. When the noresponse times of the port exceed the preset
threshold, the bridge deletes the multicast
member from the multicast group.
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static

Multicast Table Entries
This section describes the parameters for creating static multicast table entries.
Navigation Path
1.
Function Tree.
2.
Click the Static Multicast Table tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

618

3.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB ID
Displays the ID of the created bridge.
VLAN ID
Specifies the VLAN ID of the static

multicast table entry.
MAC Address
l Specifies the MAC address in the static

multicast table.
Multicast Port
l Specifies the port as an entry in the static

multicast table.
l An entry in the static multicast table does
not age.
A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast

Table Entries
This section describes the parameters for the aging time of multicast table entries.
Navigation Path
1.
Function Tree.
2.
Click the Multicast Aging Time tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

619

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Multicast Aging
Time(Min)
1-120
l Specifies the aging time for multicast

table entries. When a dynamic multicast
table entry is not updated in a certain
period (that is, no IGMP request from
this multicast address is received), this
entry is automatically deleted. This
mechanism is called aging, and this
period is called aging time.
l If this parameter is set to a very great
value, the bridge stores excessive
multicast table entries that are no longer
needed, which exhausts the resources of
the multicast table.
l If this parameter is set to a very small
value, the bridge may delete the
multicast table entry that is needed,
which reduces the forwarding
efficiency.
l The default value is recommended.
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs

This topic describes the parameters for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Attribute Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG No
EFP8: 1-12
Specifies the LAG number.
Specifies the LAG name.
EMS6: 1-8
LAG Name
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

620

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG Type
Static
Static
l Static: A static LAG is created by the

user. To add or delete a member port, you
need to run the Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP) protocol. In a
static LAG, a port can be in selected,
standby, or unselected state. By running
the LACP protocol, devices exchange
aggregation information so that they
share the same aggregation information.
Manual
l Manual: A manual LAG is created by the

user. When you add or delete a member
port, you need not run the LACP
protocol. In a manual LAG, a port can be
in the UP or DOWN state. The system
determines whether to aggregate a port
according to its physical state (UP or
DOWN), working mode, and rate.
Load Sharing
Sharing
Sharing
Non-Sharing
l Sharing: In a sharing LAG, all member

ports always share the traffic load. The
sharing mode can improve bandwidth
utilization on a link. When the member
ports are changed or some member ports
fail, the traffic load of each member port
is automatically re-allocated.
l Non-Sharing: In a non-sharing LAG,
only one member port carries the traffic
load and the other member ports are in
Standby state. Actually, a non-sharing
LAG works in hot-standby mode. When
the active port fails, the system selects a
standby port to substitute for the failed
port, thus preventing a link failure.
Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode
You can set this parameter only when Load

Sharing is Sharing.
Revertive
l You can set this parameter only when

Load Sharing is Non-Sharing.
MAC Sharing Mode

Revertive Mode
Revertive
Non-Revertive
l If this parameter is set to Revertive,

services are automatically switched back
to the working path after the working
path recovers.
l If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, services are still transmitted
in the protection path after the working
path recovers and the LAG remains the
same.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

621

Port Setting Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Main Port
l Specifies the main port in a LAG.

l After a LAG is created, you can add
Ethernet services to the main port only.
That is, services cannot be added to a
slave port.
l When Load Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link connected to the main
port is the working path and the links
connected to the slave ports are
protection paths.
Available Standby
Ports
Selected Standby
Ports
l Specifies the salve port in a LAG.

l After a LAG is created, you need to
perform manual operations to add or
delete a slave port.
Displays the selected slave ports.
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation

This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Priority
0-65535
32768
l This parameter is valid only when LAG

Type of a LAG is set to Static.
l This parameter indicates the priorities of
the ports in a LAG as defined in the
LACP protocol. The smaller the value,
the higher the priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

622

Parameters for the system settings

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
System Priority
0-65535
32768
l This parameter is valid only when LAG

Type of a LAG is set to Static.
l This parameter indicates the priority of a
LAG. The smaller the value, the higher
the priority.
l When the local LAG and the opposite
LAG negotiate through LACP packets,
one can obtain the system priority of the
other. The LAG with the higher system
priority is considered as the comparison
result. Then, the aggregation
information is consistent at both ends. If
the local LAG and the opposite LAG
have the same system priority, the MAC
addresses are compared. The LAG with
a lower MAC address is considered as
the comparison result. Then, the
aggregation information is consistent at
both ends.
System MAC
Address
Displays the MAC address of the system.
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point

Service LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-point service LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the
Function Tree.
2.
Click Query.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
VCTRUNK Port
Displays the VCTRUNK used by the

Ethernet service.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

623

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
l Displays the direction of the Ethernet

service at the port.
l The service direction is set to positive
when the source port is a PORT and the
sink port is a VCTRUNK; the service
direction is set to reverse when the
source port is a VCTRUNK and the sink
port is a PORT.
Yes
LPT
No
Specifies whether to enable the LPT.
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
l Specifies the bearer mode of the LPT

packets.
GFP-CSF
No
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
PORT-Type Port
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000
100
l When the link on which Ethernet

services are transmitted is configured
with other protection schemes, you need
to set the hold-off time of LPT. This
enables the NE to notify the equipment
at both ends of a transmission network of
the fault on the transmission link only
when the other protection schemes fail.
l This parameter is valid only in the
positive direction of LPT.
VCTRUNK Port
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000
100
l When the link on which Ethernet

services are transmitted is configured
with other protection schemes, you need
to set the hold-off time of LPT. This
enables the NE to notify the equipment
at both ends of a transmission network of
the fault on the transmission link only
when the other protection schemes fail.
l This parameter is valid only in the
reverse direction of LPT.
A.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint

Service LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-multipoint service LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the
Function Tree.
624

2.
Click PtoMP LPT. Then, the LPT Management dialog box appears.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for Convergence Points

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Specifies the port of the convergence point.
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet

selected port is a VCTRUNK.
GFP-CSF
Port Hold-Off
Time(ms)
0-10000
When the link on which Ethernet services

are transmitted is configured with other
protection schemes, you need to set the
hold-off time of LPT. This enables the NE
to notify the equipment at both ends of a
transmission network of the fault on the
transmission link only when the other
protection schemes fail.
Parameters for Access Points

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Specifies the port at the access node.
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet

selected port is a VCTRUNK.
GFP-CSF
A.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation

This section describes the parameters for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

625

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mirror Listener
Port
l After the mirroring function of the port

is configured, you can monitor all the
mirrored ports by analyzing the packets
at the mirroring port only. As a result,
you can easily manage the ports.
l Mirror Listener Port indicates the port
that sends the packets copied from
Uplink Listened Port and Downlink
Listened Port.
l Mirror Listener Port cannot be set to a
port that carries any service.
Mirrored
Upstream Port
Mirrored
Downstream Port
l Mirrored Upstream Port and

Mirrored Downstream Port indicate
the ports that copy packets for Mirror
Listener Port.
l Mirrored Upstream Port can be a
PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the
port copies the packets that it receives;
as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the
packets that it transmits. Mirror
Listener Port sends the packets copied
from Mirrored Upstream Port.
l Mirrored Downstream Port can be a
PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the
port copies the packets that it transmits;
as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the
packets that it receives. Mirror Listener
Port sends the packets copied from
Mirrored Downstream Port.
NOTE
The transmit direction and receive direction
mentioned in this section are related to the local
NE.
A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet OAM on the EoS/EoPDH plane.
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs

This topic describes the parameters for creating maintenance domains (MDs).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

626

Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.
3.
Click New and choose Create MD from the drop-down list.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain
Name
For example: MD1
Specifies the name of the

MD.
Maintenance Domain
Level
Consumer High(7)
Operator Low(0)
Specifies the level of the

MD. The greater the value,
the higher the level.
Consumer Middle(6)
Consumer Low(5)
Provider High(4)
Provider Low(3)
Operator High(2)
Operator Middle(1)
Operator Low(0)
A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs

This section describes the parameters for creating maintenance associations (MAs).
Navigation Path
1.
Tree.
2.
In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.
3.
Click New and choose Create MA from the drop-down list.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain
Name
For example: MD1
Displays the MD in which

an MA is to be created.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

627

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Association Name
For example: MA1

the name of the MA,
which is a service-related
domain. By creating MAs,
the connectivity check
(CC) can be performed on
the network that transmits
a particular service
instance.
A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs

This section describes the parameters for creating a maintenance point (MP).
Navigation Path
1.
Tree.
2.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
NULL
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) of

the MP.
NOTE
An MD is not required for a common MP. For
the creation of a common MP, select NULL.
Maintenance
Association Name
NULL
Specifies the maintenance association (MA)

of the MP.
NOTE
An MA is not required for a common MP. For
the creation of a common MP, select NULL.
Node
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Specifies the port where you want to create

an MP.

628

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
l Configures the ID of the VLAN to which

the service of the MP belongs. The
information is contained in the OAM
data packet. The MPs with the same
VLAN ID in an MD can communicate
with each other.
l This parameter can be null in the case of
PORT services, but need to be set in the
case of PORT+VLAN services.
MP ID
Standard MP:
00-00-0000 to FFFF-1FFF
00-00-0000
Uniquely identifies an MP. From the highest

to the lowest, the first byte indicates the
network number, the second byte indicates
the number of the node in the local network,
and the third and forth bytes indicate the ID
of the MP on the network node. The MP ID
must be unique in the entire network.
MEP
Specifies the MP type defined in IEEE

802.1ag. An MP can be a maintenance
association end point (MEP) or a
maintenance association intermediate point
(MIP).
SDH
l Specifies the MEP direction.
Common MP:
00-00-0000 to FFFF-FF00
Type
MEP
MIP
Direction
SDH
IP
l Set this parameter to SDH if the OAM

data initiated by the MEP travels through
the Ethernet switching unit on the local
NE. Otherwise, set this parameter to IP.

Table A-49 Parameters for advanced attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
Consumer High(7)
Provider High(4)
Specifies the level of a common MP. The

greater the value, the higher the level.
Consumer Middle
(6)
Consumer Low(5)
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for a common MP
(NULL).
Provider High(4)
Provider Low(3)
Operator High(2)
Operator Middle(1)
Operator Low(0)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

629

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CC Status
Active
Inactive
Specifies whether to enable the connectivity

check (CC) function at an MP.
5000
l Specifies the timeout duration of an LB

test.
Inactive
LB Timeout(ms)
3000 to 60000, in
step of 100
l This parameter can be set only for an

MEP.
LT Timeout(ms)
3000 to 60000, in
step of 100
l Specifies the timeout duration of an LT

test.
5000

MEP.
CCM Sending
Period(ms)
Standard MP:
Standard MP
1000
1000
10000
Common MP:
6000
5000
600000
Common MP:
Specifies the interval for sending the CCM

packet at the MP where the CC test is
performed.
l If this parameter takes a very small
value, service bandwidth decreases
significantly.
l If this parameter takes a very large value,
the CC test will become less capable in
detecting service interruptions. The
default value is recommended.
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100

MEP.
A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB

This section describes the parameters for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
1.
Tree.
2.
Select the node that requires an LB test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LB.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LB Source MP ID

source maintenance point
in the LB test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

630

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LB Sink MP ID
Specifies the ID of the sink

maintenance point in the
LB test.
Test Result
Indicates the result of one

LB test.
Test based on the MAC

Address
Selected
Not selected
Select this parameter for

an LB test based on MAC
addresses.
Not selected
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
for a standard MP.
LB Sink MP MAC
Address
Specifies the MAC

address of the sink
maintenance point in the
LB test. This parameter is
valid only in the case of
Test based on the MAC
Address.
A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT

This topic describes the parameters for enabling the LT.
Navigation Path
1.
Tree.
2.
Select the node that requires an LT test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LT.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LT Source MP ID
Specifies the source MP in

the LT test.
LT Sink MP ID
Specifies the sink MP in

the LT test.
Responding MP ID
Displays the MP that

responds to the test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

631

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Responding MP Type

MP that responds to the
test.
Hop Count
Displays the count of hops

between the source MP
and the responding MP.
That is, the number of
responding MPs from the
source MP to a certain
responding MP in an LT
test.
Test Result
Indicates the result of one

LT test.
A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter

This section describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PORT

external Ethernet port.
Enable OAM Protocol
Enabled
Disabled

point-to-point OAM
protocol is enabled.
Disabled
After the OAM protocol is

enabled, the current
Ethernet port starts to use
the preset mode to set up
an OAM connection with
the opposite end.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

632

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Working Mode
Active
Active
The negotiation mode of

Ethernet port OAM
includes active and
passive modes.
Passive
If this parameter is set to

Active, the port can
initiate an OAM
connection. If this
parameter is set to
Passive, the port can only
respond to the OAM
connection requests from
the opposite end.
Remote Alarm Support
for Link Event
Enabled
Max OAM Packet

Length(byte)
Enabled

detected link event is
notified to the opposite
end (for example, error
frame periods, error
frames, and error frame
seconds).
Displays the maximum

length of the OAM
packets.
Disabled
This parameter takes the

same value as the
Maximum Frame
Length of the external
port.
-
Loopback Status
Displays the loopback

status.
A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring

This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

633


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PORT
For example:
PORT1
Displays the name of the external Ethernet

port.
Error Frame
Monitor Window
(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000
In the specified Error Frame Monitor

Window (ms), if the number of error frames
exceeds the specified Error Frame
Monitor Threshold (Entries) due to the
link degradation, the link event alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(frames)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
Specifies the threshold of monitoring error

frames.
Error Frame
Period Window
(frames)
1488 to 89280000,
in step of 1
GE port: 1488000
Within the specified value of Error Frame

Period Window (frames), if the number of
error frames on the link exceeds the preset
value of Error Frame Period Threshold
(frames), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame
Period Threshold
(frames)
1 to 89280000, in
step of 1
Specifies the threshold of monitoring the

error frame period.
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
1
60
If any error frame occurs in one second, this

second is called an error frame second.
FE port: 148800
Within the specified value of Error Frame

Second Window(s), if the number of error
frames on the link exceeds the preset value
of Error Frame Second Threshold (s), an
alarm is reported.
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
Specifies the threshold of monitoring error

frame seconds.
A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter

This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM errored frames at the Ethernet
port.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Remote OAM parameter tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

634


Field
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

remote Ethernet port.
Remote OAM Working

Mode

mode of the remote
Ethernet port.
Remote Alarm Support

for Link Event
Displays whether the

remote Ethernet port can
notify link events to the
local port.
Remote Side Loopback

Response
Displays how the remote

Ethernet port responds to a
loopback.
Unidirectional
Operation

remote Ethernet port
supports unidirectional
operations.
Max.OAM Packet
Length (byte)

OAM packet size
supported by the remote
Ethernet port.
A.7.4 QoS Parameters

This section describes the parameters for the QoS on the EoS/EoPDH plane.
A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows

This parameter describes the parameters for creating flows.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Flow Configuration tab.
3.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

635


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Flow Type
Port Flow
Port Flow
l Port flow: The packets from a certain

port are classified as a type of flow. The
Ethernet service associated with this
flow type is the line service or Layer 2
switching service that uses this port as
the service source.
Port+VLAN Flow
Port+SVLAN Flow
Port+CVLAN
+SVLAN Flow
Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow
l Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are

from a certain port and have a specified
VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
The associated Ethernet service of this
flow type is the EVPL service (based on
VLAN) or EVPLAN service (based on
the 802.1q bridge) that uses this PORT
+VLAN as the service source.
l Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that are
from a certain port and have a specified
SVLAN ID are classified as a type of
flow. The associated Ethernet service of
this flow type is the EVPL service (based
on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on
the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT
+SVLAN as the service source.
l Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The
packets that are received from or
transmitted to a certain port and have a
specified CVLAN+SVLAN are
classified as a type of flow. The
associated Ethernet service of this flow
type is the EVPL service (based on
QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the
802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT
+CVLAN+SVLAN as the service
source.
l Port+VLAN+Priority flow: The packets
that are from a certain port and have a
specified VLAN ID and a specified
VLAN priority are classified as a type of
flow. The associated Ethernet service of
this flow type is the line service that uses
this Port+VLAN+Priority as the service
source.
NOTE
An EMS6 board does not support Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

636

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
EFP8: PORT1 to
PORT9,
VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK16
PORT1
l When the associated service is the line

service, set this parameter to the source
port or sink port of the associated
Ethernet service.
EMS6: PORT1 to
PORT7,
VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK8
1 to 4095
VLAN ID
l When the associated service is the Layer

2 switching service, set this parameter to
a mounted port of the bridge.
1
l This parameter is valid only when Flow

Type is set to Port+VLAN Flow or Port
+VLAN+Priority Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source VLAN
of the associated Ethernet service.
C-VLAN
1 to 4095

Type is set to Port+CVLAN+SVLAN
Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source CVLAN of the associated Ethernet
service.
1 to 4095
S-VLAN

Type is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or
Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source S-VLAN
of the associated Ethernet service.
Priority

Type is PORT+VLAN+Priority Flow.
l This parameter indicates the VLAN
priority of the flow-associated Ethernet
services.
NOTE
An EMS6 board does not support Priority.
A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR

This section describes the parameters for creating CAR.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CAR Configuration.
3.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

637


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CAR ID
EFP8: 1 to 512
This parameter identifies a CAR operation,

and is used to bind a flow to an associated
CAR operation.
Disabled
Indicates whether to enable the CAR

operation performed on the flow bound to
the CAR.
l Indicates the CIR. When the rate of a

packet is not more than the CIR, this
packet passes the restriction of the CAR
and is forwarded first even in the case of
network congestion.
EMS6: 1 to 1024
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Committed
information Rate
(kbit/s)
EFP8: 0 to 100032,
in steps of 64
EMS6 (FE ports): 0
to 102400, in steps
of 64
l The value of this parameter should not

be more than the PIR.
EMS6 (GE ports): 0

to 1024000, in steps
of 64
Committed Burst
Size (kbyte)
EFP8: 0 to 1024
Peak information
Rate (kbit/s)
EFP8: 0 to 100032,
in steps of 64
Indicates the CBS. When the rate of a packet

that passes the restriction of the CAR is not
more than the CIR in a certain period, some
packets can burst. These packets can be
forwarded first even in the case of network
congestion. The maximum traffic of the
burst packets is determined by the CBS.
Note that the CBS has an inherent size, and
this parameter indicates the increment value
only. The inherent size of the CBS is
determined by the CIR. The greater the CIR,
the greater the CBS.
l Indicates the PIR. When the rate of a

packet is more than the PIR, the packet
that exceeds the rate restriction is
directly discarded. When the rate of
packets is more than the CIR but is lower
than or equal to the PIR, these packets
whose rate exceeds the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR and are marked
yellow.
EMS6: 0 to 16384
EMS6 (FE ports): 0

to 102400, in steps
of 64
EMS6 (GE ports): 0
of 64

be more than the port bandwidth.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

638

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Burst
Size (kbyte)
EFP8: 0 to 1024
Indicates the MBS. When the rate of the

packet that passes the restriction of the CAR
is more than the CIR but is not more than
the PIR, some packets can burst and are
marked yellow. The maximum traffic of the
burst packets is determined by the MBS.
Note that the MBS has an inherent size, and
this parameter indicates the increment value
only. The inherent size of the MBS is
determined by the PIR. The greater the PIR,
the greater the MBS.
EMS6: 0 to 16384
A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS

This section describes the parameters for creating CoS.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS ID
EFP8: 1-64
This parameter identifies a CoS operation,

and is used to bind a flow to an associated
CoS operation.
EMS6: 1-65535
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

639

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS Type
simple
simple
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple,

all the packets in this flow are directly
scheduled to a specified egress queue.
VLAN Priority
IPTOS
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN

priority, the packets in this flow are
scheduled to specified egress queues
according to the user priorities specified
in the VLAN tags of these packets.
DSCP
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP,

the packets in this flow are scheduled to
specified egress queues according to
differentiated services code point
(DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets.
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to IP TOS,
the packets in this flow are scheduled to
specified egress queues according to the
TOS values carried in the IPv4 packets.
This CoS type is applicable to IPv4
packets.
CoS parameter
Displays the CoS parameters corresponding

to different CoS types.
CoS Priority
0-7
This parameter determines to which egress

queue a packet is schedule.
l Each Ethernet port on the EFP8/EMS6
board supports eight egress port queues.
Queues 1-8 respectively correspond to
the CoS priorities from 0 to 7.
l Queue 8, with the CoS priority of 7, is as
SP queue. Queues 1-7, with the CoS
priorities from 0 to 6, are WRR queues.
The weighted proportion of these WRR
queues is 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from
priority 0 to priority 6). On the EFP8
board, the weighted proportion of these
WRR queues cannot be changed. On the
EMS6 board, the weighted proportion of
these WRR queues can be changed.
l If the traffic shaping feature of some
queues is enabled, bandwidth is
allocated first to the queues whose traffic
shaping feature is enabled based on the
CIR. The remaining bandwidth is
allocated to the eight queues by using the
SP+WRR algorithm.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

640

A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS

This section describes the parameters for creating CAR/CoS.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Flow Configuration tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Flow Type
Displays the type of a flow.
VB ID
Port
Displays the port where a flow is to be

created.
C-VLAN
l Displays the C-VLAN.

l This parameter is valid is Flow Type is
Port+VLAN Flow, Port+CVLAN
+SVLAN Flow, or Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow.
S-VLAN
l Displays the S-VLAN.

l This parameter is valid when Flow
Type is Port+SVLAN Flow or Port
+CVLAN+SVLAN Flow.
Priority
l Displays the priority of the flow.

l This parameter is valid when Flow
Type is Port+VLAN+Priority Flow.
Bound CAR
None
This parameter indicates the CAR ID

corresponding to a CAR operation.
Different CAR IDs should be bound to
different flows, even though the parameters
of the CAR operations are the same.
Bound CoS
None
Indicates the CoS ID that corresponds to a

CoS operation.
A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress

Queues
This section describes the parameters for shaping management of egress queues.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

641

Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required Ethernet switching board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
Click the Port Queue Information tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Queue
Displays the queue name.
Status
Enabled
Disabled
Indicates whether to enable the traffic

shaping feature of an egress queue.
l When the rate of a packet is not more

than the CIR, this packet directly enters
the egress queue.
Disabled
CIR (kbit/s)
EFP8: 0 to 100032,
in steps of 64
EMS6 (FE ports): 0
to 102400, in steps
of 64

be more than the PIR.
EMS6 (GE ports): 0

of 64
DCBS (kbyte)
Displays the excess burst size.
PIR (kbit/s)
EFP8: 0 to 100032,
in steps of 64
l When the rate of a packet is more than

the PIR, the packet that exceeds the rate
restriction is directly discarded. When
the rate of packets is more than the CIR
but not more than the PIR, the packets
that exceed the restriction of the CIR
enter the buffer of the CIR. When the
buffer overflows, the packets are marked
yellow and enter the egress queue, which
enables the packets to be discarded first
in the case of queue congestion.
EMS6 (FE ports): 0

to 102400, in steps
of 64
EMS6 (GE ports): 0
of 64

be more than the port bandwidth.
DMBS (kbyte)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Displays the maximum excess burst size.

642

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Scheduling Mode
SP
Queue 1: WRR
WRR
Queue 2: WRR
By default, queue 8 (with the CoS priority

of 7) of the EMS6 board is the SP queue, and
queues 1-7 (with the respective CoS priority
of 0-6) are the WRR queues and their
weights are in the proportion of
1:2:8:16:32:64.
Queue 3: WRR
Queue 4: WRR
Queue 5: WRR
Queue 6: WRR
Queue 7: WRR
Queue 8: SP
The scheduling principles of the SP+WRR

are as follows:
l A port immediately transmits the packets
in the SP queue and can transmit the
packets in the WRR queue only when no
packets exist in the SP queue.
l If multiple SP queues exist on a port, the
port compares the SP queues according
to their priorities (queue 8 has the highest
priority and queue 1 has the lowest
priority).
l According to the fixed weight value, you
can allocate the time slice to each WRR
queue. Then, the port transmits the
packets in the corresponding WRR
queue in each time slice. If a WRR queue
in a time slice does not contain any
packets, the WRR queue removes this
time slice and then transmits the packets
in the corresponding WRR queue in the
next time slice.
Weight
An integer ranging
from 1 to 64
Queue 1: 1
Queue 2: 2
Queue 3: 4
Queue 4: 8
By default, queue 8 (with the CoS priority

of 7) of the EMS6 board is the SP queue, and
queues 1-7 (with the respective CoS priority
of 0-6) are the WRR queues and their
weights are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64.
Queue 5: 16
Queue 6: 32
Queue 7: 64
Queue 8: -
A.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping

This section describes the parameters associated with egress port shaping management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
Click the Port Shaping tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

643


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Status
Enabled
Disabled

the traffic shaping at a port.
In the case of an EMS6 board, the PIR of a

port meets the following constraints:
Disabled
PIR (kbit/s)
EMS6 (FE ports): 0

to 102400, in steps
of 64
l The PIR of the port is equal to or more

than the PIR of any queue at this port.
EMS6 (GE ports): 0

of 64
l The PIR of the port is equal to or more

than the sum of the CIRs of all the queues
at this port.
A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the EoS/EoPDH plane.

This section describes the parameters for Ethernet external ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select External Port.

Table A-61 Parameters for the basic attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the name of the external port.
Name
Displays or specifies the name of the

external port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

644

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
l If the port gains access to services, set

this parameter to Enabled. Otherwise,
set this parameter to Disabled.
Disabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled for the

port that does not access services, an
ETH_LOS alarm may be generated.
This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an
EFP8 board.
EMS6 board.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
EFP8:
l AutoNegotiation
l Different types of Ethernet ports support

different working modes.
l If the opposite port works in autonegotiation mode, set this parameter to
Auto-Negotiation.
l 10M HalfDuplex
l If the opposite port works in full-duplex

mode, set this parameter to 10M FullDuplex or 100M Full-Duplex,
depending on the rate of the opposite
port.
l 10M FullDuplex
l 100M HalfDuplex
l 100M FullDuplex
l If the opposite port works in half-duplex

mode, set this parameter to 10M HalfDuplex or 100M Half-Duplex,
depending on the rate of the opposite
port, or set this parameter to AutoNegotiation.
EMS6:
l AutoNegotiation
l 10M HalfDuplex
l GE optical ports on an EMS6 board

support only Auto-Negotiation and
1000M Full-Duplex modes.
l 10M FullDuplex
l 100M HalfDuplex
NOTE
This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an EFP8
board.
l 100M FullDuplex
This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an EMS6

board.
l 1000M FullDuplex
Maximum Frame
Length
EFP8: 1518 to 2000

EMS6: 1518 to 9600
1522
l Set this parameter to a value greater than

the maximum length of all the data
frames to be transmitted.
l The default value is recommended if the
jumbo frame is not considered and the
data frames contain only one layer of
VLAN tags or even no tags. The value of
1526 or greater is recommended if the
data frames contain two layers of tags,
such as QinQ.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

645

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Physical
Parameters
Displays the actual working status of a

PORT.
EFP8 board.
EMS6 board.
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Loopback
l A MAC loopback is to loop back the

Ethernet frames transmitted to the
opposite port.
l Use the default value unless otherwise
specified.
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Loopback
l A PHY loopback is to loop back the

Ethernet physical signals transmitted to
the opposite port.
l Use the default value unless otherwise
specified.
EFP8 board.
EMS6 board.
Table A-62 Parameters for flow control

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
NonAutonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode
Disabled
Disabled

Working Mode is not set to AutoNegotiation.
Enable Symmetric
Flow Control Mode
Send Only
Receive Only
l If this parameter is set to Enable

Symmetric Flow Control Mode, the
port can send PAUSE frames and
process the received PAUSE frames.
l If this parameter is set to Send Only, the
port can send PAUSE frames in the case
of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l If this parameter is set to Receive Only,
the port can process the received PAUSE
frames but cannot send PAUSE frames
in the case of congestion.
l Set this parameter to the same as the nonautonegotiation flow control mode of the
opposite port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

646

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode
Disabled
Disabled

Working Mode is Auto-Negotiation.
Enable
Dissymmetric Flow
Control

Symmetric Control, the port can send
PAUSE frames and process the received
PAUSE frames.
Enable Symmetric
Control

Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port
can send PAUSE frames in the case of
congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control

Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow
Control, the port can function as
follows:
Sends and processes PAUSE frames.
Sends but does not process PAUSE
frames.
Processes but does not send PAUSE
frames.
autonegotiation flow control mode of the
opposite port.
EFP8 board.
EMS6 board.
Table A-63 Parameters for the tag attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

647

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
l With different tag attributes, the port

processes frames in different modes. For
details, see Table A-66.
Access
Hybrid
l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the

port processes the frames with VLAN
tags (or tagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Access if the port
processes the frames without VLAN tags
(or untagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port
processes the tagged frames and
untagged frames.
Default VLAN ID
1-4095

l For the usage of this parameter, see
Table A-66.
VLAN Priority
0-7

Table A-66.
l When the VLAN priority is required for
traffic classification or other purposes,
set this parameter as required. Use the
default value unless otherwise specified.
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to check the incoming

packets according to the tag attribute.
Table A-64 Parameters for the network attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

648

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Attributes
UNI
UNI
l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port

processes data frames according to the
tag attribute.
C-Aware
S-Aware
l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or SAware, the port processes the data
frames by using the processing method
of QinQ services.
l Set this parameter to C-Aware or SAware when the port processes QinQ
services. Otherwise, this parameter takes
the default value.
Table A-65 Parameters for the advanced attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to restrict

the traffic of broadcast packets according to
the proportion of the broadcast packets to
the total packets. Set this parameter to
Enabled when a broadcast storm may occur
at the opposite port.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold
10%-100%
30%
When the proportion of the received

broadcast packets to the total packets
crosses the threshold, the port discards the
received broadcast packets. Set this
parameter to a value greater than the
proportion when no broadcast storm occurs.
The value of 30% or greater is
recommended.
Traffic Threshold
(Mbit/s)
EFP8:
Specifies the traffic threshold of the port.

You can specify the traffic monitoring
period by setting Port Traffic Threshold
Time Window(Min).
Enabled
l 0 to 100 (PORT1
to PORT8)
l 0 to 1000
(PORT9)
EMS6:
l 0 to 1000
(PORT1 and
PORT2)
l 0 to 100 (PORT3
to PORT6)
l 0 to 1000
(PORT7)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

649

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Traffic
Threshold Time
Window(Min)
0-30
Specifies the traffic monitoring period.

l If Port Traffic Threshold Time
Window(Min) is set to 0, an associated
alarm is reported at the moment when the
traffic received at the port crosses the
value of Traffic Threshold(Mbit/s).
l If the Port Traffic Threshold Time
Window(Min) is set to a value other
than 0, an associated alarm is reported
only when the traffic received at the port
always crosses the value of Traffic
Threshold(Mbit/s) in the monitoring
period.
Loop Detection
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled

loop detection, which is used to check
whether a loop exists on the port.
Table A-66 Methods used by ports to process data frames

Direction
Ingress port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Receives the frame.
Discards the frame.
Receives the frame.
Untagged frame
Discards the frame.

frame after adding to
the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.

the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.

650

Direction
Egress port
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Transmits the frame.
The port strips the

VLAN tag from the
frame and then
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

This section describes the parameters for Ethernet internal ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select Internal Port.

Table A-67 Parameters for the tag attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the name of the internal port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

651

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
l With different tag attributes, the port

processes frames in different modes. For
details, see Table A-72.
Access
Hybrid
l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the

port processes the frames with VLAN
tags (or tagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Access if the port
processes the frames without VLAN tags
(or untagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port
processes the tagged frames and
untagged frames.
Default VLAN ID
1-4095

Table A-72.
VLAN Priority
0-7

l For the usage of this parameter, refer to
Table A-72.
l When the VLAN priority is required for
traffic classification or other purposes,
set this parameter as required. The
default value is recommended unless
otherwise specified.
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to check the incoming

packets according to the tag attribute.
Table A-68 Parameters for encapsulation or mapping

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Mapping Protocol
GFP
GFP
The default value is recommended.
HDLC
The EFP8 board supports GFP only.
LAPS
Scramble
Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
Unscrambled
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
l Indicates the scrambling polynomial

used by the mapping protocol.

652

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Set Inverse Value

for CRC

value of the CRC field defined in the
LAPS or HDLC encapsulation frame
format will be reversed. This means that
this parameter takes effect only if
Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS or
HDLC.
l Set Set Inverse Value for CRC to the
same value for the VCTRUNKs at both
ends.
Check Field
Length
FCS32
FCS32
No
l When the Ethernet board uses the GFP

mapping protocol, set this parameter to
FCS32 or No.
l When you set this parameter to FCS32,
a 32-bit FCS is used.
FCS Calculated Bit

Sequence
Big endian
Big endian
Little endian
l When you set this parameter to Big

endian, the least significant byte of the
FCS is placed first and the most
significant byte is placed last.
l When you set this parameter to Little
endian, the most significant byte of the
FCS is placed first and the least
significant byte is placed last.
Table A-69 Parameters for the network attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Attributes
UNI
UNI
l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port

processes data frames according to the
tag attribute.
C-Aware
S-Aware
l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or SAware, the port processes the data
frames by using the processing method
of QinQ services.
l Set this parameter to C-Aware or SAware when the port processes QinQ
services. Otherwise, this parameter takes
the default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

653

Table A-70 Parameters for the LCAS

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Enabling LCAS
Disabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to enable the LCAS

function.
Enabled
l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the

number of virtual containers for
mapping required services to meet the
bandwidth needs of the applications. As
a result, the bandwidth utilization is
improved.
LCAS Mode
Huawei Mode
Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
l Indicates the sequence in which the

LCAS sink sends the MST control
packet and Rs-Ack control packet.
l When you set this parameter to Huawei
Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the RsAck and then sends the MST.
l When you set this parameter to
Standard Mode, the LCAS sink first
sends the MST and then sends the RsAck.
l If the equipment at the opposite end is
the third-party equipment and does not
support the Huawei mode, set this
parameter to Standard Mode.
Otherwise, set this parameter to Huawei
Mode.
Hold Off Time(ms)
An integer ranging
from 0, 2000 to
10000, in the
increments of 100
2000
l When a member link is faulty, the LCAS

performs switching after a delay of time
to prevent the situation where an NE
simultaneously performs a protection
switching such as SNCP and performs an
LCAS switching. This parameter
specifies the duration of the delay.
WTR Time(s)
0-720
300
l When the time after a member link is

restored to normal reaches the specified
value of this parameter, the VCG uses
the restored member link.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

654

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TSD
Disabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether the TSD is used as a

condition for determining whether a
member link is faulty. In the case of the
VC-12, the TSD refers to the BIP_SD.
In the case of the VC-3, the TSD refers
to the B3_SD_VC3.
Enabled

Min. MembersTransmit Direction
2-256
16
l Specifies the minimum number of

members in the transmit direction. After
the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT
alarm is reported when the number of
effective members in the transmit
direction becomes lower than the
minimum number specified by this
parameter.
Mini. MembersReceive Direction
2-256
16
l Specifies the minimum number of

members in the receive direction. After
the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT
alarm is reported when the number of
effective members in the receive
direction becomes lower than the
minimum number specified by this
parameter.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable
Ports
EFP8:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8
Level

Service Direction
Bidirectional
Uplink
Downlink
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Bidirectional


655

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available
Resources

VC4-1.
Available
Timeslots
Bound Path

cannot exceed 63.
recommended.
Number of Bound
Paths
Activation Status

VC path.
Table A-72 Methods used by ports to process data frames

Direction
Ingress port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Receives the frame.
Discards the frame.
Receives the frame.
Untagged frame
Discards the frame.

the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.

the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.

656

Direction
Egress port
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Transmits the frame.
The port strips the

VLAN tag from the
frame and then
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

This section describes the parameters for setting the type field of QinQ frames.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Advance Attribute > QinQ Type Area Settings from the Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Displays the Ethernet board on which the

type field of QinQ frames needs to be set.
If the Ethernet board is the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of EFP8.
If the Ethernet board is the EMS6 board, this
parameter always takes the value of EMS6.
QinQ Type Area

(Hexadecimal)
81 00
8100
88 A8
91 00
Specifies the type field of QinQ frames. Set

this parameter according to the type field of
the accessed QinQ frames.
0600 to FFFF
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

657

A.8 RMON Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
1.
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
This parameter specifies the object to be

monitored.
Sampling Period
5 to 150
This parameter specifies the duration of the

monitoring period.
Display
Accumulated
Value
Selected
Deselected

displaying the performance events.
Deselected
l If this parameter is not selected, the

displayed value is an increment
compared to the value that is collected in
last sampling period and stored in the
register.
l If this parameter is selected, the
displayed value is an absolute value that
is currently stored in the register.
Display Mode
Graphics
List
List

l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend
Color
Description
l This parameter indicates the description

of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

658

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Event
l This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.
A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the History Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
The parameter indicates the object to be

monitored.
Ended from/to
This parameter specifies the start time and

end time of the monitoring period.
History Table
Type
30-Second
30-Second
This parameter specifies the monitoring

period.
List

30-Minute
Custom Period 1
Custom Period 2
Display Mode
Graphics
List
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the

number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend
Color
Description
l This parameter indicates the description

of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event
l This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

659

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Statistical Item
This parameter indicates the performance

items to be monitored.
Statistical Value
This parameter indicates the statistical value

of the monitored performance items.
Time Flag
This parameter indicates the time point of

each performance event.
A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control

Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies

whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
Enabled

whether to enable the 30-Minute
Disabled

whether to enable Custom Period 1.
Disabled

whether to enable Custom Period 2.
300 to 43200
(Custom Period 1)
900(Custom Period
1)
300 to 86400
(Custom Period 2)
86400(Custom
Period 2)

monitoring period in Custom Period 1
and Custom Period 2.
History Register
Count
1 to 50
16
RMON Monitor
Start Time
Disabled
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
Period Length(s)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
6(Custom Period 2)
-
l The value must be an integer multiple of

30.
quantity of the history registers.
This parameter specifies the RMON start
time.

660

A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l
Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
This parameter indicates the object to be

collected.
30-Second
Enabled

whether to enable the 30-Second
Disabled
NOTE
In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled

l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,
Not Supported is displayed for this
parameter.
Custom Period 1
Enabled
Disabled

whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 1.
the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled

whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 2.
the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

661

Event Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Event
This parameter indicates the performance

event to be monitored.
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled

whether to enable the monitoring function
based on 30-Second.

Disabled

based on Custom Period 1Custom Period
1 Monitor.
Disabled

based on Custom Period 2Custom Period
2 Monitor.
Report All

threshold detection method.
Disabled
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
Threshold Detect
Report All
Do Not Detect
l If the number of detected events reaches

the preset threshold, the events are
reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the
events are not reported to the NMS.
Report Only the

Upper Threshold
Report Only the
Lower Threshold
l If an event does not support this

parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Upper Threshold

upper threshold. If the number of
performance events exceeds the preset
upper threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Lower Threshold

lower threshold. If the number of
performance events is less than the preset
lower threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Threshold Unit
This parameter indicates the unit of each

threshold of the performance events.
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

662

NOTE
For parameters for PW-carried E-Line services, see A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet
Features on the Packet Plane.
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels.
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels

This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSR ID
0.0.0.0
the LSR ID of an NE.
On a PSN, each NE is
assigned a unique LSR
ID.
l This parameter must
be set in IPv4 address
format.
Start of Global Label

Space
0-1015808
l Specifies the start

value of a global label
space. The OptiX RTN
950 supports a step of
2048.
l The start value of a
global label space is
the smallest unicast
tunnel label. When
Start of Global Label
Space is 0, the smallest
unicast tunnel label is
16, with values 0 to 15
reserved.
l On an MPLS-enabled
network, global label
spaces of NEs are
recommended to
overlap each other if
possible.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

663

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Global Label Space Size
Displays the size of a

global label space.
Start of Multicast Label

Space

A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel

This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the Static Tunnel tab.
3.
Click Query.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
Displays the tunnel ID.
Name

customized tunnel name.
Enable State
Enabled
Enabled
whether a tunnel is
enabled.
Disabled
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the value
Enabled.
Node Type
l Displays the node type.

l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
displays the node types
of forward tunnels.
Direction
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Displays the direction of a

tunnel.
664

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
the committed
information rate (CIR)
of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is
set this parameter to No
Limit. If you need to
enable the CES CAC
function or limit the
PW bandwidth, set this
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.
PIR(kbit/s)

CBS(byte)

PBS(byte)

Bandwidth Remaining
(kbit/s)

In Port
Displays the ingress port

of a forward tunnel, which
is also the egress port of
the mapping reverse
tunnel.
Forward In Label
Displays the MPLS label

that a forward tunnel
carries when entering a
node.
Reverse Out Label
Specifies the MPLS label

that a reverse tunnel
carries when entering a
tunnel.
Out Port
Displays the egress port of

a forward tunnel, which is
also the ingress port of the
mapping reverse tunnel.
Forward Out Label

that a forward tunnel
carries when leaving a
node.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

665

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Reverse In Label

that a reverse tunnel
carries when leaving a
node.
Forward Next Hop

Address
Displays the IP address of

the next-hop port of a
forward tunnel.
Reverse Next Hop

Address
Displays the IP address of

the next-hop port of a
reverse tunnel.
Source Node
Displays the LSR ID of the

ingress node.
Sink Node

egress node.
Tunnel Type
Displays the tunnel type.
EXP
0-7
the value of the EXP
field in the packets
transmitted through
MPLS tunnels.
None
l For unidirectional
is available only if
Node Type is Ingress.
l For bidirectional
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
to a value from 0 to 7,
the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
l If this parameter takes
its default value None,
the EXP field varies
based on the DiffServ
mappings.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

666

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSP Mode
Pipe
the LSP mode.
l Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels
from packets, an egress
node does not update
the scheduling priority
for the packets.
l For bidirectional
is available only if
Node Type is Egress.
l For bidirectional
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 950, this
parameter can be set to
Pipe only.
MTU(byte)

Protection Group
Displays the MPLS APS

protection group to which
a tunnel belongs.
VLAN ID
the VLAN ID that
Ethernet packets carry
when transmitted over
MPLS tunnels.
l If packets need to
traverse a Layer 2
network, set the VLAN
ID for the tunnel
carried by the NNI port
according to the
VLAN planning
requirements on the
Layer 2 network.
the same value for both
ends of a tunnel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

667

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
l This parameter
specifies the PHB
service class of an LLSP, if the type of an
MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
l CS6-CS7: indicates the

highest service grade,
which is mainly
transmission.
AF2
AF1
BE

forwarding. This
service class is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
assured forwarding.
that requires rate
limit.
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Deployment

status of the tunnel.
A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of

Unidirectional Tunnels
This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
1.
Tree.
2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

668

3.
Click New and choose Unidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
The New Unicast Unidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
4.
Select New Reverse Tunnel.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
1-65535
l Specifies the tunnel ID.

l The total number of tunnels and PWs
must be equal to or less than 1024. The
number of tunnels that carry PWs is not
included in the total.
NOTE
If you select New Reverse Tunnel, set forward
tunnel IDs and reverse tunnel IDs respectively.
Tunnel Name
Specifies the tunnel name.
Node Type
Ingress
Ingress
Specifies the node type of a forward tunnel.
Egress
Transit
Direction
Indicates the direction of a tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
No Limit
l Specifies the committed information rate

(CIR) of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is recommended that you set

this parameter to No Limit. If you need
to enable the CES CAC function or limit
the tunnel bandwidth, set this parameter
to be the same as the planned tunnel
bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s)

parameter.
PIR(Byte)

parameter.
PBS(Byte)

parameter.
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
Specifies the MPLS port at the ingress

direction of a forward tunnel on a transit or
egress node.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

669

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
In Port
NOTE
l If the MPLS port is an FE/GE port, ensure
that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the MPLS
port is set to Layer 3 according to Setting
the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
l The Enable Tunnel, Specify IP
Address, andIP Address parameters of
the MPLS port are set to the values
specified in the network plan according to
Setting Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet
Ports.
l If the MPLS port is an IF_ETH port, ensure
that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the MPLS
port is set to Layer 3 according to Setting
the General Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.
Address, and IP Address parameters of
the MPLS port are set to the values
specified in the network plan according to
Setting Layer 3 Attributes of IF_ETH
Ports.
In Label
16-1048575
Specifies the MPLS label at the ingress

direction of a forward tunnel on a transit or
egress node.
Out Board/Logic
Interface Type
Out Port
Specifies the MPLS port at the egress

direction of a forward tunnel on an ingress or
transit node.
Out Label
16-1048575
Specifies the MPLS label at the egress

direction of a forward tunnel on an ingress or
transit node.
Next Hop Address
l The Next Hop Address parameter needs

to be set only for the egress port on an
ingress or transit node.
NOTE
The method and prerequisites for setting
parameters of the MPLS port at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel are the same as those
on the ingress direction.
l Set the IP address of the MPLS ingress

port on the next hop LSR node to Next
Hop Address according to the network
plan.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

670

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Node
l The Source Node parameter needs to be

set only on an egress or transit node.
l Set the LSR ID for the last hop MPLS
node to Source Node according to the
network plan.
Sink Node
l The Sink Node parameter needs to be set

only on an ingress or transit node.
l Set the LSR ID for the next hop MPLS
node to Sink Node according to the
network plan.
Tunnel Type
E-LSP
E-LSP
L-LSP
l Specifies the tunnel type.

l The value E-LSP indicates that the EXP
field is used to identify packet scheduling
priorities of PWs. An E-LSP tunnel can
contain PWs of eight packet scheduling
priorities.
l The value L-LSP indicates that the
MPLS label value is used to identify
packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An
L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of the
same packet scheduling priority.
EXP
0-7
None
None
l Specifies the value of the EXP field in the

packets transmitted through MPLS
tunnels.
l This parameter is available only if Node
Type is Ingress.
l If this parameter is set to a value from 0
to 7, the EXP field takes its fixed value.
l If this parameter takes its default value
None, the EXP field is set based on the
DiffServ mappings.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel

labels from packets, an egress node does
not update the scheduling priority for the
packets.
l This parameter is available only if Node
Type is Egress.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value
Pipe.
MTU
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

parameter.

671

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
BE
l This parameter specifies the PHB service

class of an L-LSP, if the type of an MPLS
tunnel is L-LSP.
CS6
EF
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service

grade, which is mainly involved in
signaling transmission.
AF4
AF3
AF2
l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This

service class is applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small and packet loss ratio
is low, for example, voice and video
services.
AF1
BE
l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding.

This service class is applicable to the
traffic that requires rate guarantee but
does not require delay or jitter limit.
l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded
in best-effort manner without special
processing.
A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of

Bidirectional Tunnels
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
1.
Tree.
2.
3.
Click New and choose Bidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
1 to 65535
l Specifies the tunnel ID.

l The total number of tunnels and PWs
must be equal to or less than 1024.
The number of tunnels that carry
PWs is not included in the total.
Tunnel Name
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Specifies the tunnel name.

672

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Node Type
Ingress
Ingress
Specifies the node type of a forward

tunnel.
Egress
Transit
Direction
Indicates the direction of a tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
No Limit
l Specifies the committed information

rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is recommended that

you set this parameter to No Limit.
If you need to enable the CES CAC
function or limit the PW bandwidth,
set this parameter to be the same as
the planned tunnel bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s)
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support

this parameter.
PIR(Byte)

this parameter.
PBS(Byte)

this parameter.
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
In Port
Specifies the MPLS port at the ingress

direction of a forward tunnel on a transit
or egress node.
NOTE
l If the MPLS port is an FE/GE port,
ensure that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the
MPLS port is set to Layer 3
according to Setting the General
Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
Address, and IP Address
parameters of the MPLS port are set
to the values specified in the
network plan according to Setting
Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
l If the MPLS port is an IF_ETH port,
ensure that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the
MPLS port is set to Layer 3
according to Setting the General
Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.
Address, and IP Address
parameters of the MPLS port are set
to the values specified in the
network plan according to Setting
Layer 3 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

673

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Forward In Label
16 to 1048575
Specifies the MPLS label at the ingress

direction of a forward tunnel on a transit
or egress node.
Reverse Out Label
16 to 1048575
l Specifies the MPLS label at the

egress direction of a reverse tunnel
on a transit or egress node.
l Reverse Out Label and Forward
In Label can be set to either the same
value or different values.
Out Board/Logic
Interface Type
Specifies the MPLS port at the egress

direction of a forward tunnel on an
Out Port
Forward Out Label
16 to 1048575
Specifies the MPLS label at the egress

direction of a forward tunnel on an
Reverse In Label
16 to 1048575
l Specifies the MPLS label at the

ingress direction of a reverse tunnel
on an ingress or transit node.
NOTE
The method and prerequisites for setting
parameters of the MPLS port at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel are the same as
those on the ingress direction.
l The Reverse In Label and Forward

Out Label parameters can be set to
either the same value or different
values.
Forward Next Hop
Address
l The Forward Next Hop Address

parameter needs to be set only for the
egress port on an ingress or transit
node.
l Set the IP address of the MPLS
ingress port on the next hop LSR
node to Forward Next Hop
Address according to the network
plan.
Reverse Next Hop

Address
l The Reverse Next Hop Address

parameter needs to be set only for the
ingress port on a transit or egress
node.
l Set the IP address of the MPLS
ingress port on the next hop LSR
node to Reverse Next Hop
Address according to the network
plan.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

674

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Node
l The Source Node parameter needs

to be set only on an egress or transit
node.
l Set the LSR ID for the last hop
MPLS node to Source Node
according to the network plan.
Sink Node
l The Sink Node parameter needs to

be set only on an ingress or transit
node.
l Set the LSR ID for the next hop
MPLS node to Sink Node according
Tunnel Type
E-LSP
E-LSP
L-LSP
l Specifies the tunnel type.

l The value E-LSP indicates that the
EXP field is used to identify packet
scheduling priorities of PWs. An ELSP tunnel can contain PWs of eight
packet scheduling priorities.
l The value L-LSP indicates that the
MPLS label value is used to identify
packet scheduling priorities of PWs.
An L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of
the same packet scheduling priority.
EXP
0 to 7
None
None
l Specifies the value of the EXP field

in the packets transmitted through
MPLS tunnels.
l This parameter cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
l If this parameter is set to a value
from 0 to 7, the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
l If this parameter takes its default
value None, the EXP field is set
based on the DiffServ mappings.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel

labels from packets, an egress node
does not update the scheduling
priority for the packets.
l This parameter cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value
Pipe.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

675

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MTU

this parameter.
CoS
CS7
BE
l This parameter specifies the PHB

service class of an L-LSP, if the type
of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.
CS6
EF
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest

service grade, which is mainly
involved in signaling transmission.
AF4
AF3
AF2
l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This

service class is applicable to the
traffic whose delay is small and
packet loss ratio is low, for example,
voice and video services.
AF1
BE
l AF1-AF4: indicates assured

forwarding. This service class is
applicable to the traffic that requires
rate guarantee but does not require
delay or jitter limit.
l BE: indicates that the traffic is
forwarded in best-effort manner
without special processing.
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.
Navigation Path
1.
Tree.
2.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
Displays the tunnel ID.
Tunnel Name
Displays the tunnel name.
Node Type
l Displays the node type.

l For bidirectional
displays the node types
of forward tunnels.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

676

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel Direction

tunnel.
OAM Status
Enabled
Disabled
whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
Disabled
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If MPLS APS
protection needs to be
configured or a CC test
needs to be performed
for the tunnel, OAM
Status needs to be set
to Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

677

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
the MPLS OAM
detection mode.
Manual
l Manual: During a CC
test, MPLS OAM
the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, MPLS OAM
interval for receiving
MPLS OAM packets.
l For a unidirectional
tunnel, this parameter
can be set for its egress
node only.
l For a bidirectional
tunnel, if Detection
Mode is set to
Manual, you need to
set the MPLS OAM
received and
transmitted.
l Generally, the value
Auto-Sensing is
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

678

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
l CV: The detection

fixed interval.
FFD

the user.
l For the egress node of
a unidirectional tunnel,
if Detection Mode is
set to Manual, this
type of MPLS OAM
received.
Mode is set to AutoSensing, this
type of MPLS OAM
transmitted.
Mode is set to
Manual, this
types of MPLS OAM
received and
transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for MPLS
APS and the value
CV is assumed for
continuous
MPLS tunnels.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

679

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description

(ms)
3.3
50
the OAM detection
period.
10
20
l This parameter is
available only when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD. It takes
its fixed value of 1000
ms when Detection
Packet Type is CV.
50
100
200
500

3.3 for MPLS APS
usually. If the packet
transmission delay
time of an MPLS
tunnel exceeds 3.3 ms,
the transmission
interval of FFD
packets needs to be a
value greater than the
delay time.
Reverse Tunnel
l Specifies the mapping

reverse tunnel of a
forward tunnel.
cannot be set.
CV/FFD Status
Displays whether CV/

FFD is enabled.
LSP Status
Displays whether an LSP

is available.
LSP Defect Type
Displays the LSP defect

type.
Disable LSP Duration

(ms)
Displays the duration

when an LSP is
unavailable.
LSP Defect Location
Displays the LSR ID of a

node where LSP defects
are detected.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

680

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Threshold
0-100
the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
loss ratio is higher than
the parameter value,
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
node only.
set to 0, SD threshold
detection is not
supported.
0-100
SF Threshold
the SF threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
node only.
set to 0, SF threshold
detection is not
supported.
l The SD threshold is not
higher than the SF
threshold.
Source Node
Displays the source node

of a tunnel.
Sink Node
Displays the sink node of

a tunnel.
A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI

This topic describes FDI parameters.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

681

Navigation Path
1.
Tree.
2.
Click the FDI tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable FDI
Selected
Selected
whether Enable FDI is
selected.
Not selected
l If the FDI function is

enabled for a transit
node, the transit node
inserts an FDI packet
to all LSPs that travel
through the transit
node when a fault
occurs on the link
between the ingress
and transit nodes. On
reception of the FDI
packet, the egress node
reports an alarm. In
this case, if MPLS APS
is configured
correctly, protection
switching is triggered
before the egress node
detects an LSP defect
within a detection
period.
l Generally, the default
parameter value is
recommended.
A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test.
Navigation Path
1.
Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameters tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

682

3.
Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Ping Test from the drop-down list.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Count
1 to 4294967295
Specifies the number of

test request packets.
EXP Value
0 to 7
l Specifies the EXP

value of the MPLS
label in test request
packets. The value 7
priority.
recommended.
TTL
1 to 255
255
l Specifies the time-tolive (TTL) value of the

MPLS label in test
request packets.
recommended.
Transmit Interval
(10ms)
1 to 1000
100
l Specifies the interval

for transmitting test
request packets.
recommended.
Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
l Specifies the length of

recommended.
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300
l Specifies the wait-toresponse timeout

value.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

683

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
IPv4 UDP Response
IPv4 UDP Response
l Specifies the response

mode of test request
packets.
No Response
Application Control
Channel
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
performance event is
reported without
sending response
packets.
l The value Application
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
l The value IPv4 UDP
Response indicates
that the IPv4 UDP
packets encapsulating
MPLS echo reply
messages are sent as
response packets.
Response is reserved
for scenarios where all
nodes on an LSP
communicate with
each other over a DCN
running IP protocols.
based on the situation
of the egress node. If
the egress node
supports reverse
channel response, set
this parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the egress
node does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

684

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NOTE
For a unidirectional
tunnel, Response
Application Control
Channel.
A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test.
Navigation Path
1.
Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameters tab.
3.
Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP Value
0 to 7
l Specifies the EXP

value of the MPLS
label in test request
packets. The value 7
priority.
recommended.
TTL
1 to 255
255

MPLS label in test
request packets.
recommended.
Packet Length
84 to 1400
84

recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

685

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300

value.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

686

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
IPv4 UDP Response
IPv4 UDP Response

packets.
No Response
Application Control
Channel
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
Response indicates
that the IPv4 UDP
packets encapsulating
MPLS echo reply
messages are sent as
response packets.
Response is reserved
for scenarios where all
nodes on an LSP
communicate with
each other over a DCN
running IP protocols.
of the egress node. If
the egress node
supports reverse
channel response, set
this parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the egress
node does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

687

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NOTE
For a unidirectional
tunnel, Response
Application Control
Channel.
A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management

This topic describes parameters that are related to PW management.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the PW Management tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Displays the ID of the PW that carries a

service.
Enable State
Displays whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling
Type
Displays the PW signaling type.
PW Type
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses only static PWs.
l Displays the PW type. Different PW types

perform different service processing
modes.
l When a PW transmits E-Line services, set
PW Type to Ethernet or Ethernet
Tagged Mode.
l If a PW transmits CES services, set PW
Type to CESoPSN or SATop.
l If a PW transmits ATM services, set PW
Type to ATM n-to-one VCC Cell
transport, ATM one-to-one VCC Cell
Mode, ATM n-to-one VPC Cell
transport, or ATM one-to-one VPC Cell
Mode.
Direction
Displays the direction of a PW.
PW Ingress
Label/Source
Port
Displays the ingress label at the source port of

a PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

688

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW
Encapsulation
Type
Displays the encapsulation type of the packets

on a PW.
PW Egress
Label/Sink
Port
Displays the egress label at the sink port of a

PW.
Opposite LSR
ID
Displays the LSR ID of the node at the other

end of a PW.
Local
Working
Status
Displays the working status of the PW at the

local end.
Remote
Working
Status
Displays the working status of the PW at the

remote end.
Compositive
Working
Status
Displays the working status of the entire PW.
Tunnel Type
Displays the type of the tunnel that carries a

PW.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 supports only MPLS
encapsulation.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 supports only MPLS tunnels.
Tunnel
Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries a PW.
Deployment
Status
Displays the deployment status of a PW.
Tunnel
Automatic
Selection
Policy

parameter.
QoS Parameters
Table A-74 CES services
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Displays the ID of the PW

that carries the service.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

689

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction

the PW that carries the
service.
CIR(kbit/s)

EXP

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

Direction

service.
Bandwidth Limit

bandwidth is limited.
CIR(kbit/s)
Displays the committed

a PW.
CBS(byte)

PIR(kbit/s)
Displays the peak

PW
PBS(byte)
Displays the peak burst

size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP

LSP Mode
Displays the LSP mode.
Table A-75 E-Line services
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only Pipe.
Policy
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


690

Table A-76 ATM services

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

Direction

service.
Bandwidth Limit

bandwidth is limited.
CIR(kbit/s)

a PW.
CBS(byte)

PIR(kbit/s)
Displays the peak

PW
PBS(byte)
Displays the peak burst

size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP

Policy


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Displays the PW ID.
RTP Head
Displays whether the CES

service packets carry an
RTP header.
Packet Loading Time

(us)
Displays the packet

loading time.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
Displays the jitter buffer

time for the received CES
packets.
Ingress Clock Mode

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

691

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Egress Clock Mode

Displays the control

channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Displays the VCCV mode.
Enable CES Service

Alarm Transparent
Transmission
Displays whether CES

service alarms are
transparently transmitted.
Threshold of Entering R
bit Inserting Status
Displays the threshold of

the packet loss ratio of
CES services. The
corresponding alarm will
be reported if the actual
packet loss ratio crosses
this threshold.
Threshold of Exiting R

received CES service
packets. The
be cleared after the actual
number of received CES
service packets crosses
this threshold.
Sequence Number Mode
Displays the sequence

number mode.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Displays the PW ID.
Control Word

control word is used to
transfer packet
information. For ETH
PWE3 services, this
parameter is always not
used.

channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

692

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Request VLAN
When PW Type is
Ethernet Tag, this
parameter displays the
VLAN ID to be added to
packets that are sent from
the opposite end and do
not carry any VLAN IDs.
TPID
When PW Type is
Ethernet Tag, this
TPID.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Displays the PW ID.
Control Word

transfer packet
information.

channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Max Concatenated Cell

Count

number of concatenated
cells.
Packet Loading Time

(us)
Displays the packet

loading time.
A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the MS PW tab.
3.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

693


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
Specifies the ID of MS-PW.
Name
Specifies the name of MS-PW.
MTU(bytes)

parameter.
Service Type
Ethernet Service
Ethernet Service
l Specifies the type of services carried by the

MS-PW.
CES Service

ATM Service
Connection
Type
Port Transparent
Port Transparent
PVP

Service Type is ATM Service.
l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sink
are exchanged.
PVC
l PVP: The VPIs and VCIs of the source and

sink are exchanged.
l Port Transparent: ATM transparent
transmission refers to the transparent
transmission of ATM cells that are
encapsulated into PWs as payloads.
Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
Specifies the signaling

type of the PW. Labels for
static PWs need to be
manually assigned.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

694

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type

the PW.
Ethernet if Service
Type is ETH Service
and no VLAN IDs
need to be added. If it
is required to add
VLAN IDs, set this
parameter to Ethernet
Tag Mode and then set
Request VLAN in the
Advanced Attribute
tab.
l If Service Type is
CES Service, the
value CESoPSN
indicates structureaware emulation,
which allows timeslot
compression; the value
SAToP indicates
structure-agnostic
emulation, which does
not allow timeslot
compression.
l If Service Type is
ATM Service, set this
parameter according to
the value of
Connection Type.
PW Direction

the PW.
Displays the
PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575

label.
Port
16 to 1048575

label.
Manually
Manually
Specifies the method to

select tunnels.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
Manually.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

695

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Specifies the type of the

Tunnel
A created tunnel needs to

be selected. If no tunnel is
available, no PW can be
created.
Peer LSR ID

Egress Tunnel

the reverse tunnel
automatically.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit

is enabled.
QoS Parameters
CES Services
Ethernet services

bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

696

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy

CIR(Kbit/s)

a PW.
CBS(byte)

PIR(Kbit/s)
Specifies the peak

PW.
PBS(byte)

size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP

LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe

does not update the
packets.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

697

ATM services
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit

bandwidth limit is
enabled.
l This function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an MPLS
tunnel. (One ATM
PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l An ATM PWE3
the bandwidth of ATM
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy

CIR (Kbit/s)

the PW.
CBS (kbyte)
Specifies the excess burst

size of the PW.
PIR (kbit/s)
Specifies the peak

the PW.
PBS (kbyte)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


excess burst size of the
PW.
698

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP

Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs

CES Services
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Header
Disable
Disable
l Specifies the RTP

header.
Enable
l The RTP header

carries time stamps.
recommended.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
375 to 16000
8000
l Specifies the jitter

buffer time for the
received CES packets.
l A greater value of this
parameter means
fewer impacts of
transmission jitters on
CES services, greater
delays of CES
services, and more
resources occupied by
CES services.
recommended.
NOTE
Set Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us) to a
value greater than the value
of Packet Loading Time
(us) at the opposite end and
the local end.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

699

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Loading Time

(us)
125 to 5000
1000

fragments in the TDM
data stream. Each
fragment is
encapsulated into one
PW packet.
parameter means
higher encapsulation
efficiency but greater
delays of CES
services.
recommended.
Ingress Clock mode

Egress Clock mode

None
CW

PW connectivity
check.
CW
Alert Label
l The value None

indicates that the
control word is not
supported. That is, the
PW connectivity
check is not supported.
VCCV packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
VCCV Verification
Mode
None
Ping
Ping

used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

700

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
64K Timeslot Number
1 to 31
l Specifies the number

of 64 kbit/s timeslots
that transmit service
traffic. If Frame
Mode of the opposite
end is 30, the source 64
kbit/s timeslots at the
local end must include
the 16th timeslot.
l On the two ends of a
radio link, the timeslot
lists can be different
but the numbers of
timeslots must be the
same.
l This parameter is
unavailable if PW
Type is SAToP.
Huawei Mode
Huawei Mode
Specifies the sequence

number mode.
Standard Mode
Ethernet services
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
No Use
No Use

always No Use.
None
Alert Label

PW connectivity
check.
Alert Label
l None indicates that

VCCV is not used.
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

701

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
Ping

used for PW
connectivity check.
None

this parameter to
None.
Request VLAN

when PW Type is
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
l If the received packets
do not carry any
VLAN IDs, the PW
will add VLAN IDs to
the packets as required
by the setting of this
parameter.

not support request VLAN
TPID of the PW level.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
Must Use
Must Use
use the control word.
In the MPLS packet
switching network, the
transmit packet
information.
TPID
ATM services
No Use
l Set Control Word to

Must Use if PW
Type is ATM 1:1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

702

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CW
CW

PW connectivity
check.
None
Alert Label
l The value None

indicates that the
control word is not
PW connectivity check
is not supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l The value Alert
Label indicates VCCV
packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
Ping
None

used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Max. Concatenated Cell

Count
1 to 31
10
l Specifies the
maximum number of
concatenated cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
packet. If the value
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a maximum
of 2 to 31 ATM cells
are encapsulated into
one packet.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

703

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Loading Time

(us)
100 to 50000
1000
l Specifies the packet

loading time. Once the
packet loading time
expires, the packet is
sent out even if the
concatenated cells are
less than the
maximum.
l If Max. Concatenated
Cell Count assumes
the value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is, the
packet will be sent out
once the cell is loaded.
A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM

This topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

PW Type

PW that carries the
service.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

704

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
Enabled
Disabled
whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
Disabled
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If PW APS protection
needs to be configured
or a CC test needs to be
performed for the
tunnel, OAM Status
needs to be set to
Enabled.
Associate AC State

Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
the detection mode for
PW OAM packets.
Manual
l Manual: During a CC
test, PW OAM packets
are sent at the interval
specified by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, PW OAM
interval for receiving
PW OAM packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the type of
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

705

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
l CV: The detection

fixed interval.
FFD

the user.
this parameter
PW OAM detection
packets to be
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
type of PW OAM
received and
transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.
(ms)
3.3
50
10
20
the OAM detection
period.
l If Detection Packet
Type is FFD, this
parameter can be set; if
Detection Packet
Type is CV, the value
is always 1000.
50
100
200
500

3.3 for PW APS
usually. If the packet
transmission delay
time of a PW exceeds
3.3 ms, the
transmission interval
of FFD packets needs
to be a value greater
than the delay time.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

706

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Threshold (%)
0-100
the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
set to 0, SD threshold
detection is not
supported.
SF Threshold (%)
0-100
the SF threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
set to 0, SF threshold
detection is not
supported.
l The SD threshold is not
higher than the SF
threshold.
LSR ID to Be Received
the LSR ID to be
received.
l This parameter is
available only if OAM
Status is Disabled.
the PW ID to be
received.
l This parameter is
available only if OAM
Status is Disabled.
Displays whether PWs at

the local end are available.
Local PW Defect Type
Displays the local PW

defect type.
Local Disable PW
Duration(ms)

when the local PW is
unavailable.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

707

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Local PW Defect
Location
Displays the local PW

defect location.
Displays whether PWs at

the remote end are
available.
Remote PW Defect Type
Displays the remote PW

defect type.
Remote Disable PW
Duration(ms)

when the remote PW is
unavailable.
Remote PW Defect
Location
Displays the remote PW

defect location.
A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Select the required PW and click OAM Operation > Ping Test.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Count
1 to 4294967295
Specifies the number of

EXP Value
0 to 7
l Specifies the EXP

value of the PW label
in test request packets.
The value 7 indicates
recommended.
TTL
1 to 255
255

PW label in test request
packets.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

708

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Interval
(10ms)
1 to 1000
100
l Specifies the interval

for transmitting test
request packets.
recommended.
Packet Length
64 to 1400
64

recommended.
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300

value.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

709

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
IPv4 UDP Response
IPv4 UDP Response

packets.
No Response
Application Control
Channel Response
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
Response indicates
that response is
performed through the
reverse channel.
indicates that the IPv4
UDP packets
encapsulating MPLS
echo reply messages
are sent as response
packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP is
reserved for scenarios
where all nodes on an
LSP communicate
with each other over a
DCN running IP
protocols.
of the remote PE. If the
remote PE supports
reverse channel
response, set this
parameter to
Application Control
Channel Response. If
the remote PE does not
support reverse
channel response but
supports DCN channel
response by means of
IP protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

710

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Peer PW ID
Specifies the PW ID of the

peer end.
Peer IP
Specifies the IP address of

the peer port.
A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Select the required PW, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP Value
0 to 7
l Specifies the EXP

value of the PW label
in test request packets.
The value 7 indicates
recommended.
TTL
1 to 255
255

PW label in test request
packets.
recommended.
Packet Length
84 to 1400
84

recommended.
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300

value.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

711

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
IPv4 UDP Response
IPv4 UDP Response

packets.
No Response
Application Control
Channel Response
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
Response indicates
that response is
performed through the
reverse channel.
indicates that the IPv4
UDP packets
encapsulating MPLS
echo reply messages
are sent as response
packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP is
reserved for scenarios
where all nodes on an
LSP communicate
with each other over a
DCN running IP
protocols.
of the remote PE. If the
remote PE supports
reverse channel
response, set this
parameter to
Application Control
Channel Response. If
the remote PE does not
support reverse
channel response but
supports DCN channel
response by means of
IP protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

712

A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
l Displays the protection

group ID.
l The system
automatically assigns
IDs to the protection
groups according to
their creation
sequence.
Protection Type

group type.
Switching Mode
Dual-Ended
a protection group.
Single-Ended
l The value SingleEnded indicates that

only in the direction
where faults occur.
l The value DualEnded indicates that
services in both
positive and reverse
directions are switched
to their protection
channels when faults
occur.
you set this parameter
to Dual-Ended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

713

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BDI Status
Disabled
whether the protection
switching is triggered
upon receiving BDI
packets.
Enabled
l This parameter is
available only when
Switching Mode is set
to Single-Ended.
l If BDI Status is set to
Enabled, the egress
node notifies the
ingress node of any
detected faults by
sending BDI packets;
upon receiving BDI
packets, the ingress
node triggers
Transmit and receive
Status of Protocol Packet
Displays the protocol

packet status.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
whether to switch
services to the original
working tunnel after
the fault is rectified.
Revertive

indicates to perform
the switching; the
value Non-Revertive
indicates not to
perform the switching.
to Revertive.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

714

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(min)
1-12
l Specifies and displays

the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working
tunnel recovers,
to the original working
tunnel.
l This parameter is
available only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive.
to 5.
Hold-Time(100ms)
0-100

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but wait
expires, and then
detect whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
to 0.
Protocol Status
Displays the protocol

status.
Switching Status

group.
Deployment Status

group.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

715

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Unit
Displays whether a tunnel

is a working or protection
tunnel.
Active Tunnel
Displays the currently

used tunnel.
Tunnel Status
Displays the tunnel status.
Tunnel Type
Displays the tunnel type.
Tunnel Direction

tunnel.
Ingress Tunnel
Displays the ingress

tunnel.
Egress Tunnel
Displays the egress tunnel.
A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS
Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.
3.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
1:1
1:1

type of the tunnel
protection group.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the value 1:1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

716

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switching Mode
Single-Ended
Dual-Ended
l Specifies the switching

mode to be adopted
when a tunnel fails.
Dual-Ended
l The value SingleEnded indicates that

only in the direction
where faults occur.
l The value DualEnded indicates that
to the protection
channel in both
directions when faults
occur.
l The value DualEnded is
recommended.
BDI Status
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the

protection switching is
triggered upon
receiving BDI packets.
l This parameter is
available only when
Switching Mode is set
to Single-Ended.
l If BDI Status is set to
Enabled, the egress
node notifies the
ingress node of any
detected faults by
sending BDI packets;
upon receiving BDI
packets, the ingress
node triggers the
Working Tunnel Type
MPLS Tunnel
MPLS Tunnel

working tunnel.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
MPLS Tunnel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

717

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Ingress Tunnel

ID

tunnel of the protection
group in the ingress
direction.
for a bidirectional
tunnel, a value is
automatically assigned
to the parameter
Working Egress
Tunnel ID.
Working Ingress Tunnel

Name

working tunnel in the
ingress direction.
Working Egress Tunnel

ID

group in the egress
direction.
tunnel, if the parameter
Working Ingress
Tunnel ID is set, a
value is automatically
assigned to the
parameter Working
Egress Tunnel ID.
Working Egress Tunnel

Name

working tunnel in the
egress direction.
Protection Tunnel Type
Displays the type of

protection tunnel, which is
the same as the type of
working tunnel.
Protection Ingress
Tunnel ID

group in the ingress
direction.
for a bidirectional
tunnel, a value is
automatically assigned
to the parameter
Protection Egress
Tunnel ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

718

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Ingress
Tunnel Name

protection tunnel in the
ingress direction.
Protection Egress
Tunnel ID
l Specifies the
protection tunnel of the
protection group in the
egress direction.
tunnel, if the parameter
Protection Ingress
Tunnel ID is set, a
value is automatically
assigned to the
parameter Protection
Egress Tunnel ID.
Protection Egress
Tunnel Name

protection tunnel in the
egress direction.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive
l This parameter
tunnel after it recovers.
Revertive

indicates to switch
services back to the
original working
tunnel after it recovers;
the value NonRevertive indicates
not to switch services
back to the original
working tunnel after it
recovers.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

719

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(min)
1 to 12
l Specifies the WTR

group.
original working
tunnel recovers,
to the original working
tunnel.
l This parameter is
available only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.
Hold-Time(100ms)
0 to 100

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.
Protocol Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Specifies the protocol

status.
Protocol Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Protocol
Status to Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

720

A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group.
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows:
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES
Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Protection Group tab.
3.
Click the PW APS tab.
4.
Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows:

1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
2.
3.
4.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

PW Signaling Type
Static
Static

manually assigned.
PW Type
PW Direction

the PW.
Displays the
PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575

label.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

721

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
16 to 1048575

label.

select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS

Tunnel
PW will fail.
Peer LSR ID

Egress Tunnel

the reverse tunnel
automatically.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP

QoS Parameters
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

722


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled

is enabled.
Enabled

bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy

CIR(kbit/s)

a PW.
CBS(byte)

PIR(kbit/s)
Specifies the peak

PW.
PBS(byte)

size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP

LSP Mode

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only Pipe.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

723


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled

is enabled.
Enabled

bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ATM PWE3
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s)

a PW.
CBS(byte)

PIR(kbit/s)
Specifies the peak

PW.
PBS(byte)

size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP

Policy

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

724


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Head

RTP header.
Packet Loading Time

(us)
Displays the packet

loading time.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)

packets.
Ingress Clock Mode

Egress Clock Mode

Displays the mode of PW

connectivity check.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Displays the VCCV

VCCV verification is used
for PW connectivity
check.
Enable CES Service

Alarm Transparent
Transmission

service alarms are

CES services. The
this threshold.

packets. The
this threshold.

number mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

725


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word

transfer packet
PWE3 services, this
used.

channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Request VLAN
When PW Type is
Ethernet Tag, this
TPID

not support VLAN TPID
of the PW level.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word

transfer packet
information.

channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode

Count

cells.
Packet Loading Time

(us)
Displays the packet

loading time.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

726


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type

type.
Protection Group ID

group ID.
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled

status of the PW
protection group.
Enabled

Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode

mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
mode.
Working PW ID

working PW.
Protection PW ID

protection PW.
Switching Mode

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports dual-ended
switching.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

727

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
l This parameter
Revertive

are switched to the
original working PW
switched to the
recommended.
Time(min)
1 to 12
l Specifies the WTR

group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

728

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description

(100ms)
0 to 100

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status

status of PW OAM.
Detection mode
OAM Parameters
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

729

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing

Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

730

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
l CV: The detection

fixed interval.
FFD

the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.
(ms)
3.3
50
10

detection packets.
l This parameter is
configurable when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD and
assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
20
50
100
200
500

3.3 for PW APS.

received.
received.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

731

A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection

Group_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PW
APS protection group.
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Click the Slave Protection Pair tab.
4.
Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

PW Signaling Type
Static
Static

manually assigned.
PW Type
PW Direction

the PW.
Displays the
PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

732

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575

label.
Port
16 to 1048575

label.

select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS

Tunnel
PW will fail.
Peer LSR ID

Egress Tunnel

the reverse tunnel
automatically.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP

QoS Parameters
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

733


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled

is enabled.
Enabled

bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy

CIR(kbit/s)

a PW.
CBS(byte)

PIR(kbit/s)
Specifies the peak

PW.
PBS(byte)

size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP

LSP Mode

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only Pipe.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

734


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled

is enabled.
Enabled

bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ATM PWE3
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s)

a PW.
CBS(byte)

PIR(kbit/s)
Specifies the peak

PW.
PBS(byte)

size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP

Policy

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

735


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Head

RTP header.
Packet Loading Time

(us)
Displays the packet

loading time.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)

packets.
Ingress Clock Mode

Egress Clock Mode


connectivity check.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Displays the VCCV

for PW connectivity
check.
Enable CES Service

Alarm Transparent
Transmission

service alarms are

CES services. The
this threshold.

packets. The
this threshold.

number mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

736


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word

transfer packet
PWE3 services, this
used.

channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Request VLAN
When PW Type is
Ethernet Tag, this
TPID

not support VLAN TPID
of the PW level.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word

transfer packet
information.

channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode

Count

cells.
Packet Loading Time

(us)
Displays the packet

loading time.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

737


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode

mode.
Protection Group ID

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Working PW ID

protection pair.
Protection PW ID

protection pair.
A.9.2 CES Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services.
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management.
Navigation Path

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
Displays the ID of the CES

service to be created.
Service name
Displays or specifies the

service name.
Level
Displays the level of the

received TDM frames.
Source Board
Displays the source board

of the CES service.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

738

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source High Channel

configured.
Source Low Channel
Displays the source lower

order path.
Source 64K Timeslot
Displays the source 64

kbit/s timeslot.
Priority List
CS7
l Specifies the priority

of a CES service. This
parameter is available
only when Mode is set
to UNI-NNI.
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3

to be configured if QoS
processing needs to be
performed for different
CES services.
AF2
AF1
BE
l CS6-CS7: indicate the

highest service classes,
which are mainly
transmission.
l EF: indicates the
expedited forwarding
of service, which is
applicable to services
of low transmission
delay and low packet
loss rate, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicate the
assured forwarding
classes of service,
which are applicable to
services that require an
assured rate but no
l BE: is applicable to
services that need not
be processed in a
special manner.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

739

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

that carries the CES
service. This parameter is
meaningful when the CES
service type is UNI-NNI.
Tunnel
Displays the tunnel that

carries the PW. The tunnel
must have been
configured in advance.
This parameter is
service type is UNI-NNI.
Sink Board
Displays the sink board of

the CES service. This
parameter is meaningful
when the CES service type
is UNI-UNI.
Sink High Channel

configured.
Sink Low Channel
Displays the sink lower

order path. This parameter
is meaningful when the
CES service type is UNIUNI.
Sink 64K Timeslot
Displays the sink 64 kbit/s

timeslot. This parameter is
service type is UNI-UNI.
Deployment Status

status of the CES service.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

that carries the CES
service.
Working Status
Displays working status of

the PW.
PW Status

status of the PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

740

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Signaling Type
Displays the PW signaling

type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports static PWs only.
PW Type
Displays the PW type for

CES service
encapsulation.
CESoPSN: Indicates
structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation service
over packet switched
network. Timeslot
compression can be set.
SAToP: Indicates
structure-agnostic TDM
over packet. Timeslot
compression cannot be
set.
Displays the tunnel type

for PW encapsulation.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
Displays the Ingress label

of the PW that carries the
CES service.
Port
Displays the Egress label

of the PW that carries the
CES service.
Peer LSR ID

PW at the remote end.

local end.

remote end.
Compositive Working
Status
Displays the compositive

working status of the PW.
The compositive working
status is up when both
ends are up, and is down
when one end is down.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

741

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel type

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports MPLS tunnels
only.
Tunnel

tunnel that carries the CES
service.
Deployment Status

status of the tunnel.
Tunnel Automatic
Selection Policy

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Displays the PW ID.
Direction

the PW.
CIR(kbit/s)

EXP

QoS Parameters
Parameters of Advanced Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Displays the PW ID.
RTP Header
Displays the RTP header.

The RTP header carries
time stamps.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

742

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
375 to 16000
the jitter buffer time.
l The jitter buffer time
guarantees the realtime performance of
the CES service.
NOTE
the local end.
Packet Loading Time

(us)
Displays the packet

loading time.
Ingress Clock Mode

Egress Clock Mode


connectivity check.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Displays the VCCV

for PW connectivity
check.
Enable CES Service

Alarm Transparent
Transmission
Enabled

enabling status of the
transparent transmission
of CES service alarms. If
this function is enabled,
the fault on the AC side of
the CES service is notified
to the remote end. Upon
receiving the fault
notification from the
network side or the remote
end, the local NE inserts
the corresponding alarm to
the AC side.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Disabled

743

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bit Inserting Status
1-65535

threshold of packet loss
ratio of CES services. The
be reported once the actual
this threshold. This
only when the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is enabled.
1-65535

threshold of received CES
service packets. The
this threshold. This
only when the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is enabled.
Huawei Mode

number mode. The
Sequence Number
Mode must be set to the
same value at both ends of
a radio link.
Standard Mode

NOTE
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID

created.
Working PW ID

working PW.
Protection PW ID

protection PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

744

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode

mode.
Enabling Status
Enabled
the PW protection
group.
Disabled

Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Switchover Mode

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
switching.
Restoration Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
switched to the
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

745

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Time(min)
1 to 12
the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.

(100ms)
0 to 100
protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
Deployment Status

group.
Switchover Status

group.
Protocol Status

Working Path Status


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

746


NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Working PW ID

protection pair.
Protection PW ID

protection pair.
DNI PW ID
Displays the DNI PW ID.
PW Type
Deployment Status

status of the slave
protection pair.
A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID(e.g.1,3-6)
1 to 4294967295
Specifies the service ID.
Service name
Specifies the service

name.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

747

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
E1
E1
The value E1 indicates

that the CES service is
used to transmit the TDM
services from E1 ports.
Mode
UNI-NNI
UNI-NNI

CES service.
UNI-UNI
l The value UNI-NNI

indicates that the CES
service is carried by a
PW. Therefore, the
information about the
PW needs to be
configured.
Source Board

the source (UNI) of the
CES service is located.
Source High Channel

Source Low Channel

(e.g.1,3-6)
If Level is set to E1, this

parameter indicates the E1
port where the service
source is located. If
Mode is set to UNI-NNI,
this parameter can assume
only one value.
Source 64K Timeslot

(e.g.1,3-6)
1-31
1-31
l Specifies the 64 kbit/s

timeslot that transmits
data. This parameter
can assume multiple
values. If Frame
Mode of the opposite
end is 30, the source 64
kbit/s timeslots at the
local end must include
the 16th timeslot.
l On the two ends of a
but the numbers of
timeslots must the
same.
l This parameter does
not need to be set if
Mode is UNI-NNI and
PW Type is SAToP.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

748

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Priority List
CS7
EF
l Specifies the priority

of a CES service. This
only when Mode is set
to UNI-NNI.
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3

to be configured if QoS
processing needs to be
performed for different
CES services.
AF2
AF1
BE
l CS6-CS7: indicate the

highest service classes,
which are mainly
transmission.
l EF: indicates the
of service, which is
of low transmission
delay and low packet
loss rate, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicate the
assured forwarding
classes of service,
which are applicable to
services that require an
assured rate but no
l BE: is applicable to
services that need not
be processed in a
special manner.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

749

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
CESoPSN
CESoPSN

the PW. This
only when Mode is
UNI-NNI.
SAToP
l CESoPSN: Indicates
structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation
service over packet
switched network.
Timeslot compression
can be set. SAToP:
Indicates structureagnostic TDM over
packet. Timeslot
compression cannot be
set.
Protection Type
No Protection
No Protection
PW APS
l Specifies the
protection mode of the
PW. This parameter is
available only when
Mode is UNI-NNI.
to PW APS, working
and protection PWs
set to
, you need to bind the
slave PW APS
protection group with
the master PW APS
protection group. The
PW APS protection
group triggers the
switching of the slave
PW APS protection
group simultaneously.
Sink Board
l Specifies the board

where the sink of the
CES service is located.
l This parameter is
available only when
Mode is set to UNIUNI.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

750

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink High Channel

Sink Low Channel(e.g.

1,3-6)
l If Level is set to E1,

this parameter
indicates the E1 port
where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter is
available only when
Sink 64K Timeslot(e.g.

1,3-6)
1-31
1-31
l Specifies the 64 kbit/s

timeslot that the
service sink occupies.
On the two ends of a
but the numbers of
timeslots must the
same.
l This parameter is
available only when

NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of
working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW
as an example.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

PW Signaling Type
Static
Static

manually assigned.
PW Type
PW Direction

the PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

751

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Displays the
PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575

label.
Port
16 to 1048575

label.

select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS

Tunnel
PW will fail.
Peer LSR ID

Egress Tunnel

the reverse tunnel
automatically.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP

QoS Parameters
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

752

Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Header
Disable
Disable
l Specifies the RTP

header.
Enable Huawei RTP
l The RTP header

carries time stamps.
recommended.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time (us)
375 to 16000
8000
l Specifies the jitter

buffer time for the
received CES packets.
The step is 125.
parameter means
fewer impacts of
transmission jitters on
CES services, greater
delays of CES
services, and more
resources occupied by
CES services.
recommended.
NOTE
the local end.
Packet Loading Time

(us)
125 to 5000
1000

fragments in the TDM
data stream. The step is
125.
parameter means
higher encapsulation
efficiency but greater
delays of CES
services.
recommended.
Ingress Clock Mode
Null
Null


Adaptive Clock Mode

Egress Clock Mode
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

753

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
None
CW

PW connectivity
check.
CW
Alert Label
l The value None

indicates that the
control word is not
PW connectivity
check is not supported.
VCCV packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
VCCV Verification
Mode
None
Ping
Ping

used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Enable CES Service

Alarm Transparent
Transmission
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled

If this function is enabled,

the fault on the AC side of
the CES service is notified
to the remote end. On
receiving the fault
notification from the
network side or the remote
end, the local NE inserts
the corresponding alarm
to the AC side.
754

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
1-65535
100
l The corresponding
alarm will be reported
if the number of
consecutive lost
packets crosses the
threshold specified by
this parameter.
l This function is
available only when
the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is
enabled.
1-65535
l The corresponding
alarm will be cleared if
the number of
consecutive received
packets crosses the
threshold specified by
this parameter.
l This function is
available only when
the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is
enabled.
Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
Standard Mode

number mode. The
Sequence Number
Mode must be set to the
same value at both ends of
a radio link.

NOTE
PW APS.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type

type.
Protection Group ID

group ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

755

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled

status of the PW
protection group.
Enabled

Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode

mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
mode.
Working PW ID

working PW.
Protection PW ID

protection PW.
Switching Mode

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports dual-ended
switching.
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter
are switched to the
original working PW
switched to the
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

756

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Time(min)
1 to 12
l Specifies the WTR

group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.

(100ms)
0 to 100

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.
Detection mode

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

757

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status

status of PW OAM.
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing

Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

758

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
l CV: The detection

fixed interval.
FFD

the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.
(ms)
3.3
50
10

detection packets.
l This parameter is
configurable when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD and
assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
20
50
100
200
500

3.3 for PW APS.

received.
received.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

759


NOTE
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode

mode.
Protection Group ID

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Working PW ID

protection pair.
Protection PW ID

protection pair.
A.9.3 ATM Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.
A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management.
Navigation Path
1.
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IMA Group Management tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
Displays the ATM

TRUNK.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

760

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IMA Protocol Enable

Status
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies the IMA

protocol enable status.
Disabled
l Set IMA Protocol

Enable Status to
Enabled if the links
bound in the ATM
TRUNK require the
IMA protocol;
otherwise, set this
parameter to
Disabled.
l After IMA Protocol
Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the E1 links
or Fractional E1
timeslots bound in the
ATM TRUNK start
running the IMA
protocol.
Minimum Number of
Active Transmitting
Links
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1 to 16

l The links of the IMA

group can carry
services only when the
number of activated
links in the transmit/
receive direction is not
smaller than the value
of Minimum Number
of Active
Transmitting Links/
Minimum Number of
Active Receiving
Links.
l The values of
Minimum Number of
Active Transmitting
Links and Minimum
Number of Active
Receiving Links must
be the same because
the OptiX RTN 950
supports Symmetrical
Mode and
Symmetrical
Operation only. The
parameters Minimum
Number of Active
Transmitting Links
and Minimum
761

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Minimum Number of
Active Receiving Links
1 to 16
Number of Active
Receiving Links must
assume the same value
on the two ends of an
IMA link.
recommended.
IMA Protocol Version
1.0
1.1
l Specifies the IMA

protocol version.
1.1
l The parameter IMA

Protocol Version
must assume the same
value on the two ends
of an IMA link.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

762

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IMA Transmit Frame

Length
32
128
l Specifies the IMA

transmit frame length.
64
l Based on the IMA

frame format, the
receive end rebuilds
the ATM cell stream
with the cells arriving
from diverselydelayed links. Longer
IMA frames result in
higher transmission
efficiency and occupy
more resources. Once a
member link fails, the
impact on the entire
IMA group increases
as the length of IMA
frames increases.
128
256
l The IMA Transmit

Frame Length must
IMA link.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

763

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IMA Symmetry Mode
Symmetrical Mode and

Symmetrical Operation
Symmetrical Mode and

Symmetrical Operation
l Specifies the
symmetrical mode of
the IMA group.
l If the symmetrical
mode and symmetrical
operation is adopted,
the bandwidth of the
IMA group is always
consistent in the
transmit direction and
in the receive
direction, even when
some member links
fail. In symmetrical
mode:
Bandwidth of the
IMA group = min
{bandwidth in the
transmit direction,
bandwidth in the
receive direction}
The unidirectional
failure in one
member link is
equivalent to the
bidirectional
failure in one
member link.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

764

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Delay
Between Links (ms)
1 to 120
25
l Specifies the
maximum differential
delay that is allowed
between the member
links.
l If the differential delay
between a member link
and the other member
links exceeds the
value, this link will be
deactivated and
deleted from the IMA
group.
to a value higher than
the normal value
range, the delay of
IMA services will be
prolonged and even
packet loss will occur;
if this parameter is set
to a value lower than
the normal value
range, a working link
will be deleted by
mistake.
l The Maximum Delay
Between Links (ms)
must assume the same
value on the two ends
of an IMA link.
recommended.
Clock Mode
CTC Mode
CTC Mode
ITC Mode
l Specifies the clock

mode of the IMA
group.
l Clock Mode is set to
the same value for the
interconnected ends of
IMA links.
A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

765

Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Binding tab.
3.
Click Configuration.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Boards
Selects the available

boards.
Configurable Ports
Selects the configurable

ATM trunks.
Level
E1
E1
Specifies the level of

bound paths.
Fractional E1
l If ATM/IMA services
need to be mapped into
the ATM TRUNK that
binds one or more E1
ports, select E1 in
Level.
l If ATM/IMA services
need to be mapped into
the ATM TRUNK that
binds one or more
serial ports, select
Fractional E1 in
Level.
Direction

bound paths. The fixed
value is bidirectional.
Optical Interface

Available Resources
Displays the ports that

carry the available paths
for IMA services.
NOTE
For Fractional ATM/IMA
services, set Port Mode in
PDH Interface to Layer 1
and configure Setting Serial
Port Parameters.
Available Timeslots

Selected Bound Paths
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

766

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK

ATM TRUNK.
Level
Displays the level of

bound paths.
Direction

Bound Paths
Number of Bound Paths
Displays the number of

bound paths.
Display in Combination
Selected
Selected
Specifies whether to
display bound paths in
combination.
Not selected
A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the IMA Group States tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
Displays the VCTRUNK.
Near-End Group Status

near-end group.
Far-End Group Status

far-end group.
Transmit Rate (cell/s)
Displays the cell

transmission rate.
Receive Rate (cell/s)
Displays the cell receiving

rate.
Number of Transmit
Links

transmit links.
Number of Receive
Links

receive links.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

767

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Number of Activated
Transmit Links

activated transmit links.
Number of Activated
Receive Links

activated receive links.
A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the IMA Link States tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
E1 Link
Displays E1 links.
Differential Delay Check

Status

deferential delay check.
Near-End Receiving
Status
Displays the near-end

receiving status.
Near-End Transmitting
Status
Displays the near-end

transmitting status.
Far-End Receiving
Status
Displays the far-end

receiving status.
Far-End Transmitting
Status
Displays the far-end

transmitting status.
A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface

Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management.
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
768

2.
Click the ATM Interface Management tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the port.
Name

name of port.
Port Type
UNI
UNI
Specifies the type of ATM

port.
NNI
l UNI: the port

connecting user-side
devices. For example,
the UNI port applies to
the user-side interface
on the common ATM
network or to the userside interface of the PE
on the PSN network
that transmits ATM
PWE3 services.
l NNI: the port
connecting networkside devices. For
example, the NNI port
applies to the networkside interface on the
common ATM
network.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

769

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATM Cell Payload

Scrambling
Disabled
Enabled
Specifies whether to
enable payload
scrambling of ATM cells.
Enabled
l The ITU-T G.804

stipulates that the
payload (48 bytes) of
ATM cells must be
scrambled before it is
mapped into E1
signals. Therefore, it is
set ATM Cell Payload
Scrambling to
Enabled.
l ATM Cell Payload
Scrambling must
ATM link. Otherwise,
packet loss will occur.
Min. VPI

Max. VPI

Min. VCI

Max. VCI

VCC-Supported VPI
Count

Loopback
No Loopback
No Loopback
Specifies the loopback

status of the port.
Outloop
Inloop
A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping

Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service class
mapping table.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

770

Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from
the Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID

mapping table.

mapping relationship.
UBR
BE
AF11
AF12
AF13
AF21
AF22
AF23
AF31
AF32
AF33
AF41
AF42
AF43
EF
CS6
CS7
UBR: BE

PHB service classes that
correspond to different
ATM service types.
l Eight PHB service
classes are available:
BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
AF4, EF, CS6, and
CS7. The OptiX RTN
950 provides different
QoS policies for the
queues of different
service classes.
l CS6 to CS7: highest
service classes, mainly
applicable to signaling
transmission.
l EF: fast forwarding,
of low transmission
delays and low packet
loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured
forwarding, applicable
to services that require
an assured
transmission rate
rather than delay or
jitter limits.
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
CBR: EF
RT-VBR: AF31
NRT-VBR: AF21
UBR+: AF11
PORT-TRANS: BE

771

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NOTE
The AF1 class includes
three subclasses: AF11,
AF12, and AF13. Only
one of these subclasses
can take effect for one
queue. It is the same
case with AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
PORT-TRANS
l BE: best effort,

that do not require
special processing.
A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping

Table_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mapping
table.
Navigation Path
1.
Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

772


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
2 to 8

mapping table.

mapping relationship.
UBR
BE
AF11
AF12
AF13
AF21
AF22
AF23
AF31
AF32
AF33
AF41
AF42
AF43
EF
CS6
CS7
UBR: BE
CBR: EF
RT-VBR: AF31
NRT-VBR: AF21
UBR+: AF11
PORT-TRANS: BE
Specifies the PHB service

classes that correspond to
different ATM service
types.
l Eight PHB service
classes are available:
BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
AF4, EF, CS6, and
CS7. The OptiX RTN
950 provides different
QoS policies for the
queues of different
service classes.
l CS6 to CS7: highest
service classes, mainly
applicable to signaling
transmission.
l EF: fast forwarding,
of low transmission
delays and low packet
loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured
forwarding, applicable
to services that require
an assured
transmission rate
rather than delay or
jitter limits.
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
PORT-TRANS
NOTE
The AF1 class includes
three subclasses: AF11,
AF12, and AF13. Only
one of these subclasses
can take effect for one
queue. It is the same
case with AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
l BE: best effort,

that do not require
special processing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

773

A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management.
Navigation Path
1.
Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the ATM Policy tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
Displays the policy ID of

the ATM service.
Policy Name

policy name of the ATM
service. The maximum
length of the value is 64
bytes.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

774

Parameters for Configuring ATM Traffic

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
UBR
UBR

type of the ATM service.
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
l The UBR service is

characterized by nonreal-time applications
and many bursts. The
UBR service does not
specify traffic-related
service guarantees. To
be specific, the UBR
service only requires
that the network side
provides the service
with the best effort.
The network side does
not provide any
assured QoS for the
UBR service. In the
case of network
congestion, the UBR
cells are discarded
first.
l The CBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay
variation and requires
that data be transmitted
at a constant rate. In
addition, the CBR
service requests a
static amount of
bandwidth and the
highest priority. The
CBR service is
characterized by stable
traffic and few bursts.
l The rt-VBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay and
delay variation.
Compared with the
CBR service, the rtVBR service allows
sources to transmit
data at a rate that varies
with time.
Equivalently, the
sources can be
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

775

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
described as bursty. In
addition, the rt-VBR
service does not
require a static amount
of bandwidth.
l Compared with the rtVBR service, the nrtVBR service does not
require tightly
constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-realtime applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the
UBR service and is
intended for
applications that
require assured
minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by
the minimum cell rate
(MCR) parameter. The
other characteristics of
the UBR+ service are
the same as the
corresponding
characteristics of the
UBR service.
Traffic Type
Clp01Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp01Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp0Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp0Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Max. Cell Burst Size

(cell)
2 to 200000
Cell Delay Variation

Tolerance (0.1us)
7 to 13300000
Discard Traffic Frame
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

The Table A-93 lists the

ATM service type, traffic
type descriptor, and the
related traffic parameters.
ATM policies are
configured based on these
mapping relationships.

frame discarding mark in
ATM policies. This
parameter is effective to
AAL5 traffic.
776

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
UPC/NPC
Enabled
Disabled
Displays or specifies
UPC/NPC.
Disabled
l UPC is user-side
parameter control and
NPC is network-side
parameter control.
l After UPC/NPC is
enabled, the cells with
a frame discarding
mark will be discarded
in network congestion.
Table A-93 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters
ATM
Service
Type
ATM Traffic Type

Descriptor
Traffic
Parameter 1
Traffic
Parameter 2
Traffic
Parameter 3
Traffic
Parameter 4
UBR
NoTrafficDescriptor
NoClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
ClpTransparentNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
ClpNoTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
ClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
NoClpScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
ClpNoTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
ClpTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
ClpTransparentScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
atmnotrafficdescriptormcr
Clp01Mcr
atmnoclpmcr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
CBR
nrtVBR
rtVBR
UBR+
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

777

ATM
Service
Type
ATM Traffic Type

Descriptor
Traffic
Parameter 1
Traffic
Parameter 2
Traffic
Parameter 3
Traffic
Parameter 4
atmnoclpmcrcdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
CDVT
Parameters for the application object

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
Displays the ID
configured for the ATM
service.
Service Name
Displays the name

configured for the ATM
service.
Link ID
Displays the link ID.
Direction

the service.
A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies.
Navigation Path
1.
Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
Specifies the policy ID of

the ATM service. The
policy ID can also be
automatically allocated.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

778

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy Name
Synchronous signal
Synchronous signal
Specifies the policy name

of the ATM service. The
maximum length of the
value is 64 bytes.
Signaling
Voice
Data
NOTE
You can select one of the
five ATM service policy
names from the drop-down
list or enter the policy name.
Video
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

779

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
UBR
UBR

ATM service.
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
l The UBR service is

characterized by nonreal-time applications
and many bursts. The
UBR service does not
specify traffic-related
service guarantees. To
be specific, the UBR
service only requires
that the network side
provides the service
with the best effort.
The network side does
not provide any
assured QoS for the
UBR service. In the
case of network
congestion, the UBR
cells are discarded
first.
l The CBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay
variation and requires
that data be transmitted
at a constant rate. In
addition, the CBR
service requests a
static amount of
bandwidth and the
highest priority. The
CBR service is
characterized by stable
traffic and few bursts.
l The rt-VBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay and
delay variation.
Compared with the
CBR service, the rtVBR service allows
sources to transmit
data at a rate that varies
with time.
Equivalently, the
sources can be
described as bursty. In
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

780

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
addition, the rt-VBR
service does not
require a static amount
of bandwidth.
l Compared with the rtVBR service, the nrtVBR service does not
require tightly
constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-realtime applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the
UBR service and is
intended for
applications that
require assured
minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by
the minimum cell rate
(MCR) parameter. The
other characteristics of
the UBR+ service are
the same as the
corresponding
characteristics of the
UBR service.
Traffic Type
Clp01Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp01Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp0Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp0Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Max. Cell Burst Size

(cell)
2 to 200000
Cell Delay Variation

Tolerance (0.1us)
7 to 13300000
Discard Traffic Frame
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

For the mapping

relationships between
ATM service types, ATM
traffic type descriptors,
and traffic parameters, see
Table A-94. ATM
policies are configured
based on these mapping
relationships.
Specifies the frame

discarding mark in ATM
policies. This parameter is
effective to AAL5 traffic.
781

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
UPC/NPC
Enabled
Disabled
l UPC is user-side
parameter control and
NPC is network-side
parameter control.
Disabled
l After UPC/NPC is
enabled, the cells with
a frame discarding
mark will be discarded
in network congestion.
Table A-94 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters
ATM
Service
Type
ATM Traffic Type

Descriptor
Traffic
Parameter 1
Traffic
Parameter 2
Traffic
Parameter 3
Traffic
Parameter 4
UBR
NoTrafficDescriptor
NoClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
ClpTransparentNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
ClpNoTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
ClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
NoClpScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
ClpNoTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
ClpTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
ClpTransparentScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
atmnotrafficdescriptormcr
Clp01Mcr
atmnoclpmcr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
atmnoclpmcrcdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
CDVT
CBR
nrtVBR
rtVBR
UBR+
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

782

A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management.
Navigation Path

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
Displays the service ID.
Service Name

service name.
Service Type
Displays the ATM service

type.
Deployment Status

status of the ATM service.
Connection Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection ID
Displays the connection

ID of the ATM service.
Connection Name

connection name of the
ATM service.
Source Port
Displays the source port of

the ATM service.
PW ID

that carries ATM PWE3
services, if any.
Sink Port
Displays the sink board of

the ATM service.
Source VPI
Displays the VPI of the

source port of the ATM
service.
Source VCI
Displays the VCI of the

service.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

783

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VPI
Displays the VPI of the

sink port of the ATM
service.
Sink VCI
Displays the VCI of the

service.
Uplink Policy
Displays the QoS policy of

the uplink ATM
connection.
Down link Policy
Displays the QoS policy of

the downlink ATM
connection.
Parameters for Port Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the port of the

ATM IMA service.
Port Type
Displays the port type of

the ATM IMA service.
Max. VPI

VPI.
Max. VCI

VCI.
VCC-Supported VPI
Count
Displays the count of VPIs

that are used for VC
exchange.
Parameters for Bound Paths

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
Level
Displays the level of

bound paths.
Direction

Bound Paths
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

784

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Number of Bound Paths

bound paths.
IMA Group Status

IMA group.
Parameters of PWs
Tab
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
General
Attributes
PW ID
Displays the PW ID.
Work Status

status of a PW.
Displays whether a PW
is enabled.
Displays the PW
signaling type.
PW Signaling Type
NOTE
static PWs only.
PW Type
l Displays the
configured PW type.
l This parameter
corresponds to the
connection type.
The encapsulation
type can be 1:1 or N:
1 if the connection
type is PVP or PVC.
PW Direction
Displays the direction

of the PW.
PW Encapsulation
Type
Displays the
encapsulation type of
the packets on the PW.
NOTE
MPLS only.
Displays the configured

PW Ingress label.
PW Outgoing
Label / Sink Port
Displays the configured

PW Egress label.
Peer LSR ID
Displays the LSR ID of

the destination.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

785

Tab
QoS
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel Type

tunnel.
Ingress Tunnel No
Displays the tunnel ID

of the ingress tunnel.
Egress Tunnel No
Displays the tunnel ID

of the egress tunnel.
Local Operating
Status
Displays the local

running status of PW.
Remote Operating
Status
Displays the remote

running status of PW.
Overall Operating
Status
Displays the
comprehensive
working status of the
PW.
Tunnel for Auto

Selection
Displays the tunnel that

is automatically
selected.
PW ID
Displays the PW ID.
Direction
Displays the direction

of the PW.
Bandwidth Limit
whether the bandwidth
limit is enabled.
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an
MPLS tunnel. (One
ATM PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l An ATM PWE3
service corresponds
to a PW. Therefore,
this function can
also limit the
bandwidth of ATM
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

786

Tab
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR (Kbit/s)
the committed
information rate.
CBS (kbyte)
the excess burst size of
the PW.
PIR (kbit/s)
the peak information
rate.
Advanced
Attributes
PBS (kbyte)
the maximum excess
burst size of the PW.
EXP
The OptiX RTN 950

parameter.
Policy
The OptiX RTN 950

parameter.
Control Word
Must Use
whether to use the
control word. In the
MPLS packet switching
network, the control
word is used to transmit
packet information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
No Use

787

Tab
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Channel
Type
CW
l Displays or
specifies the mode
of PW connectivity
check.
None
Alert Label
l The value None

indicates that the
control word is not
supported. That is,
the PW connectivity
check is not
supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l The value Alert
Label indicates
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation
mode.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
None
l Displays or
specifies the VCCV
verification mode.
The VCCV
verification is used
for PW connectivity
check.
l If the VCCV-ping
function is required,
do not set VCCV
Verification Mode
of PWs to None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

788

Tab
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max. Concatenated
Cell Count
1 to 31
l Displays or
specifies the
maximum number
of concatenated
cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a
maximum of 2 to 31
ATM cells are
encapsulated into
one packet.
Packet Loading
Time (us)
100 to 50000
l Displays or
specifies the packet
loading time. Once
the packet loading
time expires, the
packet is sent out
even if the
concatenated cells
are less than the
maximum.
l If Max.
Concatenated Cell
Count assumes the
value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is,
the packet will be
sent out once the cell
is loaded.
Parameters for CoS Mapping

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

789

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS Mapping
Specifies the policy for

mapping different ATM
service levels to CoS
priorities. By setting this
parameter, different
quality measures are
provided for different
ATM services.

NOTE
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID

created.
Working PW ID

working PW.
Protection PW ID

protection PW.
Protection Mode

mode.
Enabling Status
Enabled
the PW protection
group.
Disabled

Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Switchover Mode

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
switching.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

790

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Restoration Mode
Non-revertive
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
Revertive

are switched to the
original working PW
switched to the
recommended.
Time(min)
1 to 12
the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.

(100ms)
0 to 100
protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

791

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Deployment Status

group.
Switchover Status

group.
Protocol Status

Working Path Status


A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967295
Specifies the service ID.
Service Name
Specifies the service

name.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

792

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
UNIs-NNI
UNIs-NNI

the ATM service.
UNI-UNI
l UNIs-NNI: This value

applies to ATM PWE3
services. The attributes
in Connection, PW,
and CoS Mapping
l UNI-UNI: This value
applies to common
ATM services. Only
the attributes in
Connection need to be
configured.
Connection Type
PVC
PVC
PVP
Transparent
Specifies the connection

type of the ATM service.
For common ATM
services (UNI-UNI):
l PVP: Only the VPIs of
the source and sink are
exchanged.
l PVC: The VPIs and
VCIs of the source and
sink are exchanged.
For ATM PWE3 services
(UNIs-NNI):
l PVP: This value
applies to the N-to-1/1to-1 VPC
encapsulation mode.
l PVC: This value
applies to the N-to-1/1to-1 VCC
encapsulation mode.
For transparently
transmitted ATM
services, set Connection
Type to Transparent.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

793

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
No Protection
No Protection
l Specifies the
protection mode of the
PW. This parameter is
available only when
Service Type is UNIsNNI.
PW APS

according to the
network plan.
Connection Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Name

ATM connection.
Source Board
Specifies the source board

of the ATM service.
Source Port
Specifies the source port

of the ATM service.
Source VPI(eg.35,36-39)
UNI: 0 to 255
Specifies the VPI of the

service.
NNI: 0 to 4095
Source VCI(eg.35,36-39)
32 to 65535
Specifies the VCI of the

service.
PW ID
1 to 4294967295

Sink Board
Specifies the sink board of

the ATM service.
Sink Port
Specifies the sink board of

the ATM service.
NOTE
This parameter does not
need to be set if Service
Type is UNIs-NNI. This
parameter needs to be set if
Service Type is UNI-UNI
and the value must be
different from that of the
source board.
Sink VPI(eg.35,36-39)
UNI: 0 to 255
NNI: 0 to 4095
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Specifies the VPI of the

service.
794

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VCI(eg.35,36-39)
32 to 65535
Specifies the VCI of the

service.
Uplink Policy
Specifies the QoS policy

of the uplink ATM
connection.
Down link Policy
Specifies the QoS policy

of the downlink ATM
connection.
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS, all the parameters of working and protection PWs
need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

Working Status

status of the PW.
NOTE
This parameter is available
only after the PW
parameters are configured.
Enable Status

status of the PW.
NOTE
This parameter is available
only after the PW
parameters are configured.
PW Signaling Type
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Static
Static

Labels for static PWs need

to be manually assigned.
795

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
The ATM connection type

is PVC:

is PVC:

the PW.
l ATM n-to-one VCC

cell transport
ATM n-to-one VCC cell

transport
l ATM one-to-one VCC

Cell Mode

is PVP:
l In the case of ATM

1_to_1 encapsulation,
one PW carries one
VPC or VCC.

is PVP:
ATM n-to-one VPC cell

transport
l In the case of ATM

n_to_1 encapsulation,
one PW carries one or
more VPCs or VCCs.
l ATM n-to-one VPC

cell transport
l ATM one-to-one VPC
Cell Mode
PW Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional

the PW.
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the
packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label /
Source Port
16 to 1048575

label.
PW Egress Label / Sink

Port
16 to 1048575

label.
Manually
Manually

select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS

Tunnel
PW will fail.
Peer LSR ID

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

796

QoS Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit

bandwidth limit is
enabled.
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an MPLS
tunnel. (One ATM
PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l An ATM PWE3
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy

CIR (Kbit/s)

the PW.
CBS (kbyte)
Specifies the excess burst

size of the PW.
PIR (kbit/s)
Specifies the peak

the PW.
PBS (kbyte)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


excess burst size of the
PW.
797

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP

Parameters of Advanced Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
Must Use
Must Use
use the control word.
In the MPLS packet
switching network, the
transmit packet
information.
No Use
l Set Control Word to

Must Use if PW
Type is ATM 1:1.
CW
CW
None
Alert Label

PW connectivity
check.
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
PW connectivity check
is not supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l The value Alert
Label indicates VCCV
packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
Ping
None

used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

798

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max. Concatenated Cell

Count
1 to 31
10
l Specifies the
maximum number of
concatenated cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a maximum
of 2 to 31 ATM cells
are encapsulated into
one packet.
Packet Loading Time

(us)
100 to 50000
1000
l Specifies the packet

loading time. Once the
packet loading time
expires, the packet is
sent out even if the
concatenated cells are
less than the
maximum.
l If Max. Concatenated
Cell Count assumes
the value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is, the
packet will be sent out
once the cell is loaded.

NOTE
PW APS.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type

type.
Protection Group ID

group ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

799

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled

status of the PW
protection group.
Enabled

Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode

mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
mode.
Working PW ID

working PW.
Protection PW ID

protection PW.
Switching Mode

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports dual-ended
switching.
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter
are switched to the
original working PW
switched to the
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

800

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Time(min)
1 to 12
l Specifies the WTR

group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.

(100ms)
0 to 100

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.
Detection mode

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

801

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status

status of PW OAM.
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing

Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

802

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
l CV: The detection

fixed interval.
FFD

the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.
(ms)
3.3
50
10

detection packets.
l This parameter is
configurable when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD and
assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
20
50
100
200
500

3.3 for PW APS.

received.
received.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

803


NOTE
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode

mode.
Protection Group ID

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Working PW ID

protection pair.
Protection PW ID

protection pair.
Parameters for CoS Mapping

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID

that carries service.
CoS Mapping
Specifies the policy for

mapping different ATM
service levels to CoS
priorities. By setting this
parameter, different
quality measures are
provided for different
ATM services.
A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

804

Navigation Path
1.
OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Segment End Attributes tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source

of the ATM/IMA service.
Sink

the ATM/IMA service.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

805

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Direction
Source

the ATM connection.
Sink
l Source: indicates the

forward direction.
For common ATM
services (UNIUNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
source end to the
sink end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
services (UNINNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
UNI port side to the
MPLS interface
side.
l Sink: indicates the
backward direction.
For common ATM
services (UNIUNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
sink end to the
source end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
services (UNINNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side to the UNI port
side.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

806

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Segment and End

Attribute
Non segment and

Endpoint
Non segment and

Endpoint
Specifies the segment and

end attributes of the source
and sink of the ATM
connection.
Segment point
Endpoint
Segment and Endpoint
l Non segment and

endpoint: intermediate
point, which refers to
the OAM node
between two segment
points or two end
points. Therefore,
intermediate points
can be further
classified into
intermediate points
between segment
points, and
intermediate points
between end points.
Upon detecting a
fault, an
intermediate point
reports the
corresponding
alarms and inserts
segment AIS cells
and end AIS cells to
the downstream.
Afterwards, the
intermediate point
periodically sends
these cells.
An intermediate
point does not catch
any AIS/RDI cells.
l Segment point: an end
point of a segment.
One ATM link consists
of multiple segments.
Upon detecting a
fault, a segment
point reports the
corresponding
alarms and inserts
end AIS cells to the
downstream.
Afterwards, the
segment point
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

807

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
periodically sends
these cells.
A segment point
catches segment
AIS/RDI cells
only.
l End point: an end point
of an ATM link. It is
usually an edge point
on the ATM network.
Upon detecting a
fault, an end point
reports the
corresponding
alarms but does not
insert any AIS
cells.
An end point
catches end AIS/
RDI cells only.
l Segment and endpoint:
a segment-end point,
or an edge point of a
segment and an end.
Upon detecting a
fault, a segmentend point reports
the corresponding
alarms but does not
insert any AIS
cells.
A segment-end
point catches the
AIS/RDI cells of a
segment and an
end.
A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the CC Activation Status tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

808


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source

Sink

Source
Specifies the connection

direction.
Sink

forward direction.
For common ATM
indicates the
direction from the
source end to the
sink end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.
backward direction.
For common ATM
indicates the
direction from the
sink end to the
source end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

809

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Segment and End

Attribute

end attributes of nodes.
l Segment point: an end
point of a segment.
One ATM link consists
of multiple segments.
Segment CC cells are
terminated at segment
points.
l End point: an end point
of an ATM link. It is
usually an edge point
on an ATM network.
End-to-end CC cells
are terminated at end
points.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

810

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CC Activate Flag
Deactivate
l Specifies the CC
activation flag.
Source activate
Sink activate
Source + sink activate
l Deactivate: This node

does not transmit or
receive CC cells.
l Source activate: This
point transmits but
does not receive CC
cells.
l Sink activate: This
point receives but does
not transmit CC cells.
If this point does not
receive any service
cells or CC cells within
a time interval of 3.5
(0.5) seconds, it will
report the LOC alarm
and transmit AIS cells
in the forward
direction.
l Source + sink activate:
This node transmits
and receives CC cells.
If this point does not
receive any service
cells or CC cells within
a time interval of 3.5
(0.5) seconds, it will
report the LOC alarm
and transmit AIS cells
in the forward
direction.
l Once the node receives
any CC cells or service
cells, the LOC alarm
will be cleared.
A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback

Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATM
OAM.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

811

Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Remote Loopback Test tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source

Sink

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

812

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source

the ATM connection.
Sink

forward direction.
For common ATM
indicates the
direction from the
source end to the
sink end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.
backward direction.
For common ATM
indicates the
direction from the
sink end to the
source end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

813

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Segment and End

Attribute

end attribute.
l Segment LB cells are
looped back only at a
Segment point,
Segment and
Endpoint, or Non
segment and
Endpoint.
l End-to-end LB cells
are looped back only at
an Endpoint or
Segment and
Endpoint.
Loopback Point NE
l Specifies the NE
where the loopback
point is located.
l Before an end-to-end
LB test, you need to set
end points in the test
domain. After the test,
remove the end points.
l Before a segment-tosegment LB test, you
need to set segment
points in the test
domain. After the test,
remove the segment
points.
Test Result

loopback command is
successfully issued.
A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID

This topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the LLID tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

814


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Country Code
(Hexadecimal Code)
00 00

country code of the ATM
service. The value is 2
bytes in length.
Network Code
(Hexadecimal Code)
00 01

network code of the ATM
service. The value is 2
bytes in length.
NE Code (Hexadecimal
Code)
00 30 00 04 00 00 00 00 00
00 00
the NE code of the
ATM service. The
value is 11 bytes in
length.
l The default NE code
can be used if it is
unique on the network.
l NE code and NE ID are
associated. Therefore,
each NE on the
network has a unique
NE code.
A.10 Clock Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters

This topic describes physical clock parameters.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.
2.
Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

815

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
l External clock source

1 indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK or TIME1 port on
the CST or CSH board
in physical slot 7.
External clock source
2 indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK or TIME1 port on
the CST or CSH board
in physical slot 8.
l The internal clock
source is always at the
lowest priority and
indicates that the NE
works in the free-run
mode.
l The clock sources and
the corresponding
clock source priority
levels are determined
according to the clock
synchronization
schemes.
External Clock Source

Mode
2 Mbit/s
2Mbit/s
2 MHz
l This parameter
indicates the type of
the external clock
source signal.
according to the
external clock signal.
In normal cases, the
external clock signal is
a 2 Mbit/s signal.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

816

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronous Status Byte
SA4 to SA8
SA4

only when External
Clock Source Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the external clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
to be set only when the
SSM or extended SSM
is enabled. In normal
cases, the external
clock sources use the
SA4 to transmit the
SSM.
Clock Source Priority

Sequence (Highest: 1)
Displays the priority

sequence of clock sources.
clock source priority.
A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the
External Clock Port
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop
(PLL) clock source of the external clock port.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration >
Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Priority for PLL Clock Sources of 1st External Output tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

817

Parameters for configuring the priority table for the PLL clock source of the external
clock port
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
Internal Clock Source
l When the PLL clock

source of the external
clock port extracts the
system clock (namely,
the local clock of the
NE), Clock Source
Internal Clock
Source. In this case,
no manual
configuration is
required.
l When the PLL clock
source of the external
clock port needs to
extract the clock from
an SDH line board,
clock from a radio link,
clock from a PDH
tributary board, or
synchronous Ethernet
clock, set Clock
Source to the
corresponding clock
source according to the
network planning
information.
Current Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Displays the valid status

of clock sources.
818

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Lock Status
l The PLL clock source

of the external clock
port extracts only an
unlocked clock source.
l If a clock source is in
locked state, the PLL
clock source of the
external clock port
does not extract the
clock source until the
clock source is
changed from the
locked state to the
unlocked state.
l The internal clock
source should not be in
locked state.
Clock Source Priority

(Highest: 1)
Displays the priority level

of a clock source. 1 is the
highest priority.
A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet

This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path
1.
Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2.
Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Affiliated Subnet

not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

819

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Status
Start Extended SSM

Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol
l The SSM protocol is a

scheme used for
synchronous
management on an
SDH network and
indicates that the SSM
is passed by the lower
four bits of the S1 byte
and can be exchanged
between the nodes.
The SSM protocol
ensures that the
equipment
automatically selects
the clock source of the
highest quality and
highest priority, thus
preventing mutual
clock tracing.
Start Standard SSM

Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol
l After the standard

SSM protocol is
started, the NE first
performs the
on the clock source
quality level
information provided
by the S1 byte. If the
quality level of the
clock source is the
same, the NE then
performs the
priority table. That is,
the NE selects an
unlocked clock source
that is of the highest
quality and highest
priority from all the
current available clock
sources as the clock
source to be
synchronized and
traced by the local
station.
l If the SSM protocol is
stopped, it indicates
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

820

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
that the S1 byte is not
used. The NE selects
and switches a clock
source only according
to the sequence
specified in the
priority table. The
clock source of the
highest priority is used
as the clock source to
be traced.
l After the SSM
protocol is stopped,
each NE performs the
on the clock according
to the preset priority
table of the clock
source only when the
clock source of a
higher priority is lost.
Clock Source
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


the clock source that is
configured for an NE. In
Clock Source Priority,
you can set whether to add
or delete a clock source.
821

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source ID
(None)
(None)

only when the
extended SSM
protocol is started.
1 to 15
l Clock source IDs are

allocated for the
following clock
sources only:
External clock
source
Internal clock
source of the node
that accesses the
external clock
sources
Internal clock
source of the joint
node of a ring and a
chain or the joint
node of two rings
Line clock source
that enters the ring
when the intra-ring
line clock source is
configured at the
joint node of a ring
and a chain or the
joint node of two
rings
A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality

This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Received Quality tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

822

Parameters for Clock Source Quality

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source

the name of the
configured clock source.
In Clock Source
Priority, you can set
whether to add or delete a
clock source.
Configured Quality
Unknown
Synchronization Quality
Automatic Extraction

the quality level that is
configured for the clock
source. This function is
required only in a special
scenario or in a test.
Generally, this parameter
need not be set.

the clock source quality
signal received by the NE.
The NE extracts the clock
source quality signal from
the S1 byte of each clock
source.
G.811 Clock Signal

G.812 Transit Clock
Signal
G.812 Local Clock Signal
G.813 SDH Equipment
Timing Source (SETS)
Signal
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
Automatic Extraction
Received Quality
Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

the name of the NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

823

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Quality Level 0
Do Not Use For

Synchronization
Do Not Use For

Synchronization

the clock quality whose
level is manually set to
zero.
G.811 Reference Clock

Between G.811 Reference
Clock and G.812 Transit
Clock
G.812 Transit Clock
Between G.812 Transit
Clock and G.812 Local
Clock
G.812 Local Clock
Between G.812 Local
Clock and synchronous
equipment timing source
(SETS)
SETS Clock
Between synchronous
equipment timing source
(SETS) and quality
unavailable
l Do Not Use For

Synchronization: the
notification
information in the
reverse direction of the
selected
synchronization clock
source to avoid direct
mutual locking of
adjacent NEs.
l G.811 Reference
Clock: the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
811.
l Between G.811
Reference Clock and
G.812 Transit Clock:
lower than the quality
level of the clock
signal specified in
ITU-T G.811 but
higher than the quality
level of the transit
exchange clock signal
812.
l G.812 Transit Clock:
the transit exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812
Transit Clock and G.
812 Local Clock:
level of the transit
exchange clock signal
812 but higher than the
quality level of the
local exchange clock
signal specified in
ITU-T G.812.
l G.812 Local Clock:
the local exchange
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

824

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812 Local
Clock and
synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS): lower
than the quality level
of the local exchange
in ITU-T G.812 but
level of the clock
signal of the SETS.
l SETS Clock: the clock
signal of the SETS.
l Between synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS) and
quality unavailable:
level of the clock
signal of the SETS but
level unavailable in the
synchronous timing
source.
A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the SSM Output tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

825

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Line Port
l This parameter
indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output
port of the current
available line clock
source and the external
clock source. This
output port can
transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Output S1 Byte Info
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Output S1 Byte Info

is valid only when the
SSM protocol or the
extended SSM
l Output S1 Byte Info
indicates whether the
SSM is output at the
line port.
l When the line port is
connected to an NE in
the same clock subnet,
set Output S1 Byte
Info to Enabled.
Otherwise, set this
parameter to
Disabled.
A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Clock ID Output tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

826

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Line Port
l This parameter
indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output
port of the current
available line clock
source and the external
clock source. This
output port can
transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Enabled
Output Clock ID
Enabled
Disabled
l Output Clock ID is
valid only when the
extended SSM
l Output Clock ID
indicates whether the
clock source ID is
output at the line port.
l If the line ports are
connected to the NEs
in the same clock
subnet and if the
extended SSM
protocol is started on
the opposite NE,
Output Clock ID is
set to Enabled.
Otherwise, this
parameter is set to
Disabled.
A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration

Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

827

Navigation Path
1.
Clock Source Switching.
2.
Click the Clock Source Reversion tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

the name of the NE.
Higher Priority Clock

Source Reversion
Auto-Revertive
Auto-Revertive
l When the quality of a

higher-priority clock
source degrades, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to a lowerpriority clock source.
If this parameter is set
to Auto-Revertive,
the NE automatically
switches the clock
source to the higherpriority clock source
when this higherpriority clock source
restores. If this
parameter is set to
Non-Revertive, the
NE does not
automatically switch
the clock source to the
source when this
source restores.
Non-Revertive
l Correct setting of
Clock Source
Switching Condition
ensures the reliability
of the clock source
switching. To improve
the clock quality,
select AutoRevertive. Otherwise,
to prevent jitter of the
clock, generally, it is
Non-Revertive.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

828

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source WTR

Time(min.)
0 to 12
l This parameter
specifies the duration
from the time when the
clock source
restoration is detected
to the time when the
clock source switching
is triggered. This
parameter is used to
avoid frequent
switching of the clock
source due to
instability of the clock
source state within a
short time.
only when Higher
Priority Clock
Source Reversion is
set to AutoRevertive.
A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1.
Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching.
2.
Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source

the name of the clock
source.
Current Status
Valid

whether the clock source
is valid.
Invalid
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

829

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Lock Status
Lock
l This parameter
specifies the locking
status of the clock
source in the priority
table.
Unlock
l Lock: A clock source

in the priority table is
in the locked state. The
clock source in the
locked state cannot be
switched.
l Unlock: A clock
source in the priority
table is in the unlocked
state. The clock source
in the unlocked state
can be switched.
Switching Source

the clock source to be
traced by the NE after the
switching.
Switching Status
Normal

the switching status of the
current clock source.
Manual Switching
Forced Switching
A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching

Conditions
This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources.
Navigation Path
1.
Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Clock Source Switching Conditions tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

NE.
Clock Source
Displays the clock source.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

830

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AIS Alarm
Yes
No

recommended.
No

set to Yes, it indicates
that clock source
switching occurs if the
clock source reports
the AIS alarm.
set to No, it indicates
that no clock source
the AIS alarm.
B1 BER ThresholdCrossing
The parameter is invalid.
RLOS,RLOF and OOF/

RLOC Alarms
Yes
Yes

that clock switching
occurs when the clock
source reports the RLOS,
RLOF, OOF, or LOC
alarm.
CV Threshold-Crossing
CV Threshold
B2-EXC Alarm
Yes
No

recommended.
No

set to Yes, it indicates
that clock source
the B2-EXC alarm.
set to No, it indicates
that no clock source
the B2-EXC alarm.
A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External

Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

831

Navigation Path
Physical Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
2M Phase-Locked
Source Number
External Clock Source 1

the number of the external
clock source output of the
NE.
External Clock Output

Mode
2Mbit/s
2Mbit/s
l This parameter
specifies the mode of
the output clock.
External Clock Source 2
2MHz

to be set according to
the requirements of the
interconnected
equipment. Generally,
the output external
clock signal is a 2
Mbit/s signal.
External Clock Output
Timeslot
SA4 to SA8
ALL
ALL

only when External
Clock Output Mode
is set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the output clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
to ALL, it indicates
that all the bits of the
TS0 are used to
transmit the SSM.
you use the default
value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

832

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
External Source Output

Threshold
Threshold Disabled
Threshold Disabled
l This parameter
specifies the lowest
quality of the output
clock. If the clock
quality is lower than
the value of this
parameter, it indicates
that the external clock
source does not output
any clock signal.
Not Inferior to G.813

SETS Signal
Local Signal
Transit Clock Signal
Clock Signal

to Threshold
Disabled, it indicates
that the external clock
source always outputs
the clock signal.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked
Source Failure
Condition
No Failure Condition
No Failure Condition
AIS
LOF
AIS OR LOF
l This parameter
specifies the failure
condition of the 2
Mbit/s phase-locked
clock source.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked
Source Failure Action
Shut Down Output
Shut Down Output
2M Output S1 Byte
Unavailable
Send AIS

only when 2M PhaseLocked Source
Failure Condition is
not set to No Failure
Condition.
l This parameter
specifies the operation
of the 2 Mbit/s phaselocked loop (PLL)
when the 2 Mbit/s
phase-locked clock
source meets the
failure conditions.
you use the default
value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

833


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path
Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

the name of the NE.
NE Clock Mode

the working mode of the
NE clock.
S1 Byte Synchronization
Quality Info

the synchronization
quality information of the
S1 byte.
S1 Byte Clock
Synchronous Source

the clock synchronization
source of the S1 byte.
Synchronous Source

the synchronization
source.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

834

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Data Output Method in

Holdover Mode
Normal Data Output
Normal Data Output
l When all the reference

timing signals are lost,
the slave clock
changes to the
holdover mode. At this
time, the slave clock
works based on the
latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
Then, the frequency of
the oscillator drifts
slowly to ensure that
the offset between the
frequency of the slave
clock and the reference
frequency is very
small. As a result, the
impact caused by the
drift is limited within
the specified
requirement.
Keep the Latest Data
l Normal Data Output:

The slave clock works
based on the latest
frequency information
stored before the
reference timing
signals are lost, and the
holdover duration
depends on the size of
the phase-locked clock
register on the
equipment. The
holdover duration can
be up to 24 hours.
l Keep the Latest Data:
The slave clock works
in holdover mode all
the time based on the
latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters

This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

835

A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source

This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source.
Navigation Path
Clock > ACR Clock from the Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ACR Clock Source
Identifies the ACR clock

domain.
CES Service

specifies the CES service
that the master ACR clock
source uses.
Track Mode

the trace mode of an ACR
clock source.
Lock Status

whether an ACR clock
source is locked.
Current CES Service

the CES service from
which the current ACR
clock source is obtained.
A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain

This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains.
Navigation Path
Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Domain
Displays the clock

domain.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

836

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Domain Board

the clock domain is
located.
Clock Port
Displays the Smart E1

ports that are bound to a
clock domain.
A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation

This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.
Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Domain
System Clock Domain
System Clock Domain
Specifies the clock

domain to be bound.
CES ACR1 Clock

Domain
CES ACR2 Clock
Domain
CES ACR3 Clock
Domain
CES ACR4 Clock
Domain
Clock Domain Board

the clock domain is
located.
Board

the Smart E1 port is
located.
Available Port

ports that are not bound to
a clock domain.
Selected Port

ports that are bound to a
clock domain.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

837


This topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485
monitoring port.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Auxiliary

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the port that

functions as the auxiliary
port.
Interface Mode
1st external clock
1st external clock
Specifies the working

mode of the auxiliary port.
2nd external clock

1st external time
2nd external time
MON
Orderwire
S1/F1
Commissioning serial port
l If the running status of

the outdoor cabinet
needs to be monitored,
set Interface Mode to
MON.
l For an external time
input/output port, set
Interface Mode to 1st
external time or 2nd
external time.
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

838

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Call Waiting Time

(s)
1 to 9
l This parameter indicates the waiting

time after the local station dials the
number. If the calling station does not
receive the response message from the
called station within the call waiting
time, it automatically removes the
communication connection.
l If less than 30 nodes exist in the
orderwire subnet, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to five seconds. If
more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to nine seconds.
l The call waiting time should be set to the
same for all the NEs.
Dialling Mode
Pulse
Dual-Tone
Frequency
Conference Call
Dual-Tone
Frequency
This parameter indicates the dialling mode

of the orderwire phone.
888
l This parameter indicates the telephone

number of the network-wide orderwire
conference call.
l When an OptiX RTN 950 dials the
telephone number 888, the orderwire
phones of all the NEs on the orderwire
subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 950
receives the call, the orderwire phones
on the other NEs do not ring. In this case,
the orderwire point-to-multipoint group
call changes to a point-to-point call
between two NEs.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call should be the same for
all the nodes on the same subnet.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call must have the same
length as the telephone number of the
orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local
site.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

839

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Phone 1
100 to 99999999
101
l This parameter specifies the orderwire

phone number of the local station. An
addressing call refers to a point-to-point
call.
l The length of the orderwire phone
number of each NE should be the same.
It is recommended that you set the phone
number to a three-digit number.
l The orderwire phone number of each NE
should be unique. It is recommended that
the phone numbers are allocated from
101 for the NEs in a sequential order
according to the NE IDs.
l The orderwire phone number cannot be
set to the group call number 888 and
cannot start with 888.
Available
Orderwire Port
This parameter indicates the available port

for the orderwire phone.
Selected
Orderwire Port
This parameter indicates the selected port

for the orderwire phone.
A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Orderwire
Occupied Bytes
E1
E1
l This parameter specifies the overhead

byte that is used to transmit the orderwire
signals.
E2
l Regardless the parameter value, the

radio link always uses a customized
overhead byte to transmit the orderwire
signals. Hence, this parameter should be
set according to the occupied SDH
overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

840


This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Data
Path
l This parameter indicates the available F1

data channel.
l Two data channels should be selected for
the configuration.
Number

F1 data port.
Data Channel 1
l If an SDH optical or electrical line port

is selected, this parameter corresponds to
the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line
port.
l If an IF port is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the customized F1 byte in
the microwave frame at the IF port.
l If F1 is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the
AUX board. The F1/S1 interface
complies with ITU-T G.703 and
operates at the rate of 64 kbit/s.
Data Channel 2

This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

841

Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Overhead Byte
SERIAL1 to
SERIAL4
SERIAL1
l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical

line, the preset overhead byte is used to
transmit the asynchronous data services.
l In the case of a radio link, a customized
serial overhead byte in the microwave
frame is used to transmit the
asynchronous data services.
Broadcast Data
Source
No Data
l When this parameter is set to the

SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding AUX board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.
Available
Broadcast Data
Sink
This parameter indicates the available

broadcast data sink.
Selected Broadcast
Data Sink
l When this parameter is set to the

SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding AUX board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path
Select the AUX board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function
Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

842

Parameters for the General Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object
This parameter indicates the operation

object.
Relay Control
Mode
Auto Control
Auto Control
l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the

alarming relay is started up
automatically. Otherwise, the alarming
relay is shut down.
Manual Control
l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major

Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in
Critical Alarm(K1) need to be set.
Relay Status in
Major Alarm(K0)
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates that the status

of the relay is set manually for major
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the "ON"
status for major alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"
status for major alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Relay Status in
Critical Alarm(K1)
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates that the status

of the relay is set manually for critical
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the enabled
status for critical alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled
status for critical alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Parameters for the Input Relay

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object

object.
Path Name

name of the channel.
Using Status
Unused
Unused
This parameter specifies whether the alarm

interface of the input relay is used.
Used
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

843

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Alarm Mode
Relay Turns Off/

High Level
Relay Turns Off/

High Level
l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns

Off/High Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned off.
Relay Turns On/

Low Level
l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns

On/Low Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned on.
l This parameter is valid only when Using
Status is set to Used.
Alarm Severity
Critical Alarm
Critical Alarm
This parameter specifies the severity of the

alarm that is generated at the input relay.
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Parameters for the Output Relay

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object

object.
Path Name

name of the output channel.
Use or Not
Unused
Unused
This parameter specifies whether the alarm

interface of the output relay is used.
Used
Parameters for the Temperature Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object

object.
Monitor Status

temperature attribute is monitored.
Temperature
Upper Threshold
(DEG.C)
This parameter indicates the upper

temperature threshold of the board. When
the actual temperature is higher than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
Temperature
Lower Threshold
(DEG.C)
This parameter indicates the lower

temperature threshold of the board. When
the actual temperature is lower than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

844

Parameters for the Alarm Relay

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Alarm Severity
Critical Alarm
This parameter indicates the severity of the

alarm.
CSK-1
This parameter specifies the channel of the

output alarm relay.
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Alarm Output
Channel
CSK-1
CSK-2
CSK-3
CSK-4
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

845

B Board Loopback Types
Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types.

Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support
Board
Loopback Type
Remarks
SL1D/SL1DA
l Inloops at optical ports
l Outloops at optical ports

l Outloops on VC-4 paths
SP3S/SP3D/ML1/MD1
l Inloops at E1 tributary
ports
l Outloops at E1 tributary
ports
EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA
l Inloops at the MAC layer of

Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the PHY layer of

Ethernet ports
EFP8

Ethernet ports excluding
ports 9 and 10 (bridging
ports)

port 10 (bridging port)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

846

B Board Loopback Types
Board
Loopback Type
Remarks
EMS6

ports 7 and 8 (bridging
ports)

port 8 (bridging port)
IF1
l Inloops at IF ports
l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports
IFU2/IFX2
l Inloops and outloops at IF

ports
l Inloops and outloops at

multiplexing ports
IF_ETH ports
ISU2/ISX2
l Inloops and outloops at IF

ports
l Inloops and outloops at

multiplexing ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

847

C Indicators of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CST
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

board.
PROG

100 ms intervals

of the board.

300 ms intervals

of the board.
On (green)


100 ms intervals
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

board.

848

Indicator
State
Meaning
On (red)

the board.
SYNC
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

switchover occurs.
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)

system.
Off

ACT
On (green)

been activated.
Off

activated.
Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

849

Indicator
State
Meaning
PROG

100 ms intervals

of the board.

300 ms intervals

of the board.
On (green)


100 ms intervals

board.
On (red)

the board.
SYNC
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

switchover occurs.
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)

system.
Off

ACT
On (green)

been activated.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

850

Indicator
State
Meaning
Off

activated.
Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
The ODU is working

properly.
On (red)

l There is no power
RMT
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (yellow)

alarms.

300 ms intervals
On (yellow)

reporting defects.
Off

of defects.

851

Indicator
State
Meaning
ACT
On (green)

active one.
the board has been
activated.
standby one.
Off
Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)

services.
On (yellow)

services.
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major

alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow)
and off at 300 ms
intervals
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.

852

Indicator
ACT
State
Meaning
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)

l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off
l In an unprotected system, the board is not

activated.
Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
The ODU is working

properly.
On (red)

l There is no power
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (yellow)

alarms.

300 ms intervals

853

Indicator
State
Meaning
RMT
On (yellow)

reporting defects.
Off

of defects.
On (green)

active one.
ACT
the board has been
activated.
Off

standby one.
Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2

Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)

normal.
On (red)
Off

disabled.
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off
STAT

l There is no power
SRV
LINK
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

On (green)

854

Indicator
ODU
State
Meaning
On (red)
On (green)
The ODU is working

properly.
On (red)

l There is no power
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)

alarms.

300 ms intervals
On (yellow)

reporting defects.
Off

of defects.
On (green)

active one.
the board has been
activated.
Off

standby one.
Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2

Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)

normal.
On (red)
Off

disabled.
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
STAT
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

855

Indicator
State
Meaning
Off

l There is no power
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
The ODU is working

properly.
On (red)

l There is no power
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)

alarms.

300 ms intervals
On (yellow)

reporting defects.
Off

of defects.
On (green)

active one.
the board has been
activated.
Off

standby one.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

856

Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

SRV
PROG
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)
Off

100 ms intervals

board.

300 ms intervals

the board.
On (green)

being initialized.

ms intervals

On (red)

board.
board.
LINK1a
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)

Blinking (green)

data.
Off


857

Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK2a
On (green)

Blinking (green)

data.
Off

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

SRV
PROG
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)
Off

100 ms intervals

board.

300 ms intervals

the board.
On (green)

being initialized.

ms intervals
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)


858

Indicator
State
Meaning
On (red)
The memory self-check fails or loading

upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
L/A1a
L/A2a
On (green)

Blinking (yellow)

data.
Off

On (green)

Blinking (yellow)

data.
Off

NOTE
a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the
Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

PROG
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

100 ms intervals

board.

300 ms intervals

the board.

859

Indicator
State
Meaning
On (green)
l The upper layer software is being

initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.

ms intervals

On (red)

board.
board.
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
The system is working normally.
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)

ms intervals


ms off

Off

Blinking (yellow)

data.
Off

transmitting data.
On (green)

ms intervals


ms off

Off


860

Indicator
State
Meaning
ACT2
Blinking (yellow)

data.
Off

transmitting data.
Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

PROG

100 ms intervals

board.

300 ms intervals

the board.
On (green)

being initialized.

ms intervals

On (red)

board.
board.
SRV
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)

861

Indicator
State
Meaning
Off
Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

Off

configured.
On (red)

SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.
Off

SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.
On (red)

SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.
Off

SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.
Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

properly.

862

Indicator
State
Meaning
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

Off

configured.
Table C-14 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

properly.
On (red)
Off

l There is no power
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

On (yellow)

Off

configured.
Table C-15 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)

863

Indicator
State
Meaning
Off

board.
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

system.
On (yellow)

system.
Off
Table C-16 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU

Indicator
Status
Description
PWR
On (green)
The power supply is connected.
Off
There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power

supply is connected incorrectly.
Table C-17 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN

Indicator
State
Meaning
FAN
On (green)
The fan is working properly.
On (red)
The fan is faulty.
Off
The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the
subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

864

D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Weight and Power Consumption of Each

Board
Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board
Board
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Weight (kg)
Power Consumption (W)
CST
0.72 kg
< 20.7 W
CSH
0.74 kg
< 25.3 W
IF1
0.72 kg
< 12.0 W
IFU2
0.79 kg
< 23.0 W
IFX2
0.80 kg
< 33.0 W
ISU2
0.60 kg
< 22.0 W
ISX2
0.60 kg
< 23.0 W
EM6T
0.37 kg
< 10.4 W
EM6TA
0.40 kg
< 16.2 W
EM6F
0.40 kg
< 11.3 W
EM6FA
0.40 kg
< 15.4 W
EMS6
0.50 kg
< 16.5 W
EFP8
0.60 kg
< 13.5 W
SL1D
0.30 kg
< 3.4 W
SL1DA
0.30 kg
< 3.3 W
ML1
0.45 kg
< 7.0 W
MD1
0.50 kg
< 12.2 W

865

Board
SP3S
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Weight (kg)
Power Consumption (W)
0.50 kg(VER.B)
< 5.7 W(VER.B)
0.40 kg(VER.C)
< 4.8 W(VER.C)
0.64 kg(VER.B)
< 9.6 W(VER.B)
0.54 kg(VER.C)
< 8.3 W(VER.C)
AUX
0.27 kg
< 1.3 W
PIU
0.12 kg
< 0.5 W
FAN
0.30 kg
< 4.1 W (room temperature)
SP3D
< 29.6 W (high temperature)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
TCU6
0.27 kg
Empty chassis
(with only the
backplane)
2.80 kg

866

E Glossary
Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

E.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
E.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
E.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
E.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
E.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
E.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

867

E Glossary
E.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
1U
The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
E.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
A
ABR
See available bit rate
ACAP
See adjacent channel alternate polarization
access control list
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
ACL
See access control list
adaptive modulation
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme according to

the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation scheme to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts
the low-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the anti-interference capability of the
link that carries high-priority services.
ADC
See analog to digital converter
add/drop multiplexer
Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals
contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/
or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Address Resolution
Protocol
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to

MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.
adjacent channel
alternate polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal

polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
ADM
See add/drop multiplexer
administrative unit
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
AF
See assured forwarding
aggregation
A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or

conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

868

AIS
E Glossary
See alarm indication signal
alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network
Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the
details of the alarm.
alarm cascading
The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
Alarm Filtering
An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on
the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm
information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or
stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm suppression
A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
AM
See adaptive modulation
analog to digital
converter
An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The
reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS
See automatic protection switching
ARP
See Address Resolution Protocol
assured forwarding
One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
Asynchronous
Transfer Mode
A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.
A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in
the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.
Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM
See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM PVC
ATM permanent virtual circuit
ATPC
See automatic transmit power control
attenuator
A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
AU
See administrative unit
automatic protection
switching
Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch

to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatic transmit
power control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
at the receiver
available bit rate
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

869

E Glossary
B
backward defect
indication
When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)
to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth
A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a

network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
base station controller
A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks
with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides
the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power
control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one
or more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic
and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio
equipment, and the antenna.
basic input/output
system
A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control

programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
BDI
See backward defect indication
BE
See best effort
BER
See bit error rate
best effort
A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
binding strap
The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent
polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIOS
See basic input/output system
BIP
See bit interleaved parity
bit error
An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding

bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate
Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.
bit interleaved parity
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
BPDU
See bridge protocol data unit
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

870

E Glossary
bridge protocol data

unit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast
A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is

determined by the broadcast address.
BSC
See base station controller
BTS
See base transceiver station
buffer
A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in inter-networking to
compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data
can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a
program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will
be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store
an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.
C
cable tie
The tape used to bind the cables.
cable tray
N/A
cable trough
N/A
CAR
See committed access rate
CBR
See constant bit rate
CBS
See committed burst size
CC
See connectivity check
CCC
See circuit cross connect
CCDP
See co-channel dual polarization
CCM
See continuity check message
CE
See customer edge
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
CES
See circuit emulation service
CF
See compact flash
CGMP
See Cisco Group Management Protocol
channel
A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two

or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

871

E Glossary
CIR
See committed information rate
circuit cross connect
An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.
circuit emulation
service
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
Cisco Group
Management Protocol
N/A
CIST
See common and internal spanning tree
CIST root
A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.
clock tracing
The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
co-channel dual
polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelength
division multiplexing
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into

the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM
does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in a short-distance chain network.
colored packet
A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.
committed access rate
A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size
committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
rate
conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
common and internal
spanning tree
The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical
continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP
to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
compact flash
Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
concatenation
A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
connectivity check
Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

872

E Glossary
constant bit rate
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check
message
CCM is used to detect the link status.
corrugated pipe
Used to protect optical fibers.
CPU
See central processing unit
CRC
See cyclic redundancy check
cross polarization
interference
cancellation
A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
customer edge
A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM
See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancy
check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
data communication
network
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data

Communication Function (DCF).
data communications
channel
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
Datagram
A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,

UDP datagram.
DC
See direct current
DC-C
See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C
DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C
See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-I
See DC-return isolate (with ground)
DC-return common
(with ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return common
(with ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

873

E Glossary
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
ground)
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC
See data communications channel
DCN
See data communication network
DDF
See digital distribution frame
DDN
See digital data network
DE
See discard eligible
A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series
of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning
functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
code point
A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply
differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ
policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and
other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffServ
See differentiated services
digital data network
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital distribution
frame
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital modulation
A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the
carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the
information can be transmitted by the carrier.
direct current
Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or
change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible
A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports
the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic
exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the
case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
Distance Vector
Multicast Routing
Protocol
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical
dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
datagrams with its neighbors.
DS boundary node
A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a

domain that is not DS-capable.
DS domain
In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of

network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides
point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.
DS interior node
A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node
A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP
See differentiated services code point
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

874

E Glossary
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
DVMRP
See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
E-Aggr
See Ethernet aggregation
E-LAN
See Ethernet LAN
E-Line
See Ethernet line
E-Tree
See Ethernet-tree
EBS
See excess burst size
ECC
See embedded control channel
EF
See expedited forwarding
electromagnetic
compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications

equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic
interference
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or

limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge
The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded control
channel
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC
See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
See electromagnetic interference
Engineering label
A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
EPL
See Ethernet private line
EPLAN
See Ethernet private LAN service
equalization
A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for

the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS
See Ethernet ring protection switching
ESD
See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack
Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet
A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision

Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.
Ethernet
A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision

Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

875

E Glossary
Ethernet aggregation
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual

connection).
Ethernet LAN
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet

virtual connection).
Ethernet line
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual

connection).
Ethernet private LAN

service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a

dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet ring
protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
Ethernet virtual
private LAN service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet virtual
private line
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet-tree
An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual

Connection.
ETS
European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI
See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
EVPL
See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN
See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
excess burst size
A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching
An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The

protection switching is not really performed.
expansion
Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables,

expanding the capacity of the storage system.
The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

876

E Glossary
E.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
F
failure
If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function
to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been
detected.
fast Ethernet
Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
fast link pulse
The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FD
See frequency diversity
FDI
See forward defect indication
FE
See fast Ethernet
FEC
See forward error correction
FFD
fast failure detection
fiber patch cord
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmable
gate array
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit

(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO
See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol
A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out
A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Forced switch
For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the
protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward defect
indication
Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the
LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the
defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected
higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error
correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

877

E Glossary
Forwarding plane
Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can
be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA
See field programmable gate array
fragment
Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.
Fragmentation
Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium
that cannot support the original size of the packet.
frame
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.
frequency diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP
See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex
A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both

directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line
telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard
at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with
one lane for each direction.
G
gateway network
element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
the NM application layer
GE
See gigabit Ethernet
generic framing
procedure
A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
standardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
GFP
See generic framing procedure
gigabit Ethernet
GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning
System
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and

timing services to worldwide users.
GNE
See gateway network element
GPS
See Global Positioning System
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

878

E Glossary
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GTS
See generic traffic shaping
GUI
See graphical user interface
guide rail
Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.
H
HA
See high availability
half-duplex
A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both

directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party
begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before
replying.
HDLC
See high level data link control
hierarchical quality of
service
A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according
to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high availability
Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve

high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes
over the system functions of the active module.
high level data link

control
The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer
of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by
adding a trailer and a header.
High Speed Downlink

Packet Access
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement

for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
higher order path
In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower
order path layers.
Hold priority
The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the
tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hop
A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents
a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot standby
A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and

storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When
the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in
the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire
system.
HP
See higher order path
HQoS
See hierarchical quality of service
HSB
See hot standby
HSDPA
See High Speed Downlink Packet Access
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

879

E Glossary
HSM
hitless switch mode
HTB
high tributary bus
hybrid radio
The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports
the AM function.
I
ICMP
See Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU
See indoor unit
IEC
See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
See Internet Engineering Task Force
IF
See intermediate frequency
IGMP
See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP snooping
A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages

and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,
the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IMA
See inverse multiplexing over ATM
indoor unit
The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,

multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Inloop
A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect
unit.
Institute of Electrical
and Electronics
Engineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
Intermediate System
The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate
routes.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
Intermediate System
datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing.
routing protocol
internal spanning tree
A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
International
Electrotechnical
Commission
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.
International
Organization for
Standardization
An international association that works to establish global standards for communications

and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted
ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers
connected by communications networks.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

880

E Glossary
International
Telecommunication
UnionTelecommunication
Standardization Sector
An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications

technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a
letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For
example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open
system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Control
Message Protocol
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering
Task Force
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.

Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet protocol
version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet protocol
version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
inverse multiplexing
over ATM
The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher
bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is
referred to as an IMA group.
IP
See Internet Protocol
IPV6
See Internet protocol version 6
IPv6
See Internet protocol version 6
IS-IS
See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol
ISO
See International Organization for Standardization
IST
See internal spanning tree
ITU-T
See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization

Sector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

881

E Glossary
J
Jitter
Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
E.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L
L2VPN
See Layer 2 virtual private network
label switched path
A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label

switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
label switching router
Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
LACP
See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG
See link aggregation group
LAN
See local area network
LAN
See local area network
LAPS
link access protocol-SDH
Laser
A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
layer 2 switch
A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet
network
switched (IP/MPLS) network.
LB
See loopback
LCAS
See link capacity adjustment scheme
LCT
local craft terminal
line rate
The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
line rate forwarding
The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to

increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE
802.3ad.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

882

E Glossary
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity
adjustment scheme
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Protection
Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,
the link protection should be provided.
LMSP
linear multiplex section protection
local area network
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
local area network
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching
When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
LOF
See Loss Of Frame
LOM
loss of multiframe
loopback
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP
See loss of pointer
LOS
See Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Frame
A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead

indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor
the performance of the PHY layer.
loss of pointer
Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the

PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of
cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal
Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
LP
lower order path
LPT
link-state pass through
LSP
See label switched path
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

883

LSR
E Glossary
See label switching router
M
MA
See maintenance association
MAC
See media access control
MAC
See media access control
MADM
multiple add/drop multiplexer
main topology
A interface that displays the connection relationships of NEs on the NMS (screen
display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the humanmachine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network,
the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as
the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed
here.
maintenance
association
That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the

connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.
maintenance
association end point
A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service
Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an
end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance
Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.
maintenance domain
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point
Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
management
information base
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It

comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
manual switch
Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
unit
depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
MBS
maximum burst size
MCF
See message communication function
MD
See maintenance domain
MDI
See medium dependent interface
Mean Time Between

Failures
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure

of the reliability of the system.
Mean Time To Repair
The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

884

E Glossary
media access control
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
media access control
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
medium dependent
interface
The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media
transmission.
MEP
See maintenance association end point
MEP
maintenance end point
message
communication
function
The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management

information with their prs.
MIB
See management information base
MIP
maintenance intermediate point
mounting ear
A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or
components.
MP
See maintenance point
MPID
maintenance point identification
MPLS
See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MPLS L2VPN
The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In
this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of
different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM
The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault
detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and
relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.
In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE
See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

885

E Glossary
MPLS TE tunnel
In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through

multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group
of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two
identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely
define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or
FILTER_SPEC object.
MS
See multiplex section
MSP
See multiplex section protection
MSTP
See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF
See Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR
See Mean Time To Repair
MTU
See maximum transmission unit
Multicast
A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section
The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.
multiplex section
protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
multiprotocol label
switching traffic
engineering
N/A
N
N+1 protection
A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE
See network element
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and
maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

886

network element
E Glossary
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which
manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC
board.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
System
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
point
access OSI network services.
network to network
interface
An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.
next hop
The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network
on its journey to its final destination.
NLP
normal link pulse
NMS
See Network Management System
NNI
See network to network interface
node
A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame,
one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for
one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.
Node Protection
A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to
protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to
protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR.
non-gateway network
element
A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be

transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE
See non-gateway network element
NSAP
See network service access point
NSF
not stop forwarding
O
OAM
See operation, administration and maintenance
ODF
See optical distribution frame
ODU
See outdoor unit
OM
Operation and maintenance
One-to-One Backup
A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected
tunnel at a PLR.
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

887

E Glossary
Open Systems
Interconnection
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by

different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation,
administration and
maintenance
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
optic fiber connector
A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source
(or a detector).+
optical distribution
frame
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
orderwire
A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or

maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF
See open shortest path first
outdoor unit
The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency

conversion and amplification for RF signals.
Outloop
A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without
changing the structure of the signals.
Output optical power
The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
E.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P
packet switched
network
A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
Packing case
A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.
Path
A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end
of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is
a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the
network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between
a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet
loss ratio or other aspects.
PBS
See peak burst size
PCB
See printed circuit board
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

888

E Glossary
PCI bus
PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit
for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.
PDH
See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDU
See protocol data unit
PE
See provider edge
peak burst size
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate
A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed
information rate.
penultimate hop
popping
Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS

enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged
packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an
adjacent Label Edge Router (LER).
per-hop behavior
IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop

behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
PHB
See per-hop behavior
PHP
See penultimate hop popping
PIR
See peak information rate
PLA
physical link aggregation
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
polarization
A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
Power box
A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
PPP
See Point-to-Point Protocol
PQ
See priority queue
PRBS
See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC
primary reference clock
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

889

E Glossary
printed circuit board
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components

using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
priority queue
An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three
operations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated
priority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority,
and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3) PeekAtNext
(optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it
protection ground
cable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection ground bar. Usually, one half
of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path
A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol data unit
It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.
provider edge
A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and
exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a
PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and
the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
sequence
values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire
An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes
edge-to-edge
of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched
Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
PSN
See packet switched network
PTN
packet transport network
PW
See pseudo wire
PWE3
See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
Q
QinQ
A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag
of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.
The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the
carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS
See quality of service
QPSK
See quadrature phase shift keying
quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying
the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

890

quality of service
E Glossary
A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.

Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
radio frequency
A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an

electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network
controller
A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the
radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
RDI
See remote defect indication
received signal level
The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received Signal
Strength Indicator
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
Receiver Sensitivity
Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received

power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
RED
See random early detection
Reed-Solomon-Code
A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of
errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission
errors at the receiver site.
REI
See remote error indication
remote defect
indication
A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal
detects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are
two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream
LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is
sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.
Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

891

E Glossary
Resource Reservation
Protocol
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure
A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end
transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end
to slow down the transmission rate.
RF
See radio frequency
RFC
See Request For Comments
RIP
See Routing Information Protocol
RMON
remote network monitoring
RMON
remote network monitoring
RNC
See radio network controller
Root alarm
An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level
alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route
A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
route table
A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination
address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to
the designated account according to the information set in the route table.
Routing Information
Protocol
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
routing table
A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers
regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the
destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in
hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.
Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RSL
See received signal level
RSSI
See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP
See Resource Reservation Protocol
RTN
radio transmission node
S
SD
See space diversity
SDH
See synchronous digital hierarchy
SEMF
See synchronous equipment management function
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

892

E Glossary
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the
forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization
(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement
as a whole or partially.
Service Level
Agreement *
A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service

provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about
measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating
and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and
customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the
documented target measure.
SES
See severely errored second
Setup Priority
The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the
resources required by other backup tunnels.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time
interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio
greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction).
SF
See signal fail
SFP
See small form-factor pluggable
side trough
The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the
cabinet.
signal cable
Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal fail
A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio
The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network
Management Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
simplex
Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be

transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.
SLA
See service level agreement
SLA*
See Service Level Agreement *
Slicing
To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.
small form-factor
pluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SNC
See subnetwork connection
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

893

E Glossary
SNCP
See subnetwork connection protection
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR
See signal to noise ratio
space diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance
to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SSM
See Synchronization Status Message
static virtual circuit
Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN
information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STM
See Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1
See synchronous transport mode-1
STM-N
See synchronous transport module of order N
STP
See Spanning Tree Protocol
sub-network
Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipment located in adjacent regions and closely
related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological
view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can
better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved,
on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipment
under their management.
subnet mask
The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the
association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection
protection
subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance
falls below a required level.
SVC
See static virtual circuit
switch
To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This
behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

894

E Glossary
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message
Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronous digital
hierarchy
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable
for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses
synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous
equipment
management function
The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into
object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.

mode-1
Synchronous
Transport Module
An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the
SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably
conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized
to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH.
See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64.
module of order N
T
tail drop
A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,
packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as
TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,
thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are
dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.
Tail drop
A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
TCI
tag control information
TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM
See time division multiplexing
TE
See traffic engineering
TEDB
See traffic engineering database
Telecommunication
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

895

E Glossary
TIM
trace identifier mismatch
time division
multiplexing
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time
slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted
over one channel.
time to live
A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TMN
See Telecommunication Management Network
ToS priority
A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
TPS
See tributary protection switch
traffic engineering
A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
traffic engineering
database
TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know
the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses
the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain
some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved
bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather
important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and
generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS
TE network.
Traffic shaping
It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee

the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic
in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer
devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
Transmission Control
Protocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tributary protection
switch
Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to

protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
trTCM
See two rate three color marker
TTL
See time to live
TU
tributary unit
Tunnel
A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

896

two rate three color

marker
E Glossary
The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak
Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated
burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the
PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or
doesn't exceed the CIR.
E.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U
U-VLAN
A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.
Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS
unavailable second
UBR
See unspecified bit rate
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol
underfloor cabling
The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI
See user network interface
unicast
The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unspecified bit rate
No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal

for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,
and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.
upload
An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network

Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored
at the NMS side.
User Datagram
Protocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Therefore, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
V
V-UNI
See virtual user-network interface
variable bit rate
One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR
See variable bit rate
VC
See virtual container
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

897

E Glossary
VCC
See virtual channel connection
VCG
See virtual concatenation group
VCI
See virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK
A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board
virtual channel
connection
The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.
virtual channel
identifier
A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to
identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on
its way to its destination.
virtual concatenation
group
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
virtual concatenation link
virtual container
The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists
of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block
frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 s.
virtual local area

network
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
virtual path identifier
The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN

service
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
virtual route forward
VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual
routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,
performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on
the device.
virtual user-network
interface
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service

classification and traffic control in HQoS.
VLAN
See virtual local area network
voice over IP
An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP
See voice over IP
VPI
See virtual path identifier
VPLS
See virtual private LAN service
VPN
See virtual private network
VRF
See virtual route forward
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

898

E Glossary
W
wait to restore
The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN
See wide area network
Web LCT
The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE

management layer of the transport network
weighted fair queuing
A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This

scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection
synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
weighted round Robin N/A
WFQ
See weighted fair queuing
wide area network
A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
winding pipe
A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
WRED
See weighted random early detection
WRR
See weighted round Robin
WTR
See wait to restore
X
XPIC
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
See cross polarization interference cancellation

899

RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description V100R003C03 01

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description V100R003C03 01

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

IDU Hardware Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

About This Document

About This Document

OptiX RTN 950

Network planning engineer

Hardware installation engineer

Installation and commissioning engineer

Field maintenance engineer

Data configuration engineer

System maintenance engineer

Basics of digital microwave communication

Basics of the OptiX RTN 950

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

About This Document

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Book titles are in italics.

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Command arguments are in italics.

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

About This Document

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

3.5.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................47

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

3.10.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................119

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

3.15.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................181

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

5.2 PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................................219

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table........................................................276

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control...........................................................360

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation..................................................................463